system manual simocode pro 631605022000 ds 01

SIMOCODE pro

System Manual Edition 03/2006

siriusTotally

IntegratedAutomation

MOTOR MANAGEMENT

Safety GuidelinesTable of ContentsImportant Notes

System Description 1Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter 2

Motor Protection 3

Motor Control 4

Monitoring Functions 5

Outputs 6

Inputs 7

Analog Value Recording 8

3UF50 Compatibility Mode 9

Standard Functions 10

Logic Modules 11

Communication 12

Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces 13

Commissioning and Servicing 14Alarm, Faults and System Messages 15

Tables A

Data Formats and Data Records B

Dimension Drawings C

Technical Data D

Example Circuits ESafety and Commissioning Infor-mation for EEx Areas F

Index

List of Abbreviations

Glossary

To

SIMOCODE pro

System Manual

Edition 03/2006

Order Number: 3UF7970-0AA00-0

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01

Safety GuidelinesThis manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger.

If more that one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage.

Qualified PersonnelThe device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.

Prescribed UsageNote the following:

TrademarksAll names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.

Disclaimer of LiabilityWe have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.

Danger

indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

Warning

indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

Caution

with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Caution

without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Notice

indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into account.

Warning

This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning and assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance.

Siemens AGAutomation and DrivesPostfach 4848D-90327 NürnbergGERMANY

Order No.: 3UF7970-0AA00-0Edition 03/2006

Copyright © Siemens AGTechnical data subject to change

Table Of Contents

Important Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix

1 System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21.2 Simplify Configuration with SIMOCODE pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41.3 Application Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61.4 Check List for Selecting the Device Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-81.5 Function Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-101.5.1 Protecting Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-101.5.2 Monitoring Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-101.5.3 Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-131.5.4 Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-141.5.5 Standard Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-141.5.6 Additional Signal Processing with Freely Programmable Logic Modules. . . 1-151.5.7 Operating, Service and Diagnostic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-161.6 Overview of System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-171.7 Description of the System Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-201.7.1 Basic Units (BU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-201.7.2 Operator Panel (OP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-221.7.3 Current Measuring Modules (IM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-241.7.4 Current/Voltage Measuring Modules (UM)

for the SIMOCODE pro V Device Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-251.7.5 Expansion Modules for the SIMOCODE pro V Device Series . . . . . . . . . 1-271.7.6 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-301.7.7 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-311.8 Structural Configuration of SIMOCODE pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-331.8.1 Function Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33

2 Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1 Introduction and Target of the Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22.2 Reversing Starter with Motor Feeder and Local Control Station . . . . . . . 2-32.3 Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62.4 Extending the Reversing Starter with a Control Station via PROFIBUS DP . 2-10

3 Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23.2 Overload Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43.3 Unbalance Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103.4 Stall Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113.5 Thermistor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

4 Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1 Control stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24.1.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24.1.2 Modes of Operation and Mode Selectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54.1.3 Enables and Enabled Control Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 i

Table Of Contents

4.1.4 Control Station Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94.2 Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104.2.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104.2.2 General Settings and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134.2.3 "Overload Relay" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164.2.4 "Direct Starter" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-174.2.5 "Reversing Starter" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-194.2.6 "MCCB Circuit Breaker" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-224.2.7 "Star-delta Starter" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-244.2.8 "Star-delta Starter with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation"

Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-274.2.9 "Dahlander" Control Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-314.2.10 "Dahlander with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation" Control Function . . 4-344.2.11 "Pole-changing Switch" Control Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-384.2.12 "Pole-changing Switch with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation"

Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-414.2.13 "Valve" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-454.2.14 "Positioner" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-474.2.15 "Soft Starter" Control Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-524.2.16 "Soft Starter with Reversing Contactor" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . 4-544.3 Active Control Stations, Contactor & Lamp Controls and Status Signal

for the Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57

5 Monitoring Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.1 Earth fault Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25.1.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25.1.2 Internal Earth Fault Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35.1.3 External Earth fault Monitoring (with Summation Current Transformer) . . . 5-45.2 Current Limits Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55.2.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55.2.2 I> (Upper Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65.2.3 I< (Lower Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75.3 Voltage Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85.4 Power Factor (cos phi) Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105.5 Active Power Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-125.6 0/4 A-20 mA Signal Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-145.7 Operation Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-175.7.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-175.7.2 Operating Hours Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-185.7.3 Stop Time Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-185.7.4 Monitoring the Number of Starts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-195.8 Analog Temperature Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-215.9 Hysteresis for Monitoring Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

6 Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26.2 Basic Unit Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46.3 Operator Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66.4 Digital Module Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86.5 Analog Module Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

SIMOCODE pro ii GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01

Table Of Contents

6.6 Cyclic Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-146.7 Acyclic Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

7 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27.2 Basic Unit Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47.3 Operator Panel Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67.4 Digital Module Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87.5 Temperature Module Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-107.6 Analog Module Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-127.7 Cyclic Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-147.8 Acyclic Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

8 Analog Value Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

9 3UF50 Compatibility Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

10 Standard Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-210.2 Test/Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-310.3 Test Position Feedback (TPF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-710.4 External Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-910.5 Operational Protection OFF (OPO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1110.5.1 Response for positioner control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1110.5.2 Response to other control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1310.6 Power Failure Monitoring (UVO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1410.7 Emergency start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1610.8 Watchdog (Bus Monitoring, PLC/DCS Monitoring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1710.9 Timestamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1910.9.1 Timestamping in the fault memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1910.9.2 Timestamping/time synchronization via PROFIBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

11 Logic Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

11.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-211.2 Truth Table for 3I/1O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-311.3 Truth Table for 2I/1O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-611.4 Truth Table for 5I/2O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-711.5 Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-811.6 Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1011.7 Signal Conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1311.8 Non-volatile Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1611.9 Flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1911.10 Flickering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2011.11 Limit Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21

12 Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

12.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-212.2 Transmitting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-412.3 Telegram Description and Data Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 iii

Table Of Contents

12.3.1 Cyclic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-512.3.2 Diagnostic Data and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-612.3.3 Configuration of the Slave Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-712.4 Integration of SIMOCODE pro in the DP master systems . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1512.4.1 Slave Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1512.4.2 Preparing the Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1512.4.3 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as a DPV1 Slave via GSD

in the Configuration Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1612.4.4 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as SIMATIC PDM Object

(DPV-1 Slave via GSD) in STEP7-HW Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1712.4.5 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as S7 Slave via OM SIMOCODE pro . . . . . 12-1812.5 Evaluating Diagnostic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1912.5.1 SIMOCODE pro integrated with GSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1912.5.2 Integration of SIMOCODE pro in SIMATIC S7 with OM SIMOCODE ES . . 12-2012.6 Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2112.7 Parameterization via PROFIBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2212.7.1 SIMOCODE ES Professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2212.7.2 SIMATIC PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2212.7.3 Starting up Parameter Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2312.8 Timestamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24

13 Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

13.1 General Information about Mounting and Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-213.2 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-313.2.1 Basic Units and Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-313.2.2 Current Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-413.2.3 Current/voltage Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-513.2.4 Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-613.3 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-713.3.1 Basic Units and Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-713.3.2 Current Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1913.3.3 Current/Voltage Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2013.3.4 Current Measuring with an External Current Transformer

(Interposing Transformer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2213.4 System Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2513.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2513.4.2 System Interfaces on Basic Units, Expansion Modules, Current

Measuring Modules and Current/Voltage Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . 13-2713.4.3 System Interfaces on the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2913.5 PROFIBUS DP on a 9-pole SUB-D socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3113.6 Installation Guidelines for the PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32

14 Commissioning and Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

14.1 General Information about Commissioning and Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . 14-214.2 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-314.2.1 Sequence of steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-314.2.2 Setting the PROFIBUS DP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-414.2.3 Diagnostics via LED Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-514.3 Servicing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-614.3.1 Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6

SIMOCODE pro iv GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01

Table Of Contents

14.3.2 Saving the Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-714.3.3 Replacing SIMOCODE pro Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-914.3.4 Resetting the Basic Factory Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12

15 Alarm, Faults and System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

A Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

A.1 Active Control Stations, Contactor & Lamp Controls and Status Messages for the Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

A.2 Abbreviations and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3A.3 Socket Assignment Table - Digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5A.4 Socket Assignment Table - Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12A.5 Detailed Events of the Slave Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14

B Data Formats and Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

B.1 Handling Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2B.1.1 Writing/reading Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2B.1.2 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3B.1.3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3B.2 Data Record 0/1 - S7 System Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4B.3 Data Record 63 - Recording of Analog Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6B.4 Data Record 67 - Process Image of the Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6B.5 Data Record 69 - Process Image of the Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7B.6 Data Record 72 - Fault Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8B.7 Data Record 92 - Device Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9B.8 Data Record 94 - Measured Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15B.9 Data Record 95 - Service/Statistical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16B.10 Data Record 130 - Basic Device Parameters 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-17B.11 Data Record 131 - Basic Device Parameter 2 (Plug) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-22B.12 Data Record 132 - Extended Device Parameter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26B.13 Data Record 133 - Extended Device Parameter 2 (Plug) . . . . . . . . . . . . B-32B.14 Data Record 139 - Marking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-35B.15 Data Record 160 - Communication Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-36B.16 Data Record 165 - Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-36B.17 Data Record 202 - Acyclic Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37B.18 Data Record 203 - Acyclic Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-38B.19 Data Record 224 - Password Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-39B.20 Assignment of Cyclic Control and Signaling Data for Predefined Control

Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-40B.20.1 Overload Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-40B.20.2 Direct Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-41B.20.3 Reversing Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-42B.20.4 Circuit Breaker (MCCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-43B.20.5 Star-delta Starter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-44B.20.6 Star-delta Starter with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation . . . . . . . . . B-45B.20.7 Dahlander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-46B.20.8 Dahlander with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-47B.20.9 Pole-changing Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-48B.20.10Pole-changing Switch with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation . . . . . . . B-49B.20.11Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-50

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 v

Table Of Contents

B.20.12Positioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-51B.20.13Soft Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-52B.20.14Soft Starter with Reversing Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-53

C Dimension Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

C.1 3UF70 Basic Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2C.1.1 SIMOCODE pro C 3UF7000 Basic Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2C.1.2 SIMOCODE pro V 3UF7010 Basic Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2C.2 3UF710 Current Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3C.2.1 Current Measuring Module (Push-through Converter)

3UF7100, 0.3 A to 3 A, 3UF7101, 2.4 A to 25 A , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3C.2.2 Current Measuring Module (Push-through Converter)

3UF7102, 10 A to 100 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4C.2.3 Current Measuring Module (Push-through Converter)

3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5C.2.4 Current Measuring Module (Rail Connection)

3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6C.2.5 Current Measuring Module (Rail Connection)

3UF7104, 63 A to 630 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7C.3 Current/Voltage Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8C.3.1 Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Push-through Converter)

3UF7110, 0.3 A to 3 A, 3UF7111, 2.4 A to 25 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8C.3.2 Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Push-through Converter)

3UF7112, 10 A to 100 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9C.3.3 Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Push-through Converter)

3UF7113-1AA, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10C.3.4 Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Rail Connection)

3UF7113-1BA, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11C.3.5 Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Rail Connection)

3UF7114, 63 A to 630 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12C.4 3UF7200 Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13C.5 Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14C.6 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15C.6.1 Door adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15

D Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

D.1 Common Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2D.2 Technical Data of the Basic Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3D.3 Technical Data of the Current Measuring Modules and

Current/Voltage Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5D.4 Technical Data of the Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7D.4.1 Technical Data of the Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7D.4.2 Technical Data of the Analog Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8D.4.3 Technical Data of the Earth-fault Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9D.4.4 Technical Data of the Temperature Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9D.5 Technical Data of the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11D.6 Short-circuit Protection with Fuses for Motor Feeders for Short-circuit

Currents up to 50 kA and 690 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-12

SIMOCODE pro vi GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01

Table Of Contents

E Example Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1

E.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2E.2 Example for the "overload relay" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3E.2.1 Circuit diagram for the "overload relay" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3E.2.2 Function circuit diagram for the "overload relay" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5E.3 Example for the "direct starter" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6E.3.1 Circuit diagram for the "direct starter" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6E.3.2 Function circuit diagram for the "direct starter". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7E.4 Example for a "reversing starter" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8E.4.1 Circuit diagram for the "reversing starter" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8E.4.2 Function circuit diagram for the "reversing starter" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9E.5 Example for the "circuit breaker (MCCB)" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10E.5.1 Circuit diagram for the "circuit breaker (MCCB)" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10E.5.2 Function circuit diagram for the "circuit breaker (MCCB)" . . . . . . . . . . . E-11E.6 Example for the "star-delta starter" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-12E.6.1 Circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-12E.6.2 Function circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-13E.7 Example for the "star-delta starter with reversal of the direction

of rotation" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-14E.7.1 Circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter with reversal of the direction of

rotation" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-14E.7.2 Function circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter with reversal of the

direction of rotation" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-15E.8 Example for the "Dahlander" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16E.8.1 Circuit diagram for the "Dahlander" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16E.8.2 Function circuit diagram for the "Dahlander" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-17E.9 Example for the "Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation"

circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-18E.9.1 Circuit diagram for the "Dahlander with reversal of the direction of

rotation" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-18E.9.2 Function circuit diagram for the "Dahlander with reversal of the direction

of rotation" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-19E.10 Example for the "pole-changing switch" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-21E.10.1 Circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-21E.10.2 Function circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch" . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-23E.11 Example for the "pole-changing switch with reversal of

the direction of rotation" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-24E.11.1 Circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch with reversal of the

direction of rotation" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-24E.11.2 Function circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch with reversal of

the direction of rotation" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-25E.12 Example for the "valve" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-27E.12.1 Circuit diagram for the "valve" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-27E.12.2 Function circuit diagram for the "valve" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-29E.13 Example of the "positioner" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-30E.13.1 Circuit diagram for "positioner 1" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-30E.13.2 Function circuit diagram for "positioner 1" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-31E.13.3 Circuit diagram for "positioner 2" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-32E.13.4 Function circuit diagram for "positioner 2" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-33E.13.5 Circuit diagram for "positioner 3" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-34E.13.6 Function circuit diagram for "positioner 3" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-35

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 vii

Table Of Contents

E.13.7 Circuit diagram for "positioner 4" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-36E.13.8 Function circuit diagram for "positioner 4" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-37E.13.9 Circuit diagram for "positioner 5" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-38E.13.10Function circuit diagram for "positioner 5" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-39E.14 Example for the "soft starter" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-40E.14.1 Circuit diagram for the "soft starter" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-40E.14.2 Function circuit diagram for the "soft starter" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-42E.15 Example for the "soft starter with reversing contactor" circuit . . . . . . . . . E-43E.15.1 Circuit diagram for the "soft starter with reversing contactor" . . . . . . . . . E-44E.15.2 Function circuit diagram for the "soft starter with reversing contactor" . . . E-46

F Safety and Commissioning Information for EEx Areas . . . . . . . . . . . F-1

F.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2F.2 Setting up and Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3F.2.1 Setting the Rated Current of the Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3F.2.2 SIMOCODE pro with Thermistor Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5F.2.3 Wiring of the Sensor Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6F.2.4 Short-circuit Protection according to IEC 60947-4-1 for

Type of Coordination 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6F.2.5 Cable Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-7F.2.6 Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-7F.2.7 Further Safety Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9F.2.8 Ambient Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9F.3 Maintenance and Repairs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9F.4 Guarantee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9F.5 Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-10

Index


Glossary

SIMOCODE pro viii GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01

Important Notes

Purpose of the manual

The SIMOCODE pro system manual describes in detail the motor manage-ment system and its functions. It contains information about configuring, commissioning, service and maintenance. The user is introduced to the system quickly and practically using a typical reversing motor application as an example. In addition to providing assistance for troubleshooting and eliminating faults, this manual also contains information of special importance to service and maintenance personnel. The manual contains circuit diagrams, dimension drawings and technical data about the system components to assist you in carrying out the configu-ration.

Required basic knowledge

Basic knowledge in the areas of low-voltage controls and distribution, digital circuit engineering and automation technology is required in order to be able to understand this manual.

Topics

This manual consists of instructional chapters which can be used to look up specific information. The following table lists the most relevant topics. The topics with a gray background represent the contents of the "SIMOCODE ES" parameterization and service software.

Topic Target group

System Description Configurators, plannersShort Instructions for Con-figuring a Reversing Starter

Configurators, planners, technicians, commissioners

Motor Protection Configurators, commissionersMotor Control Configurators, PLC programmersMonitoring Functions Configurators, programmers, commissioners, service per-

sonnelOutputs Configurators, planners, programmersInputs Configurators, planners, programmersAnalog Value Recording Configurators, programmers, commissioners, service per-

sonnel3UF50 Compatibility Mode Configurators, PLC programmersStandard Functions Configurators, programmersLogic Modules Configurators, programmersCommunication Configurators, PLC programmersMounting, Wiring and Interfaces

Mechanics, electricians, maintenance and service person-nel

Commissioning and Ser-vicing

Commissioners, electricians, maintenance and service per-sonnel

Alarms, Faults and System Messages

commissioners, maintenance and service personnel, confi-gurators, PLC programmers

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 ix

Important Notes

Scope of application

This manual is applicable for the components included in the SIMOCODE pro system. It contains a description of the components that are applicable at the time of printing the document. We reserve the right to include information about new components or new versions of components in additional documents.

Further documentation

• Please read the operating instructions of the respective components.• The DP-Master manual is also required in addition to this system manual.

Definitions

• If "SIMOCODE pro" is referred to, then both the "SIMOCODE pro C" and the "SIMOCODE pro V" series are meant.

Tables for the Responses of SIMOCODE pro

Using SIMOCODE pro, specific responses (Disabled, Signalling, Warning, Tripping) can be parameterized for various different types of functions (e.g. overload). They are always displayed in tabular form:• "X" = Applicable• "-" = Not applicable• "d" = Default.

Short description of the responses:• Disabled: The corresponding function is switched off, no signals are genera-

ted.• Signalling: Only a device-internal signal is generated which can be further pro-

cessed in any way.• Warning: A warning signal which is available as diagnosis for PROFIBUS DP is

generated in addition to the device-internal signal.• Tripping: The contactor controls QE* are switched off. An error message is

generated which is available as diagnosis for PROFIBUS DP. The error mes-sage and the device-internal signal remain on until the corresponding time has elapsed or the cause of the error has been eliminated and acknowledged.

A delay time can also be specified for specific responses.

Correction sheet

A correction sheet is included at the end of this manual. Please use it to fill in suggestions for improvements, additions and corrections and send it back to us. This helps us to improve the next edition.

Response Function 1 Function 2 Function 3

Tripping - X (d) X

Warning X (d) X -

Signalling X X -

Disabled X X X (d)

Delay 0 - 25.5 s - -

SIMOCODE pro x GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01

Important Notes

Exclusion of liability

The products described here were developed to carry out protection tasks as part of a complete plant or machine. In general, a complete safety system consists of sensors, evaluation units, signaling devices and methods for safe switching off. It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure the safe functioning of the complete plant or machine. Siemens AG, its subsidiaries and associated companies (herein referred to as "Siemens") is not in the position to guarantee every characteristic of a complete plant or machine that is not designed by Siemens.

Siemens also denies all responsibility for any recommendations that are given or implied in the following description. No new guarantee, warranty or liability above those standard to Siemens can be derived from the following description.

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 xi

Important Notes

SIMOCODE pro xii GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01

System Description 1In this chapter

In this chapter you will find an introduction and general information about the SIMOCODE pro system including e.g.• characteristics of both the SIMOCODE pro C and the

SIMOCODE pro V device series• simplifications of circuits with SIMOCODE pro• a function overview• an overview of the system components.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• planners and configurators• people who are now using SIMOCODE DP and in the future want to use

SIMOCODE pro as a replacement or as an additional system• optional for commissioners, maintenance and service personnel as additional

information about SIMOCODE pro• system integrators/process technology.

Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge:• basic knowledge about load feeders• basic knowledge about motor protection• basic knowledge of control engineering• basic knowledge of industrial bus technology.

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-1

System Description

1.1 Introduction

Description

SIMOCODE pro (SIRIUS Motor Management and Control Devices) is a system of motor management and control devices with a PROFIBUS DP interface. SIMOCODE pro is the further development of the SIMOCODE DP system.

SIMOCODE pro is a flexible, modular motor management system which combines all functions necessary for a motor feeder. Only the switching and short-circuit protection mechanisms of the main circuit (contactors, circuit breakers, fuses) are additionally needed. SIMOCODE pro replaces large sections of the control circuit and also auto-matically implements all the necessary interlockings. It provides a lot of ope-rating, service and diagnostic data making the functionality of the motor fee-der more transparent. It integrates the motor feeder completely into a main automation system via PROFIBUS DP.

Device series

SIMOCODE pro can be subdivided into two device series with different functions:• SIMOCODE pro C - the compact system for direct and reversing starters

and• SIMOCODE pro V - the variable system which also offers many other additio-

nal functions in addition to the SIMOCODE pro C functions.

Additional control programs are integrated in SIMOCODE pro V for star-delta starters, Dahlanders, pole-changing switches, soft starters - each also in combi-nation with reversal of the direction of rotation, as well as valves and positio-ners. SIMOCODE pro V is also especially versatile. Its functionality can be extended if required, e.g.– the number of binary inputs and outputs can be increased in stages and are

adjustable, new types can be added– a current/voltage Measuring module can be used for additional voltage

measuring and for monitoring power-related measured values (power mana-gement)

– a temperature module enables the evaluation of several analog temperature sensors

– an earth-fault detection system can be integrated together with a summation current transformer

– an analog module extends the system by additional analog inputs and out-puts, for example, for fill-level or flow-rate monitoring.

SIMOCODE pro C is upwards-compatible to SIMOCODE pro V. This means that you can use both ranges simultaneously in your plant according to your requirements.

SIMOCODE pro 1-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01

System Description

Independent operation

SIMOCODE pro C and pro V protect and control the motor feeder indepen-dently of the automation system. If the automation system (PLC) fails or if communication is disrupted, the motor feeder also remains protected and can still be controlled. SIMOCODE pro can be used without being connec-ted to PROFIBUS DP. This can be connected later according to need.

Typical configuration

The following schematic shows a typical configuration of SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V:

Figure 1-1: Typical configurations of SIMOCODE pro

UF-

0112

9

Current measuringmodule (IM)

Basic unit (BU1)

Operator panel (OP)

SIMOCODE pro C

Maximum configuration

UF-

0113

0

SIMOCODE pro V Basic unit (BU2)

Current measuringmodule (IM)

Operator panel (OP)

Digital module (DM)Analog module (AM)

Additional optional expansions are possible


System Description

1.2 Simplify Configuration with SIMOCODE pro

Conventional configuration without SIMOCODE pro

Individual components are used for all the control, monitoring and signal pre-processing. The following components must be used and the following wiring must be carried out:• inserting and wiring up the overload relays, thermistor evaluation devices,

current transformers, analog/digital converters• wiring up the control circuit• connecting the control devices for start/stop• bringing the contactor into locking mode via auxiliary switches• wiring up the interlocks

The following figure shows the conventional configuration of a direct starter:

Figure 1-2: Conventional configuration of a motor feeder (direct starter)

PLCStart/stop

Thermistorevaluation

Local start

Local stop

AutomaticManual-K11

1-X3

-K1

-K1S2

S1

-X2

-X1

-F3

-F2-

3/N/PE ~ 50/60Hz 400/230VL1L2L3NPE

Q1

- K1

1 3 5

2 4 6

1 3 5

2 4 6

- F21 3 5

2 4 6

M3~ J 1

PE

24...20 mA

1N

2DA

-K1 -K1 -F2 -F3

Switchgear

ON OFF

Over

load

Ther

mis

tor

Automation level / I/O module

-F3

WVU

Curre

nt

-Q1

open

-Q1

N

-K11 -K12

Feedback Control commands

Man

. / au

t.

ON /

OFF

-F4

1L1

-Q1

-K12


System Description

Configuration with SIMOCODE pro

Only SIMOCODE pro is used for complete control, monitoring and signal pre-processing. This offers the following advantages:• additional overload relays, thermistor evaluation devices, current transfor-

mers, analog/digital converters are not necessary• wiring up the control circuit (interlocking) is simplified• the start and stop switches are wired directly to the inputs of the basic unit• the contactor coil is activated via the output of the basic unit. The auxiliary

contact for locking is no longer necessary

The following figure shows the configuration with SIMOCODE pro:

Figure 1-3: Configuration of a motor feeder (direct starter) with SIMOCODE pro

3/N/PE ~ 50/60Hz 400/230VL1L2L3NPE

Q1

- K1

1 3 5

2 4 6

1 3 5

M3~

J

PE WVU

2 4 6

Current Measuringmodule (IM)

L1/L+

F11

K1N/L–

S0 S1

A2 A1

T1 T2

T1

T2

L+

PROFIBUS DP

Thermistor

Control station -local control [LC]

Basic unit (BU)

IN1 IN2 24 V

OUT 1 1


System Description

1.3 Application Example

Description

The fill level is monitored in a liquid container. A pump keeps the liquid level (reference value) almost constant by pumping more liquid into the container. The fill level (actual value) is measured by the fill-level indicator and output-ted as an analog signal. If the fill level sinks below a certain level, the pump is switched on by SIMOCODE pro. Liquid is pumped in until the reference value is again reached. Then the pump is switched off.

Controlling the pump

The pump can be controlled as follows:• locally: control station - local control [LC] for manual switching on and off (by

visual inspection)• in the switchgear cabinet door: control station operator panel [OP] for swit-

ching on and off manually• in the automation level: control station PLC/DCS [DP] for remote-controlled

switching on and off (automatic operation) via PROFIBUS DP• via SIMOCODE by means of internal logic modules.

Schematic

Figure 1-4: Schematic of a typical application example

3/N/PE ~ 50/60Hz 400/230VL1L2L3NPE

Q1

- K1

1 3 5

2 4 6

1 3 5

M3~

J

PE WVU

2 4 6

Systeminterface


Pump

L1/L+

F11

K1N/L–

Connecting cable

S0 S1

A2 A1

T1 T2

Analog module (AM)In+ In–

Out+ Out–

Fill-level indicator

T1

T2

L+

PLC/DCS

PROFIBUS DP

Thermistor

Liquid container

Control station -local control [LC]

Control stationPLC/DCS [DP]

Control station -Operator panel

Optional:Laptop withSIMOCODE ES

Display

Basic unit (BU 2)

Motor current

IN1 IN2 24 V

OUT 1 1


System Description

Recording, displaying and evaluating the measured values

The following measured values are required for monitoring the process:• pump motor current, which is measured by the current measuring module• analog value of the fill-level indicator, which is measured by the analog

module

The measured values are evaluated directly by SIMOCODE pro and/or trans-ferred via PROFIBUS DP to the PLC/DCS.

Any measured value can be outputted via the analog module, e.g. the effec-tive motor current when a pointer instrument is connected.

Optionally, e.g. a laptop can be connected to the operator panel with the SIMOCODE ES software in order to evaluate further process data locally.


System Description

1.4 Check List for Selecting the Device Series

The following check list should help you decide on the best device series for your requirements:

SIMOCODE pro

Requirement pro C

(BU1)

pro V

(BU2)

Footnote

Standard motor feeders (4 inputs, 3 outputs) with control functions for direct starters, reversing starters, intelligent overload relays

✓ ✓ 1)

Monitoring of blocking, unbalance, phase failure ✓ ✓ 1)

Current measuring, current limit monitoring, overload protection ✓ ✓ 1)

Earth-fault monitoring via current measuring module (internal) ✓ ✓ 1)

Thermistor motor protection with PTC (binary)✓ ✓

Motor feeder with control function: Star-delta starters, Dahlanders, pole-chan-ging switches, soft starters – each also possi-ble in combination with reversal of the direction of rotation –, valves, positioners

— ✓ 1)

Measuring, processing and outputting analog values e.g. flow rate, fill level, etc. (if necessary via an analog module)

— ✓ 2)

Current measuring and voltage measuring— ✓ 3)

Voltage monitoring for undervoltage— ✓ 3)

Power management, implementing power considerations (power, power factor), power monitoring

— ✓ 3)

More than 4 binary inputs required (maximum 12) — ✓ 2)

Table 1-1: Check list for selecting the device series

1) Via current measuring module2) With expansion modules3) Via current/voltage measuring modules


System Description

More than 3 relay outputs required (maximum 7) — ✓ 2)

Earth-fault monitoring with a summation cur-rent transformer via an earth-fault module — ✓ 2)

Binary inputs for 110 - 240 V AC/DC (max. 8) — ✓ 2)

Bistable relay outputs (max. 4) — ✓ 2)

Analog temperature monitoring with NTC, PT100, PT1000 and KTY 83/84 sensor types — ✓ 2)

SIMOCODE pro

Requirement pro C

(BU1)

pro V

(BU2)

Footnote

Table 1-1: Check list for selecting the device series (cont.)

1) Via current measuring module2) With expansion modules3) Via current/voltage measuring modules


System Description

1.5 Function Overview

1.5.1 Protecting Functions

For a more detailed description, see chapter 3 "Motor Protection".

Electronic overload protection

The basic unit has several protection mechanisms for current-dependent motor protection:• overload protection• phase unbalance• phase failure.

Stall protection

See chapter 3 "Motor Protection".

Thermistor protection

The basic units (BU1 and BU2) make it also possible to connect thermistor sensors (binary PTC) for monitoring the motor temperature.

1.5.2 Monitoring Functions

For a more detailed description, see chapter 5 "Monitoring Functions".

Earth-fault monitoring

The basic units have• Internal earth-fault monitoring:

For motors with a 3-cable connection, the basic unit evaluates a possible fault current/earth-fault current from the total current via a current measuring module or a current/voltage measuring module. Internal earth-fault monito-ring is only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in networks which are either grounded directly or grounded with low impedance.

• External earth-fault monitoring by SIMOCODE pro V 1),5): In the case of networks which are grounded with a higher impedance it may be necessary to set up the earth-fault monitoring for smaller earth-fault cur-rents using a summation current transformer instead of carrying out internal earth-fault monitoring via a current measuring module or a current/voltage measuring module. A maximum of one earth-fault module can be used to create an additional input on basic unit 2 to connect a 3UL22 summation cur-rent transformer. Rated fault currents of 0.3 A/ 0.5 A/ 1 A can be evaluated with the summation current transformer.

Current limit monitoring

The current limit monitoring function is used for process monitoring. Impen-ding irregularities in the system can be detected in good time: Exceeding a current limit which is still below the overload limit can e.g. indicate a dirty fil-ter on a pump or a motor bearing which is running more and more sluggis-hly. Falling below a current limit can be the first hint that a drive motor belt is worn out.


System Description

Voltage monitoring 2)

SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of voltage monitoring of a three-phase current network or a one-phase network for undervoltage or further availabi-lity:• Monitoring for undervoltage:

Two-phase monitoring for limits which can be freely chosen. The response of SIMOCODE pro V on reaching a particular pre-warning or trip level can be fre-ely parameterized.

• Monitoring for further availability: Even when the motor is switched off, SIMOCODE pro can display the further availability of the feeder by measuring the voltage directly at the circuit brea-ker or at the fuses.

Temperature monitoring 1),3)

The temperature module from SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of imple-menting analog temperature monitoring, e.g. of the motor windings or the bearings of up to 3 sensor measuring circuits. SIMOCODE pro V supports two-phase monitoring of overtemperature for freely selectable limits. The response of SIMOCODE pro on reaching a pre-warning or trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed. Temperature monitoring always takes place taking the highest temperature of all the sen-sor measuring circuits in use into account.

Active power monitoring 2)

The shape of the active power curve of a motor shows its actual load. A load which is too high leads to increased wear of the motor and as a result can, in certain circumstances, lead to premature motor failure. An active power which is too low can, for example, be a sign of no-load operation of the motor. SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of two-phase active power moni-toring for upper and lower limits which can be freely chosen. The response of SIMOCODE pro V on reaching a pre-warning or trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed.

Power factor (cos phi) monitoring 2)

Especially in the low-end performance range of a motor, the power factor changes more frequently than either the motor current or the active power does. For this reason, power factor monitoring is particularly suitable for distinguishing between non-load operation and faults, e.g. a tear in a drive belt or a break in a drive shaft.SIMOCODE pro V allows two-phase monitoring of the power factor (cos phi) for undershooting freely selectable limits. The response of SIMOCODE pro V on reaching a pre-warning or trip level can be freely para-meterized and delayed.


System Description

Monitoring operating hours, stop time and number of start-ups

SIMOCODE pro V can monitor the operating hours and the stop times of a motor in order to avoid plant downtimes due to failed motors because they were either running too long (wear) or they were stopped for too long a period of time. For example, if an adjustable limit value is exceeded, a signal can be issued which can indicate that maintenance on the relevant motor is necessary or even that the motor should be replaced. After replacing the motor, the ope-rating hours and stop times can be reset. In order to avoid excessive ther-mal strain on a motor and premature aging, the number of motor start-ups in a selected time frame can be limited. The limited number of possible starts can be indicated by pre-warnings.

Monitoring additional process variables via the analog module 1) 4)

SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of measuring and monitoring other pro-cess variables via the analog module. For example, the fill level can be monitored to protect the pump against dry operation, or the degree of pollution in a filter can be monitored using a dif-ferential pressure transducer. If the fill level undershoots a specified level, the pump can be switched off, or if the differential pressure overshoots a specified value, the filter should be cleaned.SIMOCODE pro V supports two-phase monitoring of the corresponding pro-cess variables for upper and lower limits which can be freely chosen. The response of SIMOCODE pro V on reaching a pre-warning or trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed.

Phase sequence identification 2)

SIMOCODE pro offers the option of determining the direction of rotation of a motor by identifying the phase sequence. If the direction of rotation is false, a signal can be generated or the motor switched off.

Monitoring measured values using unrestricted limit monitors 1)

SIMOCODE pro is able to monitor every measured value in the system for undershooting or overshooting a set threshold value by using unrestricted limit monitors.See chapter 11.11 "Limit Monitor".

1) When using basic unit 22) When using basic unit 2 with a current or voltage measuring module3) Additional temperature module required4) Additional analog module required5) Additional earth-fault module and summation current transformer required.


System Description

1.5.3 Control Functions

Depending on the device series, the following parameterizable control functions are available:

All the necessary protection functions and interlocks are already available and can be flexibly adapted and expanded.

For a more detailed description of the individual control functions, see chap-ter 4 "Motor Control".

SIMOCODE

Control function pro C

(BU1)

pro V

(BU2)

Overload relays ✓ ✓ 1)

Direct starters ✓ ✓ 1)

Reversing starters ✓ ✓ 1)

Circuit breakers (MCCBs) ✓ ✓ 1)

Star-delta starters, can be combined with reversal of the direction of rotation

— ✓

Dahlander, can be combined with reversal of the direction of rotation

— ✓

Pole-changing switches, can be combined with reversal of the direction of rotation

— ✓

Valves — ✓

Positioners — ✓

Soft starters, can be combined with reversal of the direction of rotation

— ✓

1) Due to additional requirements (e.g. power measuring), it may be necessary to select the BU2 device version.

Table 1-2: Control functions


System Description

1.5.4 Communication

PROFIBUS DP

SIMOCODE pro has an integrated PROFIBUS DP interface (SUB-D socket or terminal connection on the basic units).SIMOCODE pro supports, for example, the following services:

For a detailed description, see chapter 12 "Communication".

1.5.5 Standard Functions

Standard functions are predefined functions which can be easily activated, e.g. time-staggered restart of the drives after a power failure. SIMOCODE pro has the following standard functions:

Table 1-4: Standard functionsFor a detailed description, see chapter 10 "Standard Functions".

SIMOCODE

Service pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)

Baud rates up to 12 MBit/s ✓ ✓

Automatic baud rate recognition ✓ ✓

Cyclic services (DPV0) and acyclic services (DPV1)

✓ ✓

Operation as DPV1 slave downstream from the Y link

✓ ✓

Warnings according to DPV1 ✓ ✓

Time synchronization via PROFIBUS DP — ✓

3UF50 compatibility mode — ✓

Table 1-3: PROFIBUS DP services

SIMOCODE

Standard function pro C (BU1)

Number

pro V (BU2)

Number

Test 2 2

Reset 3 3

Test position feedback (TPF) 1 1

External fault 4 6

Operational protection off (OPO) — 1

Power failure monitoring (UVO) — 1

Emergency start 1 1

Watchdog (monitoring PLC/DCS) 1 1

Timestamping — 1


System Description

1.5.6 Additional Signal Processing with Freely Programmable Logic Modules

If you need any other additional functions for your application, you can use the logic modules which can be programmed freely. These can be used, for example, to implement logical functions, time relay functions and counter functions. Furthermore, every value in SIMOCODE pro can be monitored for undershooting or overshooting selected limit values using limit monitors.Depending on the device series, the system offers several logic modules which can be parameterized freely:

For a detailed description, see chapter 11 "Logic Modules".

SIMOCODE

Logic module pro C (BU1)

Number

pro V (BU2)

Number

Truth tables 3 inputs/1 output 3 6

Truth tables 2 inputs/1 output — 2

Truth tables 5 inputs/2 outputs — 1

Timers 2 4

Counters 2 4

Signal conditioners 2 4

Non-volatile elements 2 4

Flashing 3 3

Flickering 3 3

Limit monitor — 4

Table 1-5: Logic modules which can be programmed freely


System Description

1.5.7 Operating, Service and Diagnostic Data

SIMOCODE pro supplies a lot of detailed operating, service and diagnostic data:

Operating data

• Motor switching state (on, off, right, slowly, quickly), derived from the current flow in the main circuit; therefore no feedback via auxiliary contacts of circuit breakers and contactors is necessary

• Current in phases 1, 2 and 3 and maximum current in % of set current• Voltage in phases 1, 2 and 3 in V 2)

• Real power in W 2)

• Apparent power in VA 2)

• Power factor in % 2)

• Phase unbalance in %• Phase cycle 2)

• Temperature in the sensor measuring circuits 1, 2 and 3 and maximum tem-perature in °C 1) 3)

• Actual analog signal value 1) 4)

• Time to tripping in s• Heating up of the motor model in %• Remaining motor cooling down time in s, etc.

Service data

Among other things, SIMOCODE pro yields the following information for maintaining relevant data:• Number of motor operating hours, also resettable)• Motor stop times, also resettable• Number of motor starts, also resettable• Number of permissible starts remaining• Number of overload trippings, also resettable• Internal comments stored in the device referring to the feeder, e.g. informa-

tion regarding maintenance events, etc.

Diagnostic data

• Numerous detailed early warning and fault signals, also for further processing in the device or in the control system

• Internal device error protocolling with time stamp• Value of the last tripping current• Feedback faults (e.g. no current flow in the main circuit after switch-on com-

mand), etc.

1) When using basic unit 22) When using basic unit 2 with current/voltage measuring module3) Additional temperature module required4) Additional analog module required


System Description

1.6 Overview of System Components

Devices

SIMOCODE pro

Connectable

system components

pro C

(BU1)

pro V

(BU2)

Application

Operator panel (OP) Installation in the cabi-net door. Additional control station and display. With system interface for connec-ting a PC

Current measuring modules (IM) 0.3 A up to 3 A 2.4 A up to 25 A

Current measuring with push-through system. Basic unit can be snapped openCurrent measuring modules (IM)

10 A up to 100 A

Current measuring modules (IM) 20 A up to 200 A

Current measuring with push-through system or a rail con-nection system

Current measuring modules (IM) 63 A up to 630 A

Current measuring with a rail connection system

Current/voltage measuring modu-les (UM) *

0.3 A up to 3 A 2.4 A up to 25 A

—Mounting only next to the basic unit, other-wise similar to the current measuring modules, also:- voltage measuring- power measurement- power factor

(cos phi) measure-ment

- phase cycle


10 A up to 100 A —


20 A up to 200 A —


63 A up to 630 A —

Table 1-6: System components, devices


System Description

For a detailed description of the system components, see chapter 1.7 "Des-cription of the System Components".

For dimensional drawings, see chapter C "Dimension Drawings".

For assembly information, see chapter 13 "Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces".

Digital modules (DM)24 V DC monostable110 V up to 240 V AC/DC monosta-ble24 V DC bistable110 V up to 240 V AC/DC bistable

— Additional binary inputs and outputs. Maximum 2 DMs pos-sible

Analog module (AM) *

—Additional inputting and outputting as well as monitoring of ana-log values Max. 1 AM possible

Earth-fault module (EM) *

—For connecting a 3UL22 external sum-mation current trans-former for earth-fault monitoring Max. 1 EM possible

Temperature module (TM) *

—For monitoring tempe-rature via additional sensors (PT100, PT1000, KTY83/KTY84, NTC). Max. 1 TM possible.

SIMOCODE pro

Connectable

system components

pro C

(BU1)

pro V

(BU2)

Application

Table 1-6: System components, devices (cont.)


System Description

Accessories

Software

For parameterization, control, diagnostics and testing

SIMOCODE basic unit

Connectablesystem components

pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2) Application

Connecting cable in 4 different lengths ranging from 0.025 m up to 2 m

For connecting system components via system interfaces

System interface cover For covering system interfaces not in use

Memory module For saving the device parameters. In the case of device repla-cement, existing para-meters can be transferred without a PC

Addressing plug For configuring the PROFIBUS DP address without a PC

PC cable For connecting SIMOCODE pro to a PC

Door adapter Only for leading out the system interface e.g. from a switchgear cabinet

Table 1-7: System components, accessories

SIMOCODE basic unit

Software components pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2) Application

SIMOCODE ES Smart Access via the system interface on the device

SIMOCODE ES Professional with Object Manager OM SIMOCODE pro

Access via the system interface on the device and PROFI-BUS DP

SIMOCODE ES Graphic *) Graphical parameteri-zation per "Drag&Drop"

Table 1-8: System components, software

*) Optional software package for SIMOCODE ES Smart or SIMOCODE ES Professional


System Description

1.7 Description of the System Components

1.7.1 Basic Units (BU)

The basic units are the fundamental components of the SIMOCODE pro system. Basic units are always required when using SIMOCODE pro. They have a standard enclosure width of 45 mm and are equipped with detacha-ble terminals:

Figure 1-5: Basic units

Basic unit 1 (BU1)

Basic unit 1 is the fundamental component of the SIMOCODE pro C device series. The following motor control functions are supported:• overload relays• direct starters and reversing starters• circuit breaker activation.

Basic unit 2 (BU2)

Basic unit 2 is the fundamental component of the SIMOCODE pro V device series. The following motor control functions are supported:

• overload relays• direct and reversing starters• star-delta starters, also with reversal of the direction of rotation• 2 speeds, motors with separate windings (pole-changing switches), also with

reversal of the direction of rotation• 2 speeds, motors with superette Dahlander windings, also with reversal of

the direction of rotation• slide control• valve control• circuit breaker control (MCCB)• soft starter control, also with reversal of the direction of rotation.

Basic unit 1 (BU1) Basic unit 2 (BU2)SIMOCODE pro C device series SIMOCODE pro V device series


System Description

Basic unit 2 offers the following expansion options:• increasing the device functionality if necessary using expansion modules of

22.5 mm width• using a current/voltage measuring module instead of the current measuring

module used• additional inputs and outputs if necessary.

Supplying the inputs

See chapter 13.3 "Wiring".


System Description

1.7.2 Operator Panel (OP)

The operator panel is often integrated into the front panels of motor control centers. It can be used with the SIMOCODE pro C as well as with the SIMOCODE pro V device series. It contains all the status LEDs which are on the basic units, the "TEST/RESET" button and makes the system interface externally available. It also offers the option of controlling the motor feeder from the cabinet. For this, the operator panel is equipped with• 5 buttons, of which 4 can be parameterized freely• 10 LEDs, of which 7 can be parameterized freely

The following figure shows an operator panel:

Figure 1-6: Operator panel

The operator panel can be connected to the basic unit or to the expansion module on the back of the system interface. The voltage is supplied by the basic unit.A PC with SIMOCODE ES or the memory module and the addressing plug can be connected using the PC cable via the system interface on the front (with a cover for IP54). Legend strip: Legend strips for designating buttons 1 to 4 as well as LEDs 1 to 3 are enclosed:• Buttons 1 to 4:

6 pre-assigned and 1 individually inscribable legend strip• LEDs 1 to 3:

1 individually inscribable legend strip.

Figure 1-7: Legend strip for operator panel buttons and LEDs

Operator panelSIMOCODE pro CSIMOCODE pro V

Device series

0

DEVICE BUS GEN. FAULT

Button 1 Button 2 Button 3

TEST/RESET

Button 4

LED 1 LED 2 LED 3


System Description

Unused legend strips can be stored on the back of the operating panel:

Figure 1-8: Storage clips for legend strip

Memory module "park position":The memory module can be protected from unauthorized use by "parking" it on the back of the control panel. In this case, the storage clips for the legend strip cannot be used.

Figure 1-9: Memory module in the park position

Storage clips

Legend strip

Memory module


System Description

1.7.3 Current Measuring Modules (IM)

Current measuring modules are used with the basic units of the SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V device series. The current measuring module must be selected according to the set cur-rent to be monitored (rated operating current of the motor). The current measuring modules cover current ranges between 0.3 A and 630 A, with interposing transformers up to 820 A.The following figure shows the different current measuring modules:

Figure 1-10: Current measuring modules The current measuring module is connected to the basic unit via a connec-ting cable which also supplies the power. Current measuring modules up to 100 A are suitable for standard rail mounting or can be fixed directly to the mounting plate using additional push-in lugs. The basic units can be snap-ped directly onto the current measuring modules. The current measuring modules up to 200 A can also be mounted on the standard rail or, optionally, they can be fixed directly to the mounting plate with the screw attachments which are integrated into the enclosure. The current measuring module up to 630 A can only be mounted using the integrated screw attachments.

Current measuring modulesSIMOCODE pro CSIMOCODE pro V

Device series

0.3A - 3A2.4A - 25A

10A - 100A

20A - 200A 63A - 630A


System Description

1.7.4 Current/Voltage Measuring Modules (UM) for the SIMOCODE pro V

Device Series

The SIMOCODE pro V device series offers the option of using a current/ voltage measuring module instead of a current measuring module. In addi-tion to measuring the motor current, current/voltage measuring modules can also• monitor voltages up to 690 V• evaluate and monitor the power and power factor (cos phi)• monitor the phase cycle

The following figure shows the different current/voltage measuring modu-les:

Figure 1-11: Current/voltage measuring modules

The current/voltage measuring module is connected to the basic device via a connecting cable which also supplies the power. Current/voltage measu-ring modules up to 100 A are suitable for standard rail mounting or can be fixed directly to the mounting plate using additional push-in lugs. The cur-rent/voltage measuring modules up to 200 A can also be mounted on the standard rail or, optionally, they can be fixed directly to the mounting plate with the screw attachments which are integrated into the enclosure. Moun-ting is only possible via the internal screw attachments for the current/voltage measuring modules up to 630 A. Basic units can only be mounted separately next to the current/voltage measuring modules.

Current/ voltage measuring modulesSIMOCODE pro V

Device series

0.3A - 3A2.4A - 25A

10A - 100A

20A - 200A 63A - 630A

Monitoring voltages up to 690 V


System Description

Note The use of a current/voltage measuring module requires basic unit 2, pro-duct version EO2 (from 04/2005) or later.

Current/voltage measuring modules have additional detachable terminals for the evaluation or monitoring of performance variables which can be fed with all three phase voltages of the main circuit.


System Description

1.7.5 Expansion Modules for the SIMOCODE pro V Device Series

Expansion modules are intended as optional additions for the SIMOCODE pro V device series. The following expansion modules are available:• digital modules (DM)• analog module (AM)• earth-fault module (EM)• temperature module (TM).

All expansion modules have the same design with an enclosure width of 22.5 mm. They are equipped with 2 system interfaces (incoming/outgoing) and detachable terminals.The following figure shows an expansion module:

Figure 1-12: Expansion module

Digital module (DM)

Digital modules offer the option of further increasing the types and number of binary inputs and relay outputs on basic unit 2, if required. The following digital modules are available for basic unit 2:

Table 1-9: Versions of digital modules

A maximum of 2 digital modules can be connected to basic unit 2. This means that 4 additional binary inputs and 2 additional binary outputs are available. All versions listed here can be combined with each other. SIMOCODE pro V can thus be extended to a maximum of 12 binary inputs and 7 relay outputs.

Inputs Supply Outputs

4 inputs 24 V DC, external 2 monostable relay outputs

4 inputs 110 - 240 V AC/DC, external 2 monostable relay outputs

4 inputs 24 V DC, external 2 bistable relay outputs

4 inputs 110 - 240 V AC/DC, external 2 bistable relay outputs

Expansion moduleSIMOCODE pro V

Device series


System Description

With the monostable version, the relay outputs open after switching off/failure/interruption of the supply voltage. With the bistable version, the swit-ching state of the relay outputs remains intact even after switching off/failure/interruption of the supply voltage.If necessary, you can set a debounce time for the digital module inputs (see chapter 7.4 "Digital Module Inputs".Supplying the inputs: see also chapter 13.3 "Wiring".

Analog module (AM)

By means of the analog module, basic unit 2 can be optionally expanded by analog inputs and outputs (0/4 mA to 20 mA). As a result, it is possible to measure and monitor any process variable which can be mapped on to a 0/4 mA - 20-mA signal. Typical applications are, for example, fill level monitoring for protecting pumps from dry operation or the monitoring of pollution in a filter using a differential pressure transducer. In this case, the automation system has free access to the measured processed variables. The analog output can, for example, be used for the visualization of any process variables on a pointer instrument. The automation system can also freely access the output.• 1 analog module can be connected to BU2• 2 analog inputs for detecting signals from 0/4-mA - 20-mA.

Both inputs are set to either 0 to 20 mA or 4 mA - 20 mA• 1 output for outputting a 0/4 mA - 20 mA signal.

Note The use of an analog module requires basic unit 2, product version EO2 (from 04/2005) or later.

Earth-fault module (EM)

In the case of networks which are grounded with a higher impedance it may be necessary to set up the earth-fault monitoring for smaller earth-fault cur-rents using a 3UL22 summation current transformer instead of carrying out earth-fault monitoring via a current measuring module or a current/voltage measuring module. Rated fault currents of 0.3 A, 0.5 A, 1 A can be evaluated with the summation current transformer. In addition to the internal earth-fault monitoring supported by both device series, SIMOCODE pro V can therefore be expanded by a supplementary, external and more precise earth-fault monitoring system. An additional input for connecting a summation current transformer can be added to basic unit 2 via the earth-fault module.

• 1 earth-fault module can be connected to BU2.

Note The use of an earth-fault module requires basic unit 2, product version EO2 (from 04/2005) or later.


System Description

Temperature module (TM)

The temperature module offers the option of expanding the SIMOCODE pro V device series by an analog temperature monitoring system. With this, up to 3 analog sensor measuring circuits (in two or three-wire systems) can be connected, the temperatures in the 3 sensor measu-ring circuits evaluated as well as the highest temperature in all the sensor measuring circuits determined.The temperatures recorded can be fully integrated into the process, can be monitored and are also available for a main automation system. You can, for example, implement analog temperature monitoring of the motor winding, bearings, coolant and gear oil temperature. SIMOCODE pro V supports various sensor types (NTC, KTY83/84, PT100 and PT1000) for use in hard, fluid or gaseous media.

Attention The same sensor type must be used in all sensor measuring circuits.

• 1 temperature module can be connected to BU2• 3 sensor measuring circuits in 2 or 3-wire systems

Note The use of a temperature module requires basic unit 2, product version EO2 (from 04/2005) or later.


System Description

1.7.6 Accessories

The following figure shows accessories which are independent of the device series:

Figure 1-13: Accessories

PC cable

for the device parameterization, for connecting a PC to the system interface of a basic unit via its serial interface.

Memory module

for plugging onto the system interface and for fast reading in or out of the entire SIMOCODE pro parameterization, e.g. in the case of a unit replace-ment (see chapter 14.3.3 "Replacing SIMOCODE pro Components").

Addressing plug

for the "hardware" transfer of the PROFIBUS DP address to a basic unit wit-hout a PC/programming device.Setting the PROFIBUS DP address with an addressing plug: Please see chapter 14.2.2 "Setting the PROFIBUS DP Address".

Connecting cable

in different lengths and various versions (ribbon cable 0.025 m, 0.1 m, 0.5 m; round cable 2.0 m). They are required for connecting the individual basic units with their current measuring modules and, if necessary, with their expansion modules or operator panels. The total length of all the con-necting cables should not exceed pro System 3 m!

Door adapter

for making the system interface of a basic unit available at an easily accessi-ble location (e.g. front panel), thus guaranteeing fast parameterization.

System interface cover

to protect the system interfaces from dirt or to seal them. In normal opera-tion, system interfaces which are not used must be closed.

PC cable

Memory module

Addressing plug

Connecting cable

System interfacecover

SIMOCODE pro CSIMOCODE pro V

Device series

Door adapter


System Description

1.7.7 Software

SIMOCODE pro offers different software tools for thorough, time-saving parameterization, configuration and diagnostics:

SIMOCODE ES

SIMOCODE ES is the standard parameterization software for SIMOCODE pro, which is runnable on a PC/programming device under Win-dows 2000 or Windows XP. It is available in 2 versions:• SIMOCODE ES Smart, for directly connecting the PC/programming device

(serial interface) to SIMOCODE pro with a PC cable via the system interface on the device (point to point)

• SIMOCODE ES Professional, for connecting one or more devices via PROFIBUS DP and/or via the system interface on the device. You can find a demo and the latest updates on the Internet at http://www.ad.siemens.de/simocode -> Support -> Tools & Downloads.

SIMOCODE ES Graphic is an optional software package for SIMOCODE ES Smart or SIMOCODE ES Professional. It extends the user interface by a graphics editor and as a result allows very ergonomic and user-friendly parameterization per "Drag & Drop". The inputs and outputs from function blocks can be graphically linked and the parameters set. The device parameterization can be graphically documented.

Note Prerequisite for the installation of SIMOCODE ES Graphic is an installed ver-sion of SIMOCODE ES Smart 2004 + service pack 1 or SIMOCODE ES Professional + service pack 1 on the PC/programming device.

Object Manager OM SIMOCODE pro

Part of SIMOCODE ES Professional. When SIMOCODE ES Professional and the OM SIMOCODE pro are installed on a PC/programming device, SIMOCODE ES Professional can be called directly from Step7 HW configu-ration. Thus, a simple and thorough SIMATIC-S7 configuration is made pos-sible.

PCS 7 library SIMOCODE pro

With the PCS-7 library SIMOCODE pro, SIMOCODE pro can be connected easily and conveniently to the SIMATIC PCS 7 process control system. The PCS-7 library SIMOCODE pro contains• the corresponding diagnostic and driver blocks with the diagnostic and driver

concept of SIMATIC PCS 7• the elements necessary for operator control and process monitoring (sym-

bols and faceplate)

Attention Observe the respective system versions!


http://www.ad.siemens.de/simocode



http://www4.ad.siemens.de/WW/view/de/10805317/133100


System Description

GSD File

for the integration into SIMATIC S7 or into any DP standard master system (automation system). You will find the current english version on the Inter-net at http://www.ad.siemens.de. You will find further information on the integration of DP slaves in the docu-mentation for the automation system.

Win SIMOCODE DP Converter

is a software tool for converting "old" Win SIMOCODE DP parameter files (3UF5 device series) into SIMOCODE ES parameter files for SIMOCODE pro.


http://www.ad.siemens.de

System Description

1.8 Structural Configuration of SIMOCODE pro

1.8.1 Function Blocks

Characteristics

In the SIMOCODE pro system, there are internal function blocks e.g. for control stations, control functions and motor protection. Every function block has a name and is equipped with inputs and outputs. The following table shows the possible input and output types of the inter-nal functions blocks from SIMOCODE pro:

Table 1-10: Input and output types of the internal function blocks from SIMOCODE pro

Input Symbol Example

Plugs (binary)

Function blocks in the basic unit can have binary plugs. These are connected via software to binary sockets. They are relevant for the parameterization e.g. with SIMOCODE ES.

Plugs (analog)

Function blocks in the basic unit can have analog plugs. These are connected via software to analog sockets. They are relevant for the parameterization e.g. with SIMOCODE ES.Example: 2-byte word for cyclic signaling data.

Screw termi-nals

Screw terminals are outside e.g. function block "BU - input". Control devices and auxiliary switches are usually connected there.

Control data from PROFIBUS DP

From the DP master to SIMOCODE pro e.g. function block "Cyclic control".

Output

Sockets (binary)

Function blocks in the basic devices can have binary sockets. These are assigned via software to binary plugs. They are relevant for the parameterization e.g. with SIMOCODE ES.

Sockets (analog)

Function blocks in the basic devices can have analog sockets. Sockets are assigned via software to analog plugs. They are relevant for the parameterization e.g. with SIMOCODE ES. Example: 2-byte word max. current I_max.

Screw termi-nals

Screw terminals are outside e.g. function block "BU - output". Contactors, e.g., are connected there.

Signaling data to PROFIBUS DP

From SIMOCODE pro to the DP master e.g. function block "cyclic signaling data".

Binary connecting blocks

Internal binary signals (binary sockets) which are not assigned to a function block (fault, status, other), e.g. "Status - device o.k." (in the graphics editor).

Analog connecting blocks

Internal analog signals (analog sockets) which are not assigned to a function block, e.g. "Phase unbalance" (in the graphics editor).

DP

DP


System Description

Schematic of principle structural configuration

The following function block diagram shows the principal configuration of SIMOCODE pro with its external inputs and outputs and the internal function blocks:

Figure 1-14: Principal configuration of SIMOCODE-pro

Connecting plugs with sockets

Note The plugs and sockets of the function blocks have not already been connec-ted at the factory with the binary inputs and the relay outputs of the basic unit. The internal wiring (connecting the plugs and sockets) is determined by the user according to his respective application. 1)

Attention If external wiring has already been carried out, but SIMOCODE pro has not yet been parameterized: If you now press a button, the contactors will not be activated!1)

1) If you select and load a preset application in SIMOCODE ES, e.g. the reversing starter, all links and interlocks for the reversing starter are created in the basic unit.

1

2

3

1

2

Bit 0.0

Bit 0.1

Bit 0.2

Bit 0.0

Bit 0.1

Bit 0.2

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4 4

OUT1

OUT2

OUT3

BU inputs

Cyclicsignaling

Cycliccontrol

BU outputs

3

DP DP

From theTo the DPMaster

PROFIBUS DP

BU

PROFIBUS DP

Function block A

Function block C

Function block B

Inputs(terminals) Sockets Plugs Sockets

4

Outputs(terminals)Plugs

external BU internal

Standard function

Control function

Logic function

Standard function

Function block D DPMaster


Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter 2In this chapter

In this chapter you will find short instructions for configuring a reversing starter including an example. Most of the parameters are appropriately set as factory defaults for most of the applications. Only a few parameters have to be set.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups: • planners• configurators• mechanics• electricians• commissioners.

Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge: • basic knowledge about SIMOCODE pro (see Chapter 1 "System Description")• basic knowledge of the SIMOCODE ES parameterization software.


Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter

2.1 Introduction and Target of the Example

Introduction

The following simple example of a reversing starter demonstrates step-by-step how to work with SIMOCODE pro. In this context, the reversing starter will be equipped with • a local control station• and then with a second control station with PROFIBUS DP

The SIMOCODE ES software is used for parameterization. The PC/programming device is connected to the basic unit via PC cable.

Target of the example

This example is intended to 1. Show you how to implement a standard switching operation of a reversing

starter with SIMOCODE pro in only a few steps2. Help you modify this example for your respective application 3. Help you easily implement other applications

Important steps

The two important steps with SIMOCODE pro are always: • implementation of the external wiring (for control and feedback of main cur-

rent switching devices and control and signaling devices)• implementation/activation of internal SIMOCODE pro functions (function

blocks), with control and analysis of the SIMOCODE pro inputs/outputs (inter-nal SIMOCODE wiring).

Conditions

• Load feeder/motor present• PLC/DCS control with PROFIBUS DP interface is present• The main circuit of the reversing circuit including the current measuring mod-

ule is already wired. In this case, the 3 cables leading to the motor must be led through the push-through system openings of the current measuring module.

• PC/programming device is present• The SIMOCODE ES software is installed• The basic unit has the basic factory default settings.

In chapter 14.3.4 "Resetting the Basic Factory Default Settings" you will learn how to implement the basic factory default settings.



2.2 Reversing Starter with Motor Feeder and Local Control

Station

Necessary components

The following table shows the components that are required for this example:

Table 2-1: Components needed for the example

Item Ordering data Order number

1 SIMOCODE pro C basic unit (SIMOCODE pro V also possible)

3UF7000-1AU00-0 (3UF7010-1AU00-0)

2 Current measuring module 0.3 A up to 3 A 3UF7100-1AA00-0

3 Connecting cable for connecting the basic unit and the current measuring module, depending on the length

3UF793.-1AA00-0

4 "SIMOCODE ES Smart" software for parameterization via the system interface or "SIMOCODE ES Professional" software for parameterization via the PROFIBUS DP and sys-tem interface, including STEP-7 Object Manager pos-sible

3ZS1 312-1CC10-0YA0 (3ZS1 312-2CC10-0YA0

5 PC cable for connecting the basic device to a PC/ pro-gramming device

3UF7940-0AU00-0

6 PROFIBUS DP cable



Circuitry of the reversing starter with SIMOCODE pro

The following schematic shows the circuitry of the main circuit and the con-trol circuit:

Figure 2-1: Circuitry of the main circuit and the control circuit with SIMOCODE pro

Main circuit Control circuit

3/N/PE ~ 50/60 Hz 400/230 VL1L2L3NPE

Q1

- K1

1 3 5

2 4 6

1 3 5

M3~

J

PE WVU

2 4 6


L1/L+

F11

K1N/L–

S0 S1

A1 A2

Motor, motor rated current e.g. 3 A

Basic unit (BU)3 push-throughsystem openings

Systeminterface

Connecting cable Systeminterface

S2

K2

CLASS 10Optional: thermistor

1 3 5

2 4 6- K2

IN1 IN2 IN3 24 V

OUT1 OUT2 1



Circuit diagram of the control circuit of a reversing starter

The following schematic shows the circuit diagram of the control circuit with a local control station for the commands• LEFT• OFF• RIGHT.

Displays, signals, etc. are not taken into account.

Figure 2-2: Circuit diagram of the control circuit of a reversing starter

The necessary interlocks and links are carried out via the software in the basic unit.

Standard reversing starter Reversing starter w. SIMOCODE pro

Necessary interlocks and links

S0: "LEFT" button S1: "OFF" button S2: "RIGHT" button

K1: Contactor clockwise rotation K2: Contactor counterclockwise rotation

L1/L+

F11

K1N/L–

S0 S1

A1 A2

Basic unit (BU)

K2

S2

L1/L+

N/L–K2

K2

K1

S2

S1

K1

K2

S0

K1

IN1 IN2 IN3 24 V

OUT1 OUT2 1



2.3 Parameterization

The basics of parameterization

After the external connections have been carried out (contactor coils con-nected, current measuring module integrated in the main circuit), the sec-ond step is the parameterization of SIMOCODE pro. For this you need to know the following points:

Table 2-2: Schematic of the different function blocks in SIMOCODE pro

Point Description

1 Function blocks are stored internally in the SIMOCODE pro system, e.g. for control stations and control functions with motor protection.

2 Function blocks have names.

3 Function blocks can have settings, e.g. the type of control function and the set current for the overload protection.

4 Function blocks have plugs and sockets. These are clearly designated.

5 You have to do the following in order to achieve the desired functionality:• connect the function blocks by connecting specific plugs to specific sockets

(i.e put the plugs in the sockets)• if required, set the values in the function blocks, e.g. the set current,

type of control function

6 The inputs of the function blocks in the basic device are designated and labeled as plugs:

7 The outputs of the function blocks in the basic device are designated and labelled as sockets:

8 Plugs and sockets of the inputs and outputs of the devices are not connected as factory defaults. If you press a button now, the contactors are not acti-vated.



General procedure for parameterizing a reversing starter

Parameterization means:1. Setting values2. Linking function blocks

In the example, this means the following: • You choose the "reversing starter" control function to implement all interlocks

and links in the basic device for the reversing starter. • You determine the set current Ie for the motor protection. In this case, the

set current corresponds to the motor rated current, here 3 A. • The "BU - outputs" function block must be connected to the sockets of the

"protecting/controlling" function block via the software. This means– connect "BU - output 1" to the socket "Contactor control QE1" (right)– connect "BU - output 2" to the socket "Contactor control QE2" (left).

• the plugs of the "protecting/controlling" function block must be connected to the sockets of the "BU - inputs" function block via the software. This means

– connect local control station [LC] ON< to socket "BU - input 1"– connect local control station [LC] OFF to socket "BU - input 2"– connect local control station [LC] ON> to socket "BU - input 3".

Figure 2-3: Schematic of an example of parameterization

The assignment of the contactor controls QE depends on the parameterized control function. See chapter 4.3 "Active Control Stations, Contactor & Lamp Controls and Status Signal for the Control Functions".

SIMOCODE pro

• Connectrelay outputs

1

21

2

3

BU - inputs

Local control station [LC] Contactor controls

• Choose a reversing starter• Determine Ie

• Connectdigital inputs

BU - outputs

QE1

QE2ON<

OFF

ON>

Protecting/controlling

Ie = 3 A

Right

Left



Concrete procedure for parameterization with SIMOCODE ES

Carry out the following steps:

Table 2-3: Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES

Step Description

1 Start SIMOCODE ES on your PC/programming device.

2 Choose the control function "reversing starter" as the application. When you select this application, a range of presettings will be automatically carried out that you will have to check later.

3 Under "Device configuration", select either SIMOCODE pro C or SIMOCODE pro V. Deactivate the operator panel if not present.

4 Open the dialog Device parameters > Motor protection > Overload/unbalance/

blocking. Set the set current Ie1 to 3A.

5 Open the dialog Further function blocks > Outputs > Basic device and check the following settings:• Contactor control > Contactor control QE1.• Contactor control > Contactor control QE2.

6 Open the dialog Device parameters> Motor control > Control stations and check the following settings:• local control [LC] ON<: BU - input 1

• local control [LC] OFF: BU - input 2

• local control [LC] ON>: BU - input 3

Check if the releases for "ON" and "OFF" for the operating mode "local2" are set.

7 Parameterization is finished. Store the parameter file on your PC/ program-ming device using Switchgear > Save.

The relay outputs are connected to the contactor controls.

Note By choosing a preset application (step 2), other presettings might be made when assigning the BU outputs to the contactor controls.

QE1

QE2

1

2

BU - inputsProtecting/controlling

The control station is now connected "locally" with the binary inputs of the basic unit.1

2

3

BU - outputs

ON<

OFF

ON>




Transferring the parameters to the basic device and commissioning

After creating the parameter file, you can transfer it to SIMOCODE pro and start up the reversing starter. To do this, execute the following steps:

Table 2-4: Transferring the parameters to the basic unit and commissioning

Attention Switching between "right" and "left" is only possible via "OFF" and after expi-ration of the preset interlocking time of 5 seconds.

Configuration with local control station is finished

The configuration with SIMOCODE pro is now finished. You now have a functional reversing starter with a local control station. If the wiring and parameterization is correct, the contactors for clockwise and counterclockwise rotation are activated when the corresponding but-tons are pushed.

Step Description

1 Switch on the voltage supply of the basic device.

2 Connect the serial interface of the PC/programming device and the system interface of the basic unit with the PC cable.

3 Observe the status LED on the basic unit. The "Device" LED should light up green. SIMOCODE pro can be started up.

4 Transfer the parameter file to the basic unit via the menu e.g. using Target system > Load in switchgear. Choose the RS232 interface with which SIMOCODE pro is connected to the PC via the PC cable.

5 After having transferred the data to the basic device, you will receive the message "Download to the switchgear finished successfully".



2.4 Extending the Reversing Starter with a Control Station

via PROFIBUS DP

In this section

In this section you will find out how the previously configured example can be extended by one control station via PROFIBUS DP. You have the option of using either the local control stations (local control) or PLC/ DCS (remote control). This enables SIMOCODE pro to be controlled locally via buttons as well as via PLC/ DCS. The necessary connections are preset as factory defaults in SIMOCODE pro. For this reason, you only have to set the PROFIBUS DP address for SIMOCODE pro so that it can be recognized correctly as a DP slave on the PROFIBUS DP.

Conditions

The following conditions must be fulfilled: • The motor is switched off • The supply voltage for the basic device is switched on. The "Device" LED

must light up green• The basic unit is connected to the PROFIBUS DP. The PROFIBUS DP inter-

face is on the front side (9-pole SUB-D socket) • You have integrated SIMOCODE pro in your automatization system.

You will find further information on the integration of DP slaves in the docu-mentation for the automation system.

Setting the PROFIBUS DP address

First set the PROFIBUS DP address of the basic unit. The following options are available:• via the addressing plug• via SIMOCODE ES.



Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES


Table 2-5: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES

Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug


Table 2-6: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug

Step Description

1 Plug the PC cable into the system interface.

2 Start SIMOCODE ES.

3 Open the menu Switchgear > Open online.

4 Select RS232 and the corresponding COM interface. Press OK to confirm.

5 Open the dialog Device parameters > Bus parameters.

6 Select the DP address.

7 Save the data in the basic unit with Target system > Load to switchgear. The address is set. Confirm the change of the address.

Step Description

1 Set the desired valid address on the DIP switch. The switches are numbered. Example address 21: Put the switches "16"+"4"+"1" in the "ON position".

2 If necessary, pull the PC cable out of the system interface.

3 Plug the addressing plug in the system interface. The "Device" LED lights up yellow.

4 Briefly press the test/ reset button. The set address is accepted. The "Device" LED blinks yellow for approx. 3 seconds.

5 Pull the addressing plug from the system interface.



Additional internal components of the basic unit

The control local control station [LC] is already wired, the external compo-nents are connected and the required internal connections have been car-ried out.The following additional internal components that are already connected as factory defaults and do not have to be parameterized are required: • PROFIBUS DP bit 0.0, bit 0.1 and bit 0.2 for the commands "LEFT", "OFF" and

"RIGHT"• PROFIBUS DP bit 0.5 for the switching between the control stations (local)

and the PLC/DCS (remotely)– Bit0.5=0: local control station [LC] active– Bit0.5=0: PLC/ DCS [DP] control station active.

The PLC/DCS [DP] control station and the switch-over (plug S1) are already connected with the bits (sockets) of the cyclic signaling data from PROFIBUS DP. The assignments can be found in SIMOCODE ES under Device parameters > Motor control > Control stations.

Figure 2-4: Schematic of internal components of the basic unit for the example

All pre-assigned cyclic signaling data is not shown. The assignments can be found in SIMOCODE ES under Additional function blocks > Outputs > Cyclic signaling data

Configuration with PLC/DCS [DP] control station is finished

The configuration with SIMOCODE pro is now finished. You now have a reversing starter with an additional control station via PROFIBUS DP. The contactors for clockwise and counterclockwise rotation are controlled by setting the corresponding bits.

SIMOCODEpro

1

2

3

1

2

Bit0.1

Bit0.2

PROFIBUS DP

Bit0.5

LEFT

OFF

RIGHT

LEFT

OFF

RIGHT

Status ON<

OFF

ON>

QE1

QE2

Bit0.0

Bit0.1

Bit0.2

BU - inputs BU - outputs

Bit0.0

DP

Cyclic control

DP

Cyclic signaling

Control stations

Right

Left

S1


Motor Protection 3In this chapter

In this chapter you will find information on motor protection. Motor protection includes• overload protection• unbalance protection• stall protection• thermistor protection.

The motor protection operates alongside the motor control "at a higher level in the background". All parameters of the motor protection are explained. They can be active or non-active depending on the chosen control function.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• configurators• commissioners.

Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge: • good knowledge about SIMOCODE pro• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets• knowledge of electrical drive engineering.

Navigation in SIMOCODE ES

You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:Device parameters > Motor protection.


Motor Protection

3.1 Introduction

Description

The motor protection functions "Overload protection", "Unbalance protec-tion", "Stall protection" and "Thermistor protection" are explained in Chapters 3.2 to 3.4.

Schematic diagram

The following schematic diagram shows the "Ext. protecting" function block ("Overload protection", "Unbalance protection" and "Stall protection") with optional parameter settings and signals.

Figure 3-1: "Ext. protection" function block (overload protection, unbalance protection and stall protection)

Extended protection

Set current Is1

Set current Is2

Class 5, 10, ... 40

Response at Trip Level

Reset

Type of Load

Pause time

Cooling Down Period

Unbalance Protection

Stalled Rotor

Extended parameters:

Level

Level

Protection/Control

Signal/Warning/Fault:

- Cool Time active

- Pause active

- Time to trip(analog)

- Heating up motor model (analog)

- Remain. cooling down time (analog)

- Last tripping current (analog)

- Prewarn Overload

- Overload + Phase loss

- Overload

QE1

QE2

QE3

QE4

QE5

Switchingoff

- Unbalance

- Stalled Rotor

from current

Response at Pre-Warning Level

see Tab. 3-1

seeTab. 3-1

seeTab. 3-1

seeTab. 3-1

measuring

Current


Motor Protection

Adjustable responses "Overload protection", "Unbalance protection" and "Stall

protection"

Table 3-1: Adjustable responses "Overload protection", "Unbalance protection" and "Stall protection"

See also "Table of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important Notes".

Attention Deactivate the unbalance protection in SIMOCODE ES if the type of load is set for 1-phase!

Response At pre-warning

level

At trip level At "asym-

mety" level

At "stall pro-

tection" level

Disabled X X X X (d)

Signalling X X X X

Warning X (d) X X (d) X

Tripping - X (d) X X

Delay 0 - 25.5 s - 0 - 25.5 s 0 - 25.5 s


Motor Protection

3.2 Overload Protection

Description

SIMOCODE pro protects three-phase and AC motors in compliance with IEC 60947-4-1. The tripping class can be set to 8 different settings ranging from class 5 to class 40. Therefore, the switch-off time can be adjusted very precisely to the power-up time of the motor which allows the motor to be better used to capacity. The "Heating up the motor model" value and the inter-val up to the overload tripping are also calculated and can be put at the dis-posal of the control system. After an overload tripping, the remaining cool-ing down time is displayed. The motor current at the point of overload trip-ping is stored.

Set current Is1

The motor rated current is usually set with the set current Is1. This value is listed on the type plate of the motor. It is the basis for calculating the over-load tripping characteristic curve. ls2 must always be set higher than ls1.

Range: depends on the desired current module

Set current Is2

The set current Is2 is only necessary for motors with 2 speeds in order to also guarantee suitable overload protection for the higher speed as well.

Range: depends on the selected current module

Attention Make sure that both motor currents are within the setting range of the cur-rent module in use. Otherwise, you should use an additional 3UF18 current transformer.

Set current Is1: 0.3 A up to 3 A

2.4 A up to 25 A

10 A up to 100 A

20 A up to 200 A

63 A up to 630 A

Set current Is2: 0.3 A up to 3 A

2.4 A up to 25 A

10 A up to 100 A

20 A up to 200 A

63 A up to 630 A


Motor Protection

Class

The class (tripping class) indicates the maximum tripping time in which SIMOCODE pro must trip cold with the 7.2-fold set current Is (motor protec-tion according to IEC 60947). Please take into account that with start-ups > "Class 10", the admissible AC3 current of the contactor must be reduced (derating), which means that a larger contactor must be used. The following diagram shows the tripping classes 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35 and 40 for a 3-pole symmetric load:

Figure 3-2: Switch-off classes for 3-pole symmetric loads

Range:

Class: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40

1,15


Motor Protection

The following diagram shows the tripping classes 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35 and 40 for a 2-pole load:

Figure 3-3: Switch-off classes for 2-pole load

Range:

Response in case of overload

The response of SIMOCODE pro can be additionally adjusted in case of overload: Further information: see "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important Notes" and the table "Responses" in chapter 3.1 "Introduction".

Attention With motors for EEx e applications the response must remain set to "trip-ping"!

Class: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40

0,85


Motor Protection

Cooling down period

The cooling down period is the specified time after which an overload trip-ping can be reset. It is usually five minutes. The thermal memory (motor model - see below) is deleted after the cooling down period expires.Supply voltage failures of SIMOCODE pro during this time correspondingly extend the specified time.

Range:

Heating up the motor model (thermal memory)

At a motor rated current (Is) of 100 %, the "heating up the motor model" value is 87 % (1/1.15 x 100 %) in a steady state and 100 % at the moment of over-load tripping.

Pause time

The pause time is the specified time for the cooling response of the motor when switching off under normal operating conditions (not in the case of overload tripping!). After this interval, the thermal memory in SIMOCODE pro is deleted and a new cold start is possible. Due to this, fre-quent start-ups within a short period of time are possible.

Cooling down period: 60 up to 6553.5 seconds


Motor Protection

The following schematic shows the cooling off response with and without a pause time:

Figure 3-4: Cooling down response with and without pause time

Attention The motor and the switchgear must be dimensioned specifically for this load!

Type of load

You can choose whether SIMOCODE pro is to protect a 1-phase or a 3-phase load. With a 1-phase load, the following measures should be carried out:• The internal earth-fault monitoring and the unbalance protection must be

deactivated• Only one of the two cables should be feed through a push-through system

opening in the current module.

The phase failure monitoring is deactivated automatically.

Pause time: 0 up to 6553.5 seconds

Load type: 1-phase, 3-phase

Trip level

ON

t

t

t

100%

100%

Overload tripping

Without pause time

With pause time

Motor

OFF

No overload tripping

Pause time Thermal memory will be deleted after the pause time

Trip level

Thermal memory (Motor model)


Motor Protection

Delay pre-warning

The "delay" parameter is used to determine the interval during which the pre-warning level (1.15 x Ie) must be constantly exceeded before SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. Otherwise, there is no reaction.In case of phase failure or unbalance > 50 %, this pre-warning is already issued at approx. 0.85 x Ie.

Reset

If the "Reset" parameter is set to "Auto", the "Overload", "Overload + unbal-ance" and "Thermistor" faults are acknowledged automatically• if the cooling down period has expired• if the thermistor value has decreased to the resetting value according to

specification.

If the "Reset" parameter is set to "Auto", the errors must be acknowledged by a reset signal:• "Reset" button on the basic unit• "Reset" button on the operator panel• "Reset" standard functions.

For this reason, the "Reset - input" inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, e.g. using reset via the bus.

Warning The "Auto reset" mode of operation may not be used in applications in which an unexpected restart of the motor can lead to damage to persons or objects.

Reset: Manual, Auto


Motor Protection

3.3 Unblance Protection

Description

The extent of the phase unbalance can be monitored and transmitted to the control system. A definable and delayable response can be tripped when an adjustable level is exceeded. If the phase unbalance is greater than 50 %, a reduction of the tripping time according to the overload characteristic curve takes place automatically since the heat development in motors increases with asymmetrical conditions.

Level

The limit of the unbalance to which SIMOCODE pro is to react when over-shot is set here.

Response

Here you can choose the response of SIMOCODE pro in case of phase unbalance:See "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important Notes" and the table "Responses" in chapter 3.1 "Introduction".

Delay

The unbalance limit must be exceeded for the period of the set delay time before SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. Otherwise, there is no reaction.

Level: 0 to 100%


Motor Protection

3.4 Stall Protection

Description

After the motor current exceeds an adjustable stall limit (current limit), a definable and delayable response can be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro. For example, the motor can be set to tripped quickly independently of the overload protection. The stall protection is only active after the parameter-ized class interval has elapsed, e.g. for class 10 after 10 seconds. The stall protection prevents the motor from unnecessary high thermal and mechani-cal load as well as premature deterioration.

Level

After exceeding the stall limit, SIMOCODE pro reacts according to the spec-ified response. Range:

Response

Here you can determine the response to be executed when the blocking limit is exceeded:See "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important Notes" and the table "Responses" in chapter 3.1 "Introduction".

Delay

The "Delay" parameter is used to specify the time interval. The stall level must be constantly exceeded before SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. Otherwise there is no reaction.

Level: 0 up to 1020 % of Is


Motor Protection

3.5 Thermistor Protection

Description

Thermistor protection is based on a direct temperature measurement in the motor via binary PTC thermistors which can be connected to either basic unit 1 (BU1) or basic unit 2 (BU2). Thermistor protection is used for:• motors with high switching frequencies• converter operation• intermittent operation and/or during braking• a restricted air supply• speeds that are lower than the rated speed

In this case, the sensors are mounted in the winding slot or in the bearings of the motor.

Schematic and characteristic curve

The resistance of the thermistors increases very rapidly when the limit tem-perature is reached.

Figure 3-5: Thermistor (thermistor protection) function block

Response

• Overtemperature: Here you can choose the SIMOCODE pro response to be executed if the tem-perature exceeds the trip level.

Attention With motors for EEx e applications, the response must remain set to "trip-ping"!

Response at trip level

Response to sensor fault

QE1

QE2

QE3

QE4

QE5

Signal

- Thermistor short circuit

Thermistorinput BU

Tripping

υ

R

see

Tab. 3-2

see

Tab. 3-2

- Thermistor trip level

- Thermistor open circuit

Thermistor

T1

T2


Motor Protection

• Sensor fault(sensor circuit error): Here you can choose the SIMOCODE pro response to be executed if there is a short circuit or a wire break in the thermistor sensor cable.

Table 3-2: "Thermistor protection, binary" response

See also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important Notes".

Response Trip level Sensor fault

Disabled - X

Signaling X X

Warning X X

Tripping X X


Motor Protection


Motor Control 4In this chapter

In this chapter you will find information on• control stations which you can select and enable according to need. The

following related topics are explained:– how control stations, modes of operation and enables work together,– how control commands e.g. "ON", "OFF" are switched through to the

control function• control functions you can select according to need. The following related

topics are explained:– how control commands e.g. "ON", "OFF" are switched through from the

control stations to the contactor controls/relay outputs– which parameters apply depending on the control function chosen.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• configurators• PLC programmers.

Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge:• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets• electrical drive engineering• motor protection.


You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:Device parameter > Motor control.


Motor Control

4.1 Control stations

4.1.1 Description

Control stations are places from which control commands can be given to the motor. The "control stations" function module is used for the management, switching and prioritization of the various control stations. SIMOCODE pro can manage up to four different control stations in parallel. Depending on the control function, up to 5 different control commands can be transmitted from each control station to SIMOCODE pro. • Local, in the direct vicinity of the motor. Control commands are issued via

pushbutton.• PLC/DCS, switching commands are issued by the automation system

(remote).• PC, control commands are issued via an operator control station or via

PROFIBUS DPV1 with the SIMOCODE ES software.• Operator Panel, control commands are issued via the buttons of the operator

panel in the switchgear cabinet door.

Control commands can be e.g: – motor on (ON>), motor off (OFF) for a direct starter– motor left (ON<), motor off (OFF), motor right (ON>) for a reversing starter– motor slow (ON>), motor fast (ON>>), motor off (OFF) for a Dahlander circuitThe plugs of the "control stations function block" must be connected to arbitrary sockets (e.g. binary inputs on the basic unit, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.) for the control commands to take effect.Up to 5 different control commands can be sent from each control station. There are up to 5 plugs (plug ON<<, ON<, OFF, ON>, ON>>) available on the function block per control station. The number of active plugs depends on the chosen control function. With a direct starter, for example, only the plugs "ON>" and "OFF" are active.


Motor Control

Control stations

• Control station - local control In this case, the control devices are usually in the direct vicinity of the motor and are wired to the inputs of SIMOCODE pro. The plugs of the "control stations" function block must be connected to arbitrary sockets (normally the function blocks for the basic units or the digital module inputs, basic unit inputs, DM - inputs) for the control commands to take effect.

Attention The OFF command "LC OFF" is 0-active. Therefore, it is guaranteed that SIMOCODE pro switches off the motor safely e.g. in case of a wire break in the supply cable. The precondition is that the control station is active.

Fig. 4-1: Control station - local control

• Control station - PLC/DCS This control station is primarily intended for control commands from the automation system (PLC/DCS) via the cyclic control telegram of PROFIBUS DP. The plugs of the "control stations" function block must be connected to arbitrary sockets, normally the function blocks for the cyclic PROFIBUS DP bits (cyclic control) for the control commands to take effect.

Fig. 4-2: Control station - PLC/DCS

Pushbutton BU - Inputs

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

1

2

3

4

ON <<

OFF

ON >>

ON <

ON >

Local

ON <<

ON

PLC/DCS [DP]

ON

OFF

Enables

Enables

PLC

Cycl. receive

DP

Bit 0.0

Bit 1.7

ON >>

ON <<

OFF

ON >>

ON <

ON >

PLC/DCS [DP]

ON << PC [DPV1]

ON

OFF

Enables

Enables

Number:16


Motor Control

• Control station - PC This control station is primarily intended for switching commands on an arbitrary PC which, along with the automation system, is used as a second master on the PROFIBUS DP. The control commands are sent via the acyclic receive telegram from PROFIBUS DPV1.

Note If the SIMOCODE ES Professional/SIMATIC PDM PC software is connected to SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS DP, its control commands automatically take effect via the PC[DPV1] control station. The inputs (plugs) of the "control stations" function block must be connected to arbitrary sockets, normally the function blocks for the acyclic PROFIBUS DP bits (acyclic receive) for the commands to take effect.

Fig. 4-3: Control station - PC

• Control station - operator panel This control station is primarily intended for control commands issued via the buttons of the 3UF72 operator panel which is e.g. mounted in a switchgear cabinet door. The plugs of the "control stations" function block must be connected to arbitrary sockets (normally with the function block for the buttons of the operator panel - OP buttons) for the control commands to take effect.

Attention Since the operator panel only has 4 buttons for controlling the motor feeder, one button must be used as a speed switch button for control functions with 2 rotational speeds and 2 directions of rotation. For this purpose, the button must be assigned to the internal control command "[OP]<>/ <<>>".

Attention If the SIMOCODE ES PC Software on a programming device is connected to SIMOCODE pro via the system interface, the control commands automatically take effect via the control station operator panel (OP) and must also be enabled here if necessary.

<>/<<>>Op. Panel [OP]

ON <<

OFF

ON >>

ON <

ON >

PC [DPV1]Enables

ON

OFF

Enables

PC

Acycl. receive

DP

Bit 0.0

Bit 1.7

Number: 16


Motor Control

Fig. 4-4: Control station - operator panel

4.1.2 Modes of Operation and Mode Selectors

Modes of operation

You can use the control stations either individually or in combination. There are four different modes of operation you can switch between:• Local 1• Local 2• Local 3• Remote/Automatic: In this mode of operation, the communication must be

carried out via PLC.

Not all control stations are usually connected. If more than one control station (e.g local and PLC/DCS) is connected, it makes sense and is also mandatory to operate the control stations selectively. Four modes of operation are provided for this purpose which can be selected via two control signals (mode selectors). For each individual control station in every mode of operation, it can be stipulated if "ON commands" and/or "OFF commands" are to be used. The modes of operation are so controlled that only one mode of operation is active at any one time. Example: There are three modes of operation in a system:

Table 4-1: Modes of operation

The key-operated switch must be read in via an input to select these modes of operation. The remote switching operation should be controlled via the bus. The key-operated switching operation has priority over all other modes of operation.

Mode of operation Description

Key-operated switch operation, e.g. local 1

Only local control entries are admissible! All other control stations are locked.

Manual operation, e.g. local 3

Only operator panel control commands and local control commands can be issued.

Remote operation, e.g. remote/automatic

Only PLC/DCS control commands are permitted; locally, only OFF commands are permitted.

<>/<<>>

OFF

ON >>

ON <

ON >

Op. panel [OP]Enables

ON

OFF

Operatorpanel

OP buttons


Motor Control

Mode selectors

The S1/S2 mode selectors are used to switch between the modes of operation "Local 1", "Local 2", "Local 3" and "Remote/Automatic". The S1 and S2 plugs must be connected to arbitrary sockets (e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.) for this. The following table shows the modes of operation, depending on the signal status of the S1 and S2 mode selectors:

Table 4-2: Modes of operation depending on S1 and S2The different modes of operation for enabling the control stations can be used to specify the switch authorizations for the individual control stations• Local• PLC/DCS [DP]• PC [DPV1]• Operator panel (OP)

Only the following are active:• the mode of operation set by the plugs S1 and S2 of the "control stations"

function block • the enables selected there.

Example for a dynamic mode of operation in relationship to time:

Fig. 4-5: Example - modes of operation

Input

Mode of operation

Local 1 Local 2 Local 3Remote/

Automatic

S1 0 0 1 1

S2 0 1 0 1

0

0

Local 1 Remote Local 3 Remote Local 1

1

1

1

0

1

1

0

0

Key-op.

Time t

Remote Manual Remote Key-op.

S1

S2

0

switch switchoperationoperation operation


Motor Control

4.1.3 Enables and Enabled Control Command

Enables

Enables for the control commands "ON" and "OFF", which must be activated, are assigned to each mode of operation for every single control station. This means that depending on the mode of operation, it can be specified for each control station whether the motor may only be switched on, off or both on and off. The corresponding checkbox is activated in the "Control stations" dialog in SIMOCODE ES.

Enables and enabled control command schematic

The following schematic shows the "control stations" function block and the modes of operation:

Fig. 4-6: Function block "control stations"

ON <<

OFF

ON >>

ON <

ON >

Local

<>/<<>>

OFF

ON >>

ON <

ON >

Op. panel [OP]

ON <<

OFF

ON >>

ON <

ON >

PLC/DCS [DP]

ON <<

OFF

ON >>

ON <

ON >

PC [DPV1]

Local1 Local2 Local3 Remote

S1

S2

Mode selectors

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

Enabled

ON

OFF

controlcommand

ON <<

OFF

ON >>

ON <

ON >

To the control functionON

OFF

Enables

ON

OFF

Enables

ON

OFF

"Protecting/Controlling"

Control stations

Enabled

Not enabled

Activation of enables for control commands "ON" and "OFF" in SIMOCODE ES

Enables

Enables


Motor Control

Example for operator enable

The following diagram shows an example of operator enable for the "local 2" mode of operation, "Dahlander with reversal of direction of rotation" control function:

Fig. 4-7: Example for operator enable

In the example, the motor can only be switched on and off in the "local 2" mode of operation via the buttons (local) connected to the inputs of the basic unit and the digital module.

Control command "OFF" enabled

To the control function"Protecting/Controlling"

Control command "ON" (ON<<, ON<, ON>, ON>>)" enabled


Motor Control

4.1.4 Control Station Settings

Control stations Description

LC Activates the control station via an arbitrary signal (arbitrary sockets , but usually device inputs). The "OFF" plug is 0-active on the control station [LC].

ON <<

ON <

OFF

ON >

ON >>

PLC/DCS [DP] Activates the control station via an arbitrary signal (arbitrary sockets , but usually control bits from PROFIBUS DP)

ON <<

ON <

OFF

ON >

ON >>

PC [DPV1] Activates the control station via an arbitrary signal (arbitrary sockets , but usually control bits from PROFIBUS DPV1)

ON <<

ON <

OFF

ON >

ON >>

Operator panel (OP) Activates the control station via an arbitrary signal (arbitrary sockets , but usually operator panel pushbuttons)

<>/<<>>

ON <

OFF

ON >

ON >>

Mode selectors For switching between the 4 modes of operation local 1, local 2, local 3, remote with arbitrary signals (arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

S1

S1

Table 4-3: Control station settings


Motor Control

4.2 Control Functions

4.2.1 Description

Control functions (e.g. direct starters, reversing starters) are used for controlling load feeders.They have the following important features:• monitoring switching on/switching off (no current flows in the main circuit

without the ON command)• monitoring the OFF state (no current flows in the main circuit without the ON

command)• monitoring the ON status• switching off in case of a fault.

For monitoring these statuses, SIMOCODE pro uses F (feedback) ON, which is usually derived directly from the current flow in the main circuit via the current measuring modules.All necessary interlocks and connections for the corresponding applications are already implemented in the control functions.Control functions contain:• Plugs for

– control commands (ON <<,ON <, OFF, ON >, ON >>) that are usually connected with the "Enabled control command" sockets. From there, control commands come from the different control stations. The number of active inputs depends on the control function chosen. For example, with a direct starter, only the inputs "ON>" and "OFF" are active.

• Auxiliary control inputs (plug ), e.g. Feedback ON• Sockets for

– contactor controls QE1 to QE5. The number of contactor controls depends on the control function chosen. The contactor controls are usually connected to the relay outputs that are intended for controlling the contactor coils.

– displays (lamp controls) QL*, QLS. The number of statuses depends on the control function chosen.

– statuses, e.g. "Status - ON <<, Status - ON >>". The number of statuses depends on the control function chosen.

– faults, e.g. "Fault - feedback (F) ON", "Fault - antivalence".• Settings, e.g. interlocking time, non-maintained command mode ON/OFF, etc.• A logic component with all necessary interlockings and connections for the

control function• Like control functions, the motor protection with its parameters and signals is

active "at a higher level in the background". Motor protection and thermistor protection are independent functions that switch off the motor when activated via the control functions. For a more detailed description, see chapter 3 "Motor Protection".


Motor Control

Control function schematic

The following schematic shows the general representation of the control function ("Protecting/controlling" function block):

Fig. 4-8: General representation of the control function ("Protecting/controlling" function block)

Lamp control and status signals:

The feeder status feedback is signaled via the status signals or the QL lamp control. They are all directly dependent on the status of the auxiliary control input "F ON". Feeder status feedback:• Status signals, e.g. "Status ON<": These are transmitted, for example, via

PROFIBUS DP to the automations system and signal the status of the feeder there.

• Displays (lamp control) "Display - QLE<": These can, for example, activate a signal lamp or a pushbutton lamp.

Note If the motor is running in test operation, the displays can show a different response (e.g. flashing).

Positioner CLOSE

Positioner OPEN

ON <<ON <<

OFF

ON >>

ON <

ON >

ON <

OFF

ON >

ON >>

QE1

QE3

QE5

QE2

QE4

Control commands Contactor controls

Displays (lamp

QLE<<

QLA

QLE>>

QLE<

QLE>

QLS

(ON<<)

(ON<)

(OFF)

(ON>)

(ON>>)

(Fault)

Aux. control inputs *

Plugs of the control commands are usually connected with the "Enabled control command" sockets

*) Abbreviations

**) See also chapter 3 "Motor Protection"

F ON Feedback ON

FC Feedback CLOSE

FO Feedback OPEN

TC Torque CLOSE

TO Torque OPEN

F ON

FC

FO

TC

TO

Status signalsON <<

OFF

ON >>

ON <

ON >


Control function

(motor protection**)

e.g. for PROFIBUS DP

control)

Control stations

Enabledcontrol command

Settings•Operating Mode•Control Commands•Aux. Control Inputs•Timings•Star-delta


Motor Control

• The "QL..." lamp controls also automatically signal to the status displays via a 2 Hz flashing frequency:

– Test mode (QLE.../QLA lamp outputs are flashing)– Unacknowledged fault case (lamp output general fault QLS is flashing)– Passing on any other information, signals, warnings, faults, etc. to the

relay outputs– Lamp test: all QL outputs are activated for approx. 2s

Extent and application

Depending on the device series, the system provides the following control functions:

SIMOCODE

Control function pro C (BU1) pro V(GG2)

Overload relay ✓ ✓

Direct starter ✓ ✓

Reversing starter ✓ ✓

Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) ✓ ✓

Star-delta starter — ✓

Star-delta reversing starter — ✓

Dahlander starter — ✓

Dahlander reversing starter — ✓

Pole-changing switch — ✓

Pole-changing reversing switch — ✓

Solenoid valve — ✓

Positioner 1 to positioner 5 — ✓

Soft starter — ✓

Soft starter with reversing contactor — ✓

Table 4-4: Control functions


Motor Control

4.2.2 General Settings and Definitions

Parameter

Parameter Description

F ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Status - current flowing" socket) as factory default. An auxiliary contact from the contactor is not required for signaling. Depending on the control function chosen, this state is signaled by the QLE1 to QLE5 displays and by the "Status - ON <<, - ON <, - ON >, - ON >>" signals. "No current flowing" means: the motor is switched off. An auxiliary contact from the contactor is not required for signaling. This state is signaled by the QLA display and the "Status - OFF" signal

Non-maintained command mode

• Deactivated: The control command on the corresponding input of the control stations "ON <, ON <<, ON >,ON >>" is saved. It can only be revoked by an "OFF" control command from the corresponding control station. The auxiliary contact for locking the contactor is no longer necessary. Motor feeders are usually operated in locking mode. Locking is preset.

• Activated: Depending on the control function chosen, the non-maintained command mode affects the plugs of all control stations "ON<, ON <<, ON >, ON >>". A control command is only effective as long as there is a "high signal".

Save switching command

• Deactivated: Commands for switching from one direction of rotation/rotational speed to the other are implemented without a previous "OFF" and after the interlocking time/switching interval has elapsed. This setting is usually used and is preset.

• Activated: Commands for switching from one direction of rotation/rotational speed to the other are implemented without a previous "OFF" and after the interlocking time/switching interval has elapsed. If the selected direction/speed cannot be executed immediately due to a parameterized interlocking time/switching interval, the selection is signalized by flickering QLE displays. Your selection can be canceled at any time with "OFF".

Load type You can choose between• Motor• Resistive load (e.g. heating):

Because generally no overcurrent flows in a resistive load during switching, the "Start active" status is not signaled. In this case, the start message for the "Signaling", "Warning" and "Switch off" functions is not hidden.

Table 4-5: General settings and definitions


Motor Control

Feedback time SIMOCODE pro monitors the status of the feeder (ON or OFF) via F ON (Feedback ON). If the status of F ON changes - without a corresponding switching command - the Fault feedback (F) switches off the feeder. The default value is 0.5 s. The feedback time can be used to suppress such "feedback faults" for a defined period of time, e.g. in the case of network switches. When the motor is switched off, SIMOCODE pro continuously controls if F ON = 0. If the current flows longer than the set feedback time without the "ON" control command being issued, fault message "Fault - feedback (F) ON" is issued. The contactor controls can only be connected after the fault has been rectified.When the motor is switched on, SIMOCODE continuously controls if F ON = 1. If the current flows longer than the set feedback time without the "OFF" control command being issued, a fault message "Fault - feedback (F) OFF" is issued. The contactor controls are deactivated.

Execution time SIMOCODE pro monitors switching on/switching off. Switching on/switching off must be completed within this time period. The default value is 1.0 s. After an "ON" control command has been issued, SIMOCODE pro must measure the current in the main circuit within the execution time. Otherwise, the fault message "Fault - execution ON command" will be issued. SIMOCODE pro deactivates the contactor controls. After the "OFF" control command is issued, SIMOCODE pro must not be able to detect any current in the main circuit after the execution time. Otherwise, the fault message "Fault - execution OFF command" will be issued. The contactor controls can only be connected after the fault has been rectified.

Interlocking time SIMOCODE pro prevents, e.g. in the case of reversing starters, both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the interlocking time.

Pause time In the "Dahlander" and "pole-changing switch" control functions, switching from the fast speed to the slow one can be delayed with the time configured. In the "Star/Delta" control function, the pause time extends the time between switching off the star contactor and switching on the delta contactor by the time configured.

Parameter Description

Table 4-5: General settings and definitions


Motor Control

Fig. 4-9: Execution time (Az) and feedback time (Rz) depending on F ON

Faults

The contactor controls are deactivated. There is also:• a flashing signal on the QLS lamp control• a flashing signal on the "GEN. FAULT" LED• the "Status - general fault" signal• the corresponding signaling bit of the fault.

1

0OFF

Switch ON ON

OFF

1

0OFF

Switch OFF

QE

F ON

Az Rz Az Rz

Voltage failure,e.g. pulsating current conditions

Az: Execution timeRz: Feedback time


Motor Control

4.2.3 "Overload Relay" Control Function

Description

With this control function, SIMOCODE pro functions like an electronic overload relay. Control commands (e.g. ON, OFF) cannot be issued to the load. The control stations, as well as the inputs of the control function (e.g. ON>, OFF), do not have any function in the case of overload relays.When applying the control voltage, SIMOCODE pro automatically closes the QE3 contactor control; it remains active until it is deactivated by the fault signal of a protection or monitoring system.The QE3 contactor control must be connected to an arbitrary relay output that switches off the contactor coil of the motor contactor in case of overload.

Schematic

Fig. 4-10: Schematic of the "Overload relay" control function ("Protecting/controlling" function block)

Settings

You will find detailed information about the settings in the chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and Definitions".

Note In the case of overload, the QE3 output is set (=1) and is only reset when the overload is tripped (=0). This output closes when the overload function is parameterized.

Overload relay Description

F ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Status - current is flowing" socket)

Load type You can choose between• Motor• Resistive load (see chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and

Definitions")

Table 4-6: Overload relay settings

Aux. control inputs

Contactor controls

Displays

QE3

F ON* QLS (Fault)

*Feedback ON


Load type

Overload relay

Motor protection


Motor Control

4.2.4 "Direct Starter" Control Function

Description

SIMOCODE pro can switch a motor on and off with this control function.

Control commands

• Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 internal contactor control• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1 internal contactor control.

The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of "control stations"). Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets.

Every fault signal causes the QE1 contactor control to be deactivated.

Schematic

Fig. 4-11: Schematic of the "direct starter" control function ("Protecting/controlling" function block)

Aux. control inputs

Contactor controls

Displayas (lamps)

Status

QE1

F ON*

QLA

QLE>

QLS

OFF

ON >

(ON)

(OFF)

(Fault)

*Feedback ON

OFF

ON >


Feedback time

Execution time

Inching mode

Load type

Direct starter

Motor protection

ON

Control commands


Motor Control

Settings

You will find detailed information about the settings in the chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and Definitions".

Direct starters Description

OFF OFF control command (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)

ON > ON control command (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)

F ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Status - current is flowing" socket)


• Deactivated (presetting)• Activated


Definitions")

Feedback time Range: 0 - 25.5 seconds

Execution time Range: 0 - 6553.5 seconds

Table 4-7: Direct starter settings


Motor Control

4.2.5 "Reversing Starter" Control Function

Description

With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can control the direction of rotation of the motor (forwards and backwards).

Control commands

• Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 contactor control (clockwise i.e. forwards)

• Start with "ON <" activates the QE2 contactor control (counter-clockwise i.e. backwards)

• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1 and QE2 internal contactor controls.


Every fault signal causes the QE1 and QE2 contactor controls to be deactivated.

Switching the direction of rotation

It is possible to switch the direction of rotation if the "Status - ON>" or "Status - ON<" signal is no longer issued (motor was switched OFF) AND after the interlocking time has expired.• via the OFF control command• directly, when the "Save switching command" is activated.

SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the interlocking time.


Motor Control

Schematic

Fig. 4-12: Schematic of the "reversing starter" control function ("Protecting/controlling" function block)

Control commands

Aux. control inputs

Contactor controls

Displays

Status

QE1

QE2

F ON*

QLE<

QLA

QLE>

QLS

ON <

OFF

ON >

ON <

OFF

ON >


Feedback time

Execution time

Interlocking time

Inching mode

Save switching

Load type

command

(ON >)

(OFF)

(Fault)

(ON <)

*Feedback ON

Reversing starter

Motor protection

Right

Left

Interlocking time

activeExtended controlling


Motor Control

Settings

You will find detailed information about the settings in chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and Definitions".

Reversing starter Description

ON < ON< control command, counter-clockwise rotation (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Enabled control command - ON<" socket)

OFF OFF control command (connection with optional socket , usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)

ON > ON> control command, clockwise rotation (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)

F ON* Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Status - current is flowing" socket)





Load type You can select between• Motor• Resistive load (see chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and

Definitions")



Interlocking time Range: 0 - 255 seconds

Table 4-8: Reversing starter settings


Motor Control

4.2.6 "MCCB Circuit Breaker" Control Function

Description

SIMOCODE pro can ideally switch circuit breakers (e.g. 3WL, 3VL) ON and OFF with this control function. The circuit breakers are connected to PROFIBUS DP via SIMOCODE pro.

Control commands

• Start with "ON>" activates the QE1 contactor control for an impulse of 400 ms.

• Stop with "OFF" activates the QE2 contactor control for an impulse of 400 ms.

• With "Reset", the QE2 contactor control is activated for an impulse of 400 ms when the circuit breaker is released (alarm switch = ON).

The impulse of a control command is always fully executed before the "counter impulse" is set.

The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of "control stations"). The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets.

Making internal assignments

You have to make the following assignments:1) Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output that is connected to the

"ON connection" of the motor drive of the circuit breaker.

2) Assign the QE2 contactor control to the relay output that is connected to the "OFF connection" of the motor drive of the circuit breaker.

3) Assign the SIMOCODE pro input, which is connected to the auxiliary switch (HS) of the circuit breaker, to the auxiliary control input "Feedback ON".

4) Assign the SIMOCODE pro input, which is connected to the alarm switch of the circuit breaker, to the input (socket) of the "External fault 1" standard function.


Motor Control

Schematic

Fig. 4-13: Schematic of the "circuit breaker" control function ("Protecting/controlling" function block)

Settings


Circuit breaker Description



F ON* Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection always with socket , (input), which the auxiliary switch of the circuit breaker is connected to)




Definitions")

Feedback time Higher than the motor running time of the motor drive of the circuit breaker. Range: 0 - 25.5 seconds


Table 4-9: Circuit breaker settings

Control commands

Aux. control inputs

Contactor controls

Displays

Status

QE1

QE2

F ON*

QLA

QLE>

QLS

OFF

ON >

400 ms.

400 ms.

OFF

ON >


Feedback time

Execution time

Inching mode

Load type

(ON)

(OFF)

(Fault)

*Feedback ON

Circuit breaker

Motor protection

ON

OFF

Auxiliary switch


Motor Control

4.2.7 "Star-delta Starter" Control Function

Description

Star-delta starting is used to limit the starting current and to avoid overloading the network. In this control function, SIMOCODE pro starts the motor first with a star-switched stator winding and then switches it to delta.

Control commands

• Start with "ON" first activates the QE1 contactor control (star contactor) and then immediately activates the QE3 contactor control (network contactor)

• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls.

The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of "control stations"). The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets. Every fault signal causes the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls to be deactivated.

Switching from star to delta

For this, SIMOCODE pro first deactivates the QE1 contactor control before the QE2 contactor control (delta contactor) is connected. SIMOCODE pro switches from star to delta:• Current-dependent with decreasing current below the threshold (I < 90% Ie).• Time-dependent according to the time set in the parameter "Maximum time

for star operation" when the current in the star operation does not sink below this threshold.

Safety instructions

Attention It is recommended to wire the QE contactor controls to the relay outputs of the basic unit.

Attention If you use the internal earth-fault detection with a star-delta connection, false trippings might occur. For delta operation, the summation current is non-zero due to harmonics.

Attention If the current measuring module is switched to delta (normal case), a current which is 1/√3 times smaller must be set for the star-delta starter control function. Example: In = 100 A Ie = In x 1/√3

Ie = 100 A x 1/√3 = 57.7 A Current to be set Ie = 57.7 A


Motor Control

Switching interval

The switching time from star to delta can be extended by the switching interval.Reason: for motors with a high ratio between starting current and rated current, the mains voltage plus motor EMF might lead to a very high delta starting current if the switching interval is too short. The motor EMF decreases if the interval is longer.

Schematic

Fig. 4-14: Schematic of the "star-delta starter" control function ("Controlling/protecting" function block)

Control commands

Aux. control inputs

Contactor controls

Displays

Status

QE1

QE2

F ON*

QLA

QLE>

QLS

OFF

ON >

OFF

ON >


Feedback time

Execution time

Inching mode

Load type

(ON)

(OFF)

(Fault)

QE3

Switching interval

Max. time forstar operation

Transformermounted

*Feedback ON

Star-delta starter

Motor protection

Switching interval

active

Star contactor

Delta contactor

Network contactor

Extended controlling


Motor Control

Settings


Star-delta starter Description







Definitions")



Switching interval Range: 0 - 655.3 seconds (10 ms steps)

Max. time for star operation

Time-dependent switching from star to delta. Range: 0 - 255 seconds

Transformer mounted1)

The set current and the switching levels for star-delta switching depend on the mounting place of the current measuring module.• Delta: set current reduced to In x 1/√3• In supply cable: set current Ie = In (rated current of the motor)

Table 4-10: Star-delta starter settings

1) Attention If a current/voltage measuring module is in use, the transformer must be connected to the supply cable!


Motor Control

4.2.8 "Star-delta Starter with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation" Control

Function

Description

With this control function, a motor can be started in both directions of rotation in star delta operation.

Control commands

• Clockwise rotation: start with "ON>" first activates the QE1 (star contactor) contactor control and then immediately activates the QE3 contactor control (network contactor, clockwise rotation)

• Counter-clockwise rotation: start with "ON<" first activates the QE1 (star contactor) contactor activation and then immediately activates the QE4 contactor control QE4 (network contactor, counter-clockwise rotation)

• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1, QE2, QE3 and QE4 contactor controls.

The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of "control stations"). The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets. The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets.

Every fault signal causes the QE1, QE2 QE3 and QE4 contactor controls to be deactivated.

Switching from star to delta

For this, SIMOCODE pro first deactivates the QE1 contactor control before connecting the QE2 contactor control (delta contactor). SIMOCODE pro switches from star to delta:• Current-dependent, for decreasing current below the level (I < 90% Ie).• Time-dependent to the time set in the parameter "Maximum time for star

operation" when the current in the star operation does not sink below this threshold.


It is possible to switch the direction of rotation if the "Status - ON>" or "Status - ON<" signal is no longer issued (motor was switched OFF) AND after the interlocking time has expired.• Via the OFF control command• Directly, when the "Save switching command" is activated.SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the "interlocking time".

Start-up is always in star mode.


Motor Control

Safety instructions

Note It is recommended to wire the QE1 and QE2 contactor controls to the relay outputs of the basic unit. You need at least 1 digital module for this control function.

Attention If you use the internal earth-fault detection for a star-delta connection, false trippings might occur. For delta operation, the summation current is non-zero due to harmonics.

Attention If the current measuring module is switched to delta (normal case), a current which is 1/√3 times smaller must be set for the star-delta starter control function. Example: In = 100 A Ie = In x 1/√3

Ie = 100 A x 1/√3 = 57.7 A Current to be set Ie = 57.7 A

Switching interval

The switching time from star to delta can be extended by the switching interval.Reason: for motors with a high ratio between starting current and rated current, the mains voltage plus motor EMF might lead to a very high delta starting current, if the switching interval is too short. The motor EMF decreases if the interval is longer.


Motor Control

Schematic

Fig. 4-15: Schematic of the "star-delta starter" function with reversal of the direction of rotation ("Protecting/controlling" function block)

Control commands

Aux. control inputs

Contactor controls

Displays

Status

QE1

QE2

F ON*

QLA

QLE>

QLS

OFF

ON>

OFF

ON >

(ON >)

(OFF)

(Fault)

QE3

ON <


Feedback time

Execution time

Inching mode

Load type

Switching time

Max. time forstar operation

Transformermounted

Save switchingcommand

Interlocking time

*Feedback ON

QLE< (ON <)

QE4

ON <

Star-delta starter withreversal of the

Motor protection

Star contactor

Delta contactor

Right - network contactor

Save switching

Switching interval

active

Interlocking time

active


direction of rotation


Motor Control

Settings


Star-delta starter

with reversal of

the direction of

rotation

Description


ON > ON> control command usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket) , usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)

ON < ON< control command (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Enabled control command - ON<" socket)

Feedback ON* Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Status - current is flowing" socket)






Definitions")




Interlocking time Transformer mounted

Maximum time for star operation

Time-dependent switching from star to delta. Range: 0 - 255 seconds

Transformer mounted 1)

The set current and the switching levels for the star-delta switching depend on the mounting position of the current transformer/ current measuring module.• Delta: set current reduced to In x 1/√3• In supply cable: set current Ie = In (rated current of the motor)

Table 4-11: Star-delta starter settings with reversal of the direction of rotation

1) Attention If a current/voltage measuring module is in use, the transformer must be connected to the supply cable!


Motor Control

4.2.9 "Dahlander" Control Function

Description

With this function, SIMOCODE pro can control motors with only one stator winding at two speeds (fast and slow). SIMOCODE pro wires the stator winding via the contactors so that there is a high pole number at low speed and a low pole number at high speed.

Control commands

• Slow: start with "ON>" first activates the QE2 contactor control (slow)• Fast: start with "ON>>" first activates the QE3 contactor control (star

contactor, fast) and then immediately activates the QE1 contactor control (network contactor, fast)

• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls.


Every fault signal causes the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls to be deactivated.

Switching the speed

It is possible to switch the speed if the signal when the signal "Feedback ON" is no longer issued (motor was switched off) AND when changing from "fast" = > "slow" after the switching interval has expired.• Via the OFF control command• Directly when the "Save switching command" is activated.

SIMOCODE pro prevents the contactors for the "fast" speed from being switched on at the same time as the contactor for the "slow" speed.

Switching interval

The "switching interval" parameter can be used to delay switching from "fast" to "slow" to give the motor enough time to run down.


Motor Control

Attention Two set currents must be set for the Dahlander circuit: • Ie1 for the slower speed • Ie1 for the faster speed Depending on the current range, the current can be directly measured at both speeds with a single current converter. Otherwise you will need according to the corresponding speed two external current converters (e.g. 3UF18 with 1A secondary transformer rated current), whose secondary cables must lead through the current measuring module with the range 0.3 A - 3A. The Ie1/Ie2 set currents must be converted according to the secondary currents of the external transformers. For further information see chapter 3.2 "Overload Protection".

Schematic

Fig. 4-16: Schematic of the "Dahlander" control function ("Protecting/controlling" function block)

Control commands

Aux. control inputs

Contactor controls

Displays

Status

QE1

QE2

F ON*

QLA

QLE>

QLS

OFF

ON >

OFF

ON >

(ON >)

(OFF)

(Fault)

QE3

*Feedback ON

ON >>

ON >>

QLE>> (ON >>)


Feedback time

Execution time

Inching mode

Load type

Switching interval


Dahlander

Motor protection

Switching interval

active

Fast

Slow

Fast - star contactor



Motor Control

Settings


Dahlander Description


ON > ON> control command (slow) (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)

ON >> ON>> control command (fast) (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Enabled control command - ON>>" socket)






Load type You can choose between• Motor• Resistive load (see chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and Defini-

tions")




Table 4-12: Dahlander settings


Motor Control

4.2.10 "Dahlander with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation" Control Function

Description

This control function is used to change the direction of rotation of a motor at both speeds.

Control commands

• Right - slow: start with "ON>" first activates QE2 the contactor control (right-slow).

• Right - fast: start with "ON>>" first activates the QE3 contactor control (fast-star contactor) and then immediately activates the QE1 contactor control (right-fast)

• Left - slow: start with "ON<" activates the QE4 contactor control (left-slow)• Left - fast: start with "ON<<" activates the QE3 contactor control (fast-star

contactor) and then immediately activates the QE5 contactor control (left-fast)

• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the contactor controls.

The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of "control stations"). The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets.It does not matter in what order the control commands are given.Every fault signal causes the contactor activations to be deactivated.


It is possible to switch the direction of rotation if the "Status - ON>" or "Status - ON<" signal is no longer issued (motor was switched OFF) AND after the interlocking time has expired.• Via the OFF control command• Directly, when the "Save switching command" is activated.SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the "interlocking time".

Switching the speed

when the signal "Feedback ON" is no longer issued (motor was switched off) AND when changing from "fast" = > "slow" after the switching interval has expired.• Via the OFF control command• Directly when the "Save switching command" is activated.


Motor Control

Switching interval


Safety information

Note You need at least 1 digital module for this control function. This control function cannot be implemented with bistable relay outputs.

Attention Two set currents must be set for the Dahlander circuit: • Ie1 for the slower speed • Ie1 for the faster speed Depending on the current range, the current can be directly measured at both speeds with a single current converter. Otherwise you will need according to the corresponding speed two external current converters (e.g. 3UF18 with 1A secondary transformer rated current), whose secondary cables must lead through the current measuring module with the range 0.3 A - 3A. The Ie1/Ie2 set currents must be converted according to the secondary currents of the external transformers. For further information see chapter 3.4 "Stall Protection".


Motor Control

Schematic

Fig. 4-17: Schematic of the "Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation" control function ("Controlling/protecting" function block)

Control commands

Displays

Status

QE1

QE2

F ON*

QLA

QLE>

QLS

OFF

ON >

(ON >)

(OFF)

(Fault)

QE3

ON <

*Feedback ON

QLE< (ON <)

QE4

Contactor controls

QE5

QLE<< (ON <<)

QLE>> (ON >>)

OFF

ON >

ON <

ON <<

ON >>

ON >>

ON <<Protecting/Controlling

Execution time

Inching mode

Load type

Switching interval


Interlocking time

Aux. control inputs

Dahlander withreversal of the

Motor protection

Right - fast

Right - slow

Fast - star contactor

Left - slow

Left - fast

Switching interval

active

Interlocking time

active



Feedback time


Motor Control

Settings


Dahlander with

reversal of the

direction of

rotation

Description

ON << ON<< control command (left, fast) (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Enabled control command - ON<<" socket)

ON < ON< control command (left, slow) (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Enabled control command - ON<<" socket)

OFF OFF control command (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Enabled control command - OFF<" socket)

ON > ON> control command (right, slow) (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)

ON >> ON>> control command (right, fast) (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Enabled control command - ON>>" socket)



Deactivated (presetting)Activated



Load type You can choose betweenMotorResistive load (see chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and Definitions")




Switching interval Range 0 to - 655.3 seconds (10 ms steps)

Table 4-13: Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation control function settings


Motor Control

4.2.11 "Pole-changing Switch" Control Function

Description

With this function, SIMOCODE pro can control motors with two stator windings in two speed levels (fast and slow).

Control commands

• Slow: start with "ON>" activates the QE2 contactor control (slow).• Fast: start with "ON>>" activates the QE1 contactor control (fast).• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the contactor controls.


It does not matter in what order the control commands are given.

Every fault signal causes the contactor activations to be deactivated.

Switching the speed

It is possible to switch the speed when the "Feedback ON" signal is no longer issued (motor is switched off) AND when changing from "fast" -> "slow" after the switching interval has expired:• Via the OFF control command• Directly when the "Save switching command" is activated.

Switching interval


Attention Two set currents must be set for the Dahlander circuit: • Ie1 for the slower speed • Ie1 for the faster speed. Depending on the current range, the current can be directly measured at both speeds with a single current converter. Otherwise you will need according to the corresponding speed two external current converters (e.g. 3UF18 with 1 A secondary transformer rated current), whose secondary cables must lead through the current measuring module with the range 0.3 - 3 A. The Ie1/Ie2 set currents must be converted according to the secondary currents of the external transformers. For further information see chapter 3.2 "Overload Protection".


Motor Control

Schematic

Fig. 4-18: Schematic of the "pole-changing switch" control function ("Protecting/controlling" function block)

Settings


pole-changing

switch

Description


ON > ON> control command (slow) (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)

ON >> ON>> control command (fast) (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Enabled control command - ON>>" socket)




Table 4-14: Pole-changing switch settings

Control commands

Aux. control inputs

Contactor controls

Displays

Status

QE1

QE2

F ON*

QLA

QLE>

QLS

OFF

ON >

OFF

ON >

(ON >)

(OFF)

(Fault)

*Feedback ON

ON >>

ON >>

QLE>> (ON >>

Protecting/Controlling

Feedback time

Execution time

Inching mode

Load type

Switching interval


Pole changing switch

Motor protection

Switching interval

active

Fast

Slow



Motor Control




Definitions")




pole-changing

switch

Description

Table 4-14: Pole-changing switch settings (cont.)


Motor Control

4.2.12 "Pole-changing Switch with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation" Control

Function

Description

This control function is used to change the direction of rotation of a motor at both speeds.

Control commands

• Right - slow: start with "ON>" activates the QE2 contactor control (right-slow)• Right - fast: start with "ON>>" activates the QE1 contactor activation (right-

fast)• Left - slow: start with "ON<" activates the QE4 contactor control (left-slow)• Left - fast: start with "ON<<" activates the QE5 contactor control (left-fast)• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the contactor controls.

The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations to SIMOCODE pro. The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets.

It does not matter in what order the control commands are given.Every fault signal causes the contactor activations to be deactivated.


It is possible to switch the direction of rotation if the signal "Status - ON>" or "Status - ON<" is no longer issued (motor was switched off) AND after the interlocking time has expired.• Via the OFF control command• Directly, when the "Save switching command" is activated.SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the "interlocking time".

Switching the speed

It is possible to switch the speed when the "Feedback ON" signal is no longer issued (motor is switched off) AND when changing from "fast" -> "slow" after the switching interval has expired:• Via the OFF control command• Directly when the "Save switching command" is activated.


Motor Control

Switching interval

SIMOCODE pro prevents the contactors for the speeds "fast" and "slow" from switching on at the same time. The "switching interval" parameter is used to delay switching from "fast" to "slow" to give the motor enough time to run down.

Safety information

Note At least one additional digital module is necessary for this control function.

Attention Two set currents must be set for the Dahlander circuit: • Ie1 for the slower speed • Ie1 for the faster speed. Depending on the current range, the current can be directly measured at both speeds with a single current converter. Otherwise you will need according to the corresponding speed two external current converters (e.g. 3UF18 with 1 A secondary transformer rated current), whose secondary cables must lead through the current Measuring module with the range 0.3 - 3A. The Ie1/Ie2 set currents must be converted according to the secondary currents of the external transformers. For further information see chapter 3.2 "Overload Protection".


Motor Control

Schematic

Fig. 4-19: Schematic of the "pole-changing switch" with reversal of the direction of rotation control function ("Controlling/protecting" function block)

Interlocking time active

Pause time active

Control commands

Displays

Status

QE1

QE2

F ON*QLA

QLE>

QLS

OFF

ON >

(ON >)

(OFF)

(Fault)

ON <

*Feedback ON

QLE< (ON <)

QE4

Contactor controls

QE5

QLE<< (ON <<)

QLE>> (ON >>)

OFF

ON >

ON <

ON <<

ON >>

ON >>

ON <<Protecting/controlling

Feedback time

Execution time

Inching mode

Load type

Switching interval


Interlocking time

Pole-changing switch withreversal of the

Motor protection

Right - fast

Right - slow

Left - slow

Left - fast




Motor Control

Settings


Pole-changing

switch with

reversal of the

direction of

rotation

Description

ON << ON<< control command (left, fast) (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Enabled control command - ON<<" socket)

ON < ON< control command (left, slow) (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Enabled control command - ON<" socket)


ON > ON> control command (right, slow) (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)

ON >> ON>> control command (right, fast) (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Enabled control command - ON>>" socket)

Feedback ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Status - current is flowing" socket)






Definitions")





Table 4-15: Settings for pole-changing switches with reversal of the direction of rotation


Motor Control

4.2.13 "Valve" Control Function

Description

With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate a solenoid valve.With the control commands "OPEN" and "CLOSE", the valve is brought into the corresponding end position. SIMOCODE pro must be informed via corresponding limit switches (OPEN, CLOSE) when the end position has been reached.

Control commands

• Open: start with "ON>" activates the QE1 internal contactor control.• Close: stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1 internal contactor control.


Every fault signal causes the QE1 contactor control to be deactivated and puts the valve into the "close" position.

Safety information

Attention The motor protection functions are not active. A current measuring module is not necessary.

Attention If both limit switches respond at the same time (FO=1 and FC=1), the valve is immediately switched OFF via the fault message "Fault double 1" (="close") If the end position feedback does not correspond to the control command, the valve is switched off with the fault message "Fault - end position fault" (= "Close").


Motor Control

Schematic"

Fig. 4-20: Schematic of "valve" control function ("Protecting/controlling" function block)

Settings


Valve Description

OFF OFF control command (close) (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)

ON> ON control command (open) (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)



Execution time Time until the end position is reached. Range: 0 to 6553.5 seconds

Table 4-16: Valve control function settings

F ON *

Control commands

Aux. control inputs

Contactor controls

Displays

Status

QE1

QLA

QLE>

QLS

OFF

ON >

(OPEN)

(CLOSE)

(Fault)

OFF

ON >

FC

FO


Execution time

* Abbreviations

FC Feedback CLOSE

FO Feedback OPEN

Inching mode

ValveOpen

FC

FOExtended controlling


Motor Control

4.2.14 "Positioner" Control Function

Description

SIMOCODE pro can control positioners/actuators with this control function. The positioner is moved into the corresponding end position with the "OPEN" and "CLOSE" control commands and is deactivated via its limit switch (1-active) or torque switch (0-active).SIMOCODE pro must be informed about the response of the limit switch/ torque switches via its inputs.

Control commands

• Open: start with "ON >" activates the QE1 contactor control until "End position OPEN" (feedback open) is reached.

• Close: start with "ON <" activates the QE2 contactor control until "End position CLOSE" (feedback close) is reached.

• Stop: with "OFF" deactivates the contactor controls. The drive remains stopped in that position.


Function schematic

Fig. 4-21: Function schematic of the torque switch and the limit switch when controlling positioners

TOTorque switch

TC

Motor shaft with springsat the beginning and end

FOFCLimit switch

Positioner

Gear

OPEN CLOSE

OPEN CLOSE


Motor Control

Switching the direction of travel

It is possible to switch the direction of rotation if the signal "Feedback ON" is no longer issued (motor was switched off) AND after the interlocking time has expired.• Via the OFF control command.

SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the "interlocking time".

Attention The corresponding torque switch must not respond before the associated limit switch when the torque switch (TO)/(TC) is connected. In this case, the positioner is switched off immediately with the fault message "Fault - blocked positioner". If both limit switches respond at the same time (FO=1 and FC=1), the positioner is immediately switched off via the fault message "Fault double 1" (="close"). If both torque switches respond at the same time (TO=0 and TC=0), the positioner is switched off immediately with the fault message "Fault double 0". If the end position feedback does not correspond to the control command, the positioner is switched off with the fault message "Fault end position fault".


Motor Control

Schematic

Fig. 4-22: Schematic of the "positioner" control function ("Protecting/controlling" function block)

Control commands Contactor controls

Displays

Status

QE1

QE2

QLE<

QLA

QLE>

QLS

ON <

OFF

ON >

ON <

OFF

ON >

Open

Stop

(Fault)

Closed

* Abbreviations

F ON* Feedback ON

FC Feedback CLOSE

FO Feedback OPEN

TC Torque CLOSE

TO Torque OPEN

Aux. control inputs *F ON

FC

FO

TC

TO

Open

Closed

Open

Stop

Closed


Feedback time

Execution time

Interlocking time

Inching mode

Load type

Positioner

Motor protection

Interlocking time active

Positioner closes

Positioner opensFC

FO

TC

TO



Motor Control

Variants for slide control

The following table shows the 5 variants for slide control:

Table 4-17: Variants for slide control

Attention The signals of the torque switches and the position switches must be wired to the inputs of the basic units. Torque switches must be O-active, whereas the position switches must be 1-active.

Variant Switch off

TCTorque

CLOSE

FCEnd position

Closed

FOEnd position

Open

TOTorque

OPEN

Positioner 1 After reaching the end position FO (OPEN) or FC (CLOSE).

— X X —

Positioner 2 After reaching the end position FO (OPEN) or FC (CLOSE) AND response of the associated torque switch TO (OPEN) or TC (CLOSE)

X X X X

Positioner 3 After reaching the end position FO (open). After reaching the end position 'CLOSE', the respective torque switch TC must respond after the limit switch FC has responded.

X X X —

Positioner 4 After reaching the end position FC (CLOSE). After reaching the end position FO (OPEN), the respective torque switch TO must also respond after the limit switch FO has responded.

— X X X

Positioner 5 After reaching the end position or the torque. The actuator is either monitored by the limit switches or by the torque switches. The switches are implemented as changeover contacts and are checked for antivalence. In the case of non-antivalent feedback (e.g. FC=0 and TC=0), SIMOCODE pro recognizes a wire break and deactivates the positioner with the fault message "Fault - antivalence"

Antivalent active Antivalent active

Close Open


Motor Control

Settings


Positioner Description

ON < ON< control command (close) (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Enabled control command - ON<" socket)

OFF Control command stop (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)

ON > ON> control command (open) (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)


FC Auxiliary control input "Feedback CLOSE" (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with the socket of an input which the limit switch is wired to)

FO Auxiliary control input "Feedback OPEN" (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with the socket of an input which the limit switch is wired to)

TC Auxiliary control input "Torque CLOSE" (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with the socket of an input which the torque switch is wired to)

TO Auxiliary control input "Torque OPEN" (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with the socket of an input which the torque switch is wired to)




Definitions")


Execution time Time until the limit position is reached. Range: 0 - 6553.5 seconds


Table 4-18: Control function positioner settings


Motor Control

4.2.15 "Soft Starter" Control Function

Description

With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate the 3RW soft starter. Thus, the 3RW soft starters are connected to the PROFIBUS DP via SIMOCODE pro.

Control commands

• Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 and QE4 internal contactor controls.• Stop with "OFF" first deactivates the QE4 contactor control. When the signal

"Feedback ON" is no longer issued, the QE1 contactor control is deactivated 3 s later in order to facilitate a smooth run down via the soft starter.

• With "reset", the QE3 contactor control is activated for 20 ms and sends the soft starter an acknowledgement signal via a parameterizable relay output.




You have to make the following assignments:

1) Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output that activates the coil of the network contactor

2) Assign the QE4 contactor control to an arbitrary relay output with which the "ON input" from the soft starter is to be activated

3) Assign the QE3 contactor control to the relay output which gives the acknowledgement signal of 20 ms to the soft starter

4) Assign the "ON>" and "OFF" control commands to the enabled control commands

5) Assign the input of SIMOCODE pro that is connected to the signaling output "fault" of the soft starter to the input of the standard function module "external fault 1"

6) The "Start-up end" signal of the soft starter can also be wired to one of the outputs and processed by SIMOCODE pro.

Attention In order to avoid disconnections due to faults, the "Execution time" parameter in SIMOCODE pro must be set at least to the smooth running down time of the soft starter.


Motor Control

Schematic

Fig. 4-23: Schematic of "soft starter" control function ("Protecting/controlling" function block)

Settings


Soft starter Description







Definitions")


Execution time At least > smooth running down time. Range 0 - 6553.5 seconds

Table 4-19: Soft starter settings

Control commands

Aux. control inputs

Displays

Status

QE1

F ON*

QLA

QLE>

QLS

OFF

ON >

OFF

ON >


Feedback time

Execution time

Inching mode

Load type

(ON >)

(OFF)

(Fault)

*Feedback ON

QE3

Displays

20 ms.

QE4 ON

Soft starter

Motor protection

Network contactor


Motor Control

4.2.16 "Soft Starter with Reversing Contactor" Control Function

Description

With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate the 3RW soft starter including an additional reversing contactor. Thus, the 3RW soft starters are connected to the PROFIBUS DP via SIMOCODE pro. With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can control the motor direction of rotation (forwards and backwards).

Control commands

• Start with "ON >" activates QE1 and QE4 contactor control (clockwise, i.e. forwards)

• Start with "ON <" activates QE2 and QE4 contactor control (counter-clockwise i.e. backwards)

• Stop with "OFF" first deactivates the QE4 contactor control. When the "Feedback ON" signal is no longer issued, the QE1 / QE4 contactor control is deactivated 3 s later in order to facilitate a smooth run down via the soft starter.

• With "reset", the QE3 contactor control is activated for 20 ms and sends the soft starter an acknowledgement signal via a parameterizable relay output.




It is possible to switch the direction of rotation if the signal "Status - ON>" or "Status - ON<" is no longer issued (motor was switched off) AND after the interlocking time has expired:• Via the OFF control command• Directly, when the "Save switching command" is activated.SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the interlocking time.


Motor Control


You have to make the following assignments:

1) Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output that activates the coil of the network contactor (right)

2) Assign the QE2 contactor control to the relay output that activates the coil of the network contactor (left)

3) Assign the QE4 contactor control to an arbitrary relay output with which the "ON input" from the soft starter is to be activated

4) Assign the QE3 contactor control to the relay output which gives the acknowledgement signal of 20 ms to the soft starter

5) Assign the "ON>", "ON<" and "OFF" control commands to the enabled control commands

6) Assign the input of SIMOCODE pro that is connected to the signaling output "fault" of the soft starter to the input of the standard function module "external fault 1"

7) The "Start-up end" signal of the soft starter can also be wired to one of the outputs and processed by SIMOCODE pro.

Note An additional digital module may be necessary for this control function.

Schematic

Fig. 4-24: Schematic of the "soft starter" with reversing contactor control function ("Protecting/ controlling" function block)

Interlocking time

active

QE4

Control commands

Feedbacks

Contactor controls

Displays

Status

QE2

F ON*

QLE<

QLA

QLE>

QLS

ON <

OFF

ON >

ON <

OFF

ON >


Feedback time

Execution time

Interlocking time

Inching mode

Save switching

Load type

command

(ON >)

(OFF)

(Fault)

(ON <)

*Feedback ON

QE1

QE3

Right

Left

Soft starter with

Motor protection

20 ms.

(ON)

reversing contactor



Motor Control

Settings


Soft starter with

reversing

contactor

Description

ON < ON< control command, counter-clockwise rotation (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Enabled control command - ON<" socket)


ON > ON> control command, counter-clockwise rotation (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)






Load type You can choose between• Motor• Resistive load (see chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and Defini-

tions")


Execution time At least > smooth running down time. Range: 0 - 6553.5 seconds


Table 4-20: Soft starter with reversing contactor settings


Motor Control

4.3 Active Control Stations, Contactor & Lamp Controls

and Status Signal for the Control Functions

Table 4-21: Active control stations, contactor & lamp controls and status signal of the control functions

1) B

asic

uni

t 1,

SIM

OC

OD

Epr

oC

2) B

asic

uni

t 2,

SIM

OC

OD

Epr

oV

Spec

ifica

tion/

Co

ntro

l fun

ctio

nCo

ntro

l sta

tion

Cont

acto

r con

trol

Lam

p co

ntro

l

QLE

<<

(ON

<<)

QLE

< (O

N<)

QLA

(O

FF)

QLE

> (O

N>)

QLE

>>

(ON

>>)

Stat

us s

igna

l

ON

<<O

N<

OFF

ON

>O

N>>

QE1

QE2

QE3

QE4

QE5

ON

<<O

N<

OFF

ON

>O

N>>

Ove

rloa

d 1)

,2)

--

--

--

-Ac

tive

--

--

--

-

Dire

ct s

tarte

r 1),2

)-

-OF

FON

-ON

--

--

-OF

FON

-

Reve

rsin

g st

arte

r 1),2

)-

Left

OFF

Righ

t-

Righ

tLe

ft-

--

Left

OFF

Righ

t-

Circ

uit b

reak

er 1

),2)

--

OFF

ON-

ONim

puls

e-

OFF

impu

lse

--

--

OFF

ON-

Star

-del

ta

star

ter 2

)-

-OF

FON

-St

arco

ntac

tor

Delta

cont

acto

rN

etw

ork

cont

acto

r-

--

-OF

FON

-

Star

-del

ta s

tart

er

with

reve

rsal

of t

he d

irect

ion

of ro

tatio

n 2)

Left

OFF

Righ

t-

Star

cont

acto

rDe

ltaco

ntac

tor

Righ

tne

twor

kco

ntac

tor

Left

netw

ork

cont

acto

r

-Le

ftOF

FRi

ght

-

Dah

land

er 2

)-

-OF

FSl

owFa

stFa

stSl

owFa

stst

arco

ntac

tor

--

--

OFF

Slow

Fast

Dah

land

er

with

reve

rsal

of t

he d

irect

ion

of ro

tatio

n 2)

Left

fast

Left

slow

OFF

Righ

tsl

owRi

ght

fast

Righ

tfa

stRi

ght

slow

Fast

star

cont

acto

r

Left

slow

Left

fast

Left

fast

Left

slow

OFF

Righ

tsl

owRi

ght

fast

Pole

-cha

ngin

g sw

itch

2)-

-OF

FSl

owFa

stFa

stSl

ow-

--

--

OFF

Slow

Fast

Pole

-cha

ngin

g sw

itch

with

reve

rsin

g th

e di

rect

ion

of ro

tatio

n 2)

Left

fast

Left

slow

OFF

Righ

tsl

owRi

ght

fast

Righ

tfa

stRi

ght

slow

-Le

ftsl

owLe

ftfa

stLe

ftfa

stLe

ftsl

owOF

FRi

ght

slow

Righ

tfa

st

Valv

e 2)

--

Clos

edOp

en-

Open

--

--

--

Clos

edOp

en-

Posi

tione

r 1 2

)-

Clos

edSt

opOp

en-

Open

Clos

ed-

--

-Cl

osed

Stop

Open

-

Posi

tione

r 2 2

)-

Clos

edSt

opOp

en-

Open

Clos

ed-

--

-Cl

osed

Stop

Open

-

Posi

tione

r 3 2

)-

Clos

edSt

opOp

en-

Open

Clos

ed-

--

-Cl

osed

Stop

Open

-

Posi

tione

r 4 2

)-

Clos

edSt

opOp

en-

Open

Clos

ed-

--

-Cl

osed

Stop

Open

-

Posi

tione

r 5 2

)-

Clos

edSt

opOp

en-

Open

Clos

ed-

--

-Cl

osed

Stop

Open

-

Soft

star

ter 2

)-

-OF

FON

-ON

netw

ork

cont

acto

r

-Re

set

ONco

mm

and

--

-OF

FON

-

Soft

star

ter w

ith re

vers

ing

cont

acto

r 2)

-Le

ftOF

FRi

ght

-Ri

ght

netw

ork-

cont

acto

r

Left

netw

ork-

cont

acto

r

Rese

tON

com

man

d-

-Le

ftOF

FRi

ght

-


Motor Control


Monitoring Functions 5In this chapter

In this chapter you will find information about the monitoring functions• Earth fault monitoring• Current limits monitoring• Voltage monitoring• Power factor (cos-phi) monitoring• Active power monitoring• Monitoring of 0/4 - 20 mA• Operation hours monitoring• Analog temperature monitoring.

Like motor protection and motor control, the monitoring functions work "in the background". All parameters of the monitoring functions are explained. They can be active or not depending on the chosen control function.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• configurators• programmers• commissioners• service personnel.

Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge:• SIMOCODE pro• motor protection, motor control• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets• knowledge of electrical drive engineering.


You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:Device parameters > Monitoring functions.


Monitoring Functions

5.1 Earth fault Monitoring

5.1.1 Description

SIMOCODE pro measures and monitors all three phase currents. By evalua-ting the summation current of the 3 current values, the motor feeder can be monitored for a possible fault current/earth fault. Internal earth fault monitoring via a current/voltage measuring module is only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in networks which are either grounded directly or grounded with low impedance. The internal earth-fault monitoring can be activated through parameteriza-tion. It covers 2 operating cases:• Normal operating case up to 2 x Ie. The effective operating current must be

smaller than twice the set current Ie. Fault currents > 30 % of the set current Ie will be detected.

• Start-up or overload operation from 2 x Ie. The effective operating current is larger than twice the set current Ie. Fault currents > 15 % of the effective motor current will be detected.

Note If you use internal earth-fault monitoring for star-delta circuits, this can lead to false trippings. For delta operation, the summation current is non-zero due to harmonics.

External earth fault monitoring via a summation current transformer and a earth-fault module is normally used for networks which are grounded with high impedance. Rated fault currents of 0.3 A / 0.5 A / 1 A are evaluated by the 3UL22 sum-mation current transformer. The response delay of the summation current transformer is 300 ms - 500 ms. The response delay can be additionally increased by parameterizing SIMOCODE pro accordingly. A definable and delayable response to a detected earth fault can be parame-terized.A warning is triggered if the earth-fault limit is exceeded. You can set addi-tional trippings through parameterization.If the rated fault currents are exceeded, SIMOCODE pro reacts either:• by turning off the contactor controls QE* or• with a warning

depending on which configuration you set.



5.1.2 Internal Earth Fault Monitoring

Response

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond to an internal earth fault:For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important Notes".

Figure 5-1: "Internal earth fault monitoring" function module

Table 5-1: "Internal earth fault monitoring" response

Activity

Unless it has been deactivated, this function is always active, independent of whether the motor is running or not (operating status "ON").

Response Internal earth fault

Deactivated X (d)Signal XWarn XSwitch off XDelay 0 - 25.5 s

Earth fault monitoring

Response/delay

see Table 5-1

Signal -

Switchingoff

QE1QE2QE3QE4QE5

Internal earth fault

External earth fault

Current fromcurrent orcurrent/voltage

"Internal earth fault"

measuringmodule



5.1.3 External Earth fault Monitoring (with Summation Current Transformer)

Response

Here you can set the response of SIMOCODE pro to an internal earth fault:For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important Notes".

Figure 5-2: "Earth fault monitoring" function block

Table 5-2: "External earth-fault monitoring" response

1) Additional delay of the summation current transformer delay

Activity


Response External earth fault

Deactivated -Signal X (d)Warn XSwitch off XDelay 0 - 25.5 s 1)

Signal -

Switchingoff

QE1QE2QE3QE4QE5Current from

summation currenttransformer/earth-fault module

Earth fault monitoring


External earth fault Response/delay

see Table 5-2

"External earth fault"



5.2 Current Limits Monitoring

5.2.1 Description

The current limits monitoring function is used - independently of the over-load protection - for process monitoring. SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the motor current for upper and lower current limits which can be freely chosen. The response of SIMOCODE pro when a pre-warning or trip level is reached can be freely parameterized and delayed. Current measuring modules or current/voltage measuring modules are used to measure the motor current.

Figure 5-3: "Current limits" function block

Trip level: I> 1)

Response when I>

Delay when I>

Warning level: I>

Response when I>

Delay when I>

Trip level: I< 2)

Response when I<

Delay when I<

Warning level: I<

Response when I<

Delay when I<

Hysteresis

Event

Event

Event

See

Table 5-3

See

Table 5-4

See

Table 5-5

See

Table 5-6

Current limit values

- Trip level I>

Event- Warning level I>

- Trip level I<

- Warning level I<

Switchingoff

QE1QE2QE3QE4QE5

Current I_max fromcurrent measuring(current orcurrent/voltagemeasuringmodule)

1) Upper limit2) Lower limit



5.2.2 I> (Upper Limit)

Trip level, warning level

When monitoring current limits I> (upper limit), 2 different response levels, I> (upper limit) trip level and I> (upper limit) warning level, can be paramete-rized and monitored. If the current of one or more phases exceeds the response level, the current limit monitoring is activated.

Activity of the trip level and warning level

The trip level/warning level only takes effect if the motor is running and the start-up procedure is finished, and there is no test position feedback (run+).


Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the trip level is overshot:For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important Notes".

Table 5-3: "Trip level" response for current limit monitoring I<

Response at warning level

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the warning level is overshot:For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important Notes".

Table 5-4: "Warning level" response for current limit monitoring I>

Hysteresis

Here you can set the hysteresis for the current limits I< (upper limit):

Trip level: 0 up to 1,020% of Ie in 4% increments

Warning level: 0 up to 1,020% of Ie in 4% increments

Response Trip level

Deactivated X (d)Signal XWarn -Switch off XDelay 0 - 25.5 s

Response Warning level:

Deactivated X (d)Signal XWarn XSwitch off -Delay 0 - 25.5 s

Hysteresis 0 to 15% of the response level value in 1% increments



5.2.3 I< (Lower Limit)


When monitoring current limits I< (lower limit), 2 different response levels (trip level / warning level) can be parameterized and monitored. If the current of the phases (Imax)falls below the response level, the current limit monito-ring is activated.




Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the trip level is undershot:For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important Notes".

Table 5-5: "Trip level" response for current limit monitoring I<


Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the warning level is undershot:For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important Notes".

Table 5-6: "Warning level" response for current limit monitoring I<

Hysteresis

Here you can set the hysteresis for the current limits I< (lower limit):

Trip level: 0 to 1,020% of Ie in 4% increments

Warning level: 0 to 1,020% of Ie in 4% increments

Response Trip level


Response Warning level:


Hysteresis 0 to 15% of response level value in 1% increments



5.3 Voltage Monitoring

Description

SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase undervoltage monitoring of either a three-phase network or a one-phase network for freely selectable limits. The response of SIMOCODE pro when a pre-warning or trip level is reached can be freely parameterized and delayed. Current/voltage measuring modules are used to measure the voltage. This is based on the minimal voltage of all voltages Umin.

Figure 5-4: "Voltage monitoring" function block


You can parameterize 2 different response levels (trip level/ warning level).If the voltage of one or more phases falls below the response level or warning level, the voltage monitoring is activated.

Trip level: 0 - 2,040 V in 8 V increments

Warning level: 0 - 2,040 V in 8 V increments

Event

- Warning level I<

Voltage Umin

Trip level: U<

Trip level activity


Trip delay

Hysteresis 1)

EventSee

Table 5-7

Voltage monitoring

- Trip level I<

Switchingoff

QE1QE2QE3QE4QE5

viacurrent/voltagemeasuring module

Warning level: U<

Warning level activity


Warning delay

See

Table 5-8

1)Hysteresis for voltage, power factor (cos phi), power




Here you can specify in which motor operating states the trip level/warning level is to take effect:


Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the trip level is undershot:For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important Notes".

Table 5-7: "Trip level" response for voltage monitoring



Table 5-8: "Warning level" response for voltage monitoring

Hysteresis for voltage, power factor (cos phi), power

Here you can set the hysteresis for voltage, power factor (cos phi) and power:

• Always, except in the case of TPF (on+) (d)

Trip level/warning level always takes effect, regardless of whether the motor is running or stationary; Exception: 'TPF', i.e. motor feeder is in test position.

• When the motor is on, except in the case of TPF (run)

Trip level/warning level only takes effect if the motor is on and not in the test position

Response Trip level

Deactivated X (d)

Signal X

Warn -

Switch off X

Delay 0 - 25.5 s

Response Warning level

Deactivated X (d)

Signal X

Warn X

Switch off -

Delay 0 - 25.5 s

Hysteresis for voltage, power factor (cos phi), power

0 to 15% of the response level value in 1% increments



5.4 Power Factor (cos phi) Monitoring

Description

Power factor (cos phi) monitoring monitors the load condition of inductive loads. The main field of application is for asynchronous motors in 1-phase or 3-phase networks, whose loads vary greatly. The measuring principle for the power factor (cos phi) is based on the evaluation of the phase displacement between voltage and current in one phase. If the set trip or warning level is undershot, a signal is generated or the motor is switched off depending on the setting.

Figure 5-5: "Power factor (cos phi) monitoring" function block


You can parameterize 2 different response levels (trip level/warning level) for power factor (cos phi) monitoring.



Trip level: 0 to 100%

Warning level: 0 to 100%

Trip level

Response

Delay

Warning level

Response

Delay

EventSee

Table 5-9

See

Table 5-10

Power factor (cos phi) monitoring

- Trip level power factor

Event- Warning level power factor

Switchingoff

QE1QE2QE3QE4QE5

Power factor (cos phi)from current/voltagemeasuring

Hysteresis 1)

1) Hysteresis for voltage, power factor (cos phi), power (see "Voltage monitoring" function block)

module (cos phi) <

(cos phi) <




Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the set trip level is undershot:For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important Notes".

Table 5-9: "Trip level" response for power factor (cos phi) monitoring



Table 5-10: "Warning level" response for power factor (cos phi) monitoring

Response Trip level

Deactivated X (d)

Signal X

Warn -

Switch off X

Delay 0 - 25.5 s


Deactivated X (d)

Signal X

Warn X

Switch off -

Delay 0 - 25.5 s



5.5 Active Power Monitoring

Description

SIMOCODE pro can indirectly monitor the state of a device or system via the active power. For example, by monitoring the active power of a pump motor, conclusions can be drawn from the active power level about the flow rate or fluid fill levels.SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the motor current for upper and lower current limits which can be freely chosen. The response of SIMOCODE pro when a pre-warning or trip level is reached can be freely parameterized and delayed. Current/voltage measuring modules are used to measure the active power.

Figure 5-6: "Power monitoring" function block

Event

Event

Event

- Trip level P>

Event- Warning level P>

- Trip level P<

- Warning level P<

Trip level: P> 1)

Response when P>

Delay when P>

Warning level: P>

Response when P>

Delay when P>

Trip level: P< 2)

Response when P<

Delay when P<

Warning level: P<

Response when P<

Delay when P<

See

Table 5-11

See

Table 5-12

See

Table 5-11

See

Table 5-12

Power monitoring Switchingoff

QE1QE2QE3QE4QE5

Active power fromcurrent/voltagemeasuring module

Hysteresis 3)

1) Upper limit2) Lower limit3) Hysteresis for voltage, power factor (cos phi), power (see "Voltage monitoring" function block)




You can parameterize 2 different response levels (trip level/warning level) for upper and lower limits for active power monitoring.



Response when trip level P> (upper limit), P< (lower limit)

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the set trip level is overshot or undershot:For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important Notes".

Table 5-11: "Trip level" response for active power monitoring

Response when warning level P> (upper limit), P< (lower limit)

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the warning level is undershot or overshot:For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important Notes".

Table 5-12: "Warning level" response for active power monitoring

Trip level• P> (upper limit)• P< (lower limit)

0.000 - 4294967.295 kW

Warning level:• P> (upper limit)• P< (lower limit)

0.000 - 4294967.295 kW

Response Trip level






5.6 0/4 A-20 mA Signal Monitoring

Description

SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the analog signals of a measuring transducer (normalized output signal 0/4-20 mA). The analog signals are fed to the "0/4-20 mA" function block via the analog module.

Figure 5-7: "0/4-20 mA signal monitoring" function block

Trip level 0/4-20 mA >

Trip level activity


Trip delay

EventSee

Table 5-13

0/4-20 mA signal monitoring

Trip level

Switchingoff

QE1QE2QE3QE4QE5

Analog input 1 of the

Marking trip level

Warning level 0/4-20 mA >



Warning delay

See

Table 5-14

Marking Warning Level

0/4 A -20 mA >

Event

Warning level0/4 A -20 mA >

Trip level 0/4-20 mA <

Trip Level activity


Trip delay

EventSee

Table 5-13

Trip level

Marking trip level

Warning level 0/4-20 mA <



Warning delay

See

Table 5-14

Marking warning level

0/4 A -20 mA <

Event

Warning level0/4 A -20 mA <

analog module(AM input 1)

Hysteresis for 0/4-20 mA




You can parameterize 2 different response levels (trip level/warning level) for upper and lower limits for 0/4-20 mA signal monitoring.


Here you can specify in which motor operating states the trip level/warning level is to take effect:

Response when trip level 0/4-20 mA> (upper limit), 0/4-20 mA< (lower limit)

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the set trip level is undershot or overshot:For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important Notes".

Table 5-13: "Trip level" response for 0/4-20 mA signal monitoring

Trip level• 0/4-20>(upper limit)• 0/4-20<(lower limit)

0.0 - 23.6 mA

Warning level:• 0/4-20>(upper limit)• 0/4-20<(lower limit)

0.0 - 23.6 mA

• Always (on) (d) Trip level/warning level always takes effect, regardless of whether the motor is running or stationary

• Always, except in the case of TPF (on+) (d)

Trip level/warning level always takes effect, regardless of whether the motor is running or stationary with the exception of "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in test position

• When the motor is on, except in the case of TPF (run)

Trip level/warning level only takes effect if the motor is on and not in the test position

• When the motor is on, except in the case of TPF, with start hiding (run+)

The trip level/warning level only takes effect if the motor is running and the start-up proce-dure is finished, and there is no test position feedback (TPF)

Response Trip level

Deactivated X (d)

Signal X

Warn -

Switch off X

Delay 0 - 25.5 s



Response when warning level 0/4-20 mA> (upper limit), 0/4-20 mA< (lower limit)

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the set warning level is undershot or overshot:For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important Notes".

Table 5-14: "Warning level" response for 0/4-20 mA signal monitoring

Marking

Optional marking for designating the signal, e.g. "0/4-20>"; Range: up to 10 characters.

Hysteresis for 0/4-20 mA signal

Here you can set the fluctuation range for the analog signal:

Note Free limit monitors can, for example, be used to monitor a second process variable via input 2 of the analog module.


Deactivated X (d)

Signal X

Warn X

Switch off -

Delay 0 - 25.5 s

Hysteresis for the analog signal 0 to 15% in 1% increments



5.7 Operation Monitoring

5.7.1 Description

SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating hours and stop times of a motor and limit the number of motor start-ups in a defined time frame. This avoids plant downtimes due to failed motors because they were either running too long (wear-out) or they were stopped for too long a period of time. For example, if an adjustable limit value is exceeded, a signal can be issued which can indicate that maintenance on the relevant motor is necessary or even that the motor should be replaced. After replacing the motor, the operating hours and stop times can be reset. In order to avoid excessive thermal strain on a motor and its premature aging, the number of motor start-ups in a selected time frame can be limited. The number of starts still possible is available for further processing in SIMOCODE pro. The limited number of possible starts can be indicated by pre-warnings.

Note All signals can be processed internally (limits) and/or registered by the bus..

Figure 5-8: "Operation monitoring" function block

Level

Response Event

Controlfunction

Operating hours

Level

Response Event - Stop time >

Stop time

Number of starts

Permissible starts

Time range for starts

Response at overshoot

Response at pre-warning

Interlocking time

Event

Operating hours >

- Number of motor starts >

- Just one start possible

See

Table 5-15

See

Table 5-15

See

Table 5-15

See

Table 5-15

- No start permitted

Switchingoff

QE1QE2QE3QE4QE5

Operation monitoring

Permissible starts



Response

Table 5-15: "Operation monitoring" response

5.7.2 Operating Hours Monitoring

The operating hours monitoring function offers the option of measuring the operating hours (service life) of a motor and if necessary, generating mainte-nance prompts for the motor in good time.

Response level

If the operating hours exceed the set response level, the monitoring function is activated.

Activity


Response

You can set the response at overshoot here. For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important Notes" and Table 5-15.

5.7.3 Stop Time Monitoring

In system parts for important processes, dual drives are often in operation (A and B drives). It must be assured here that these drives are always alter-nately run to avoid long stop times and reduce the risk of non-availability. The stop time monitoring function can be used, for example, to issue a warning which causes the other motor not presently in operation to be con-nected.

Response level

The length of the stop time is set here. The monitoring function is activated when this stop time interval is exceeded.

Response Operating

hours monito-

ring - level

Stop time

monitoring -

level

Number of

starts

response at

overshoot

level

Number of

start pre-warnings

Deactivated X (d) X (d) X (d) X (d)

Signal X X X X

Warn X X X X

Switch off - - X -

Response level: 0 to 1,193,046 hours

Response level: 0 to 65,535 hours



Activity


Response

Here you can determine the response when the permissible stop time is exceeded:For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important Notes" and Table 5-15.

5.7.4 Monitoring the Number of Starts

The function for monitoring the number of starts is used to protect system parts (motor, switching devices like e.g. soft starters, and converters) against too many impermissible start processes inside a parameterizable time frame and thus to prevent damage from occurring. This is especially useful for start-up or manual control. The following schematic shows the principle of the function for monitoring the number of starts.

Figure 5-9: Monitoring the number of starts

Permissible starts

The maximum number of starts is set here. With the first start, the time interval "Time range for starts" starts to run. After the second to the last per-missible start has been executed, a pre-warning "Another start permitted" is issued.

Time range for starts

The time frame of the start process is set here. The maximum number of starts is only available again after the parameterizable time range for starts has ended. The available starts are shown by the analog value "Permissible starts - actual value".

Activity


Permissible starts 1 to 255

Time range for starts 0 to 65,535 seconds

Time frame

1. Start within the time frame

t

Example:3 starts allowed

Pre-warning Overshooting



Response at Overshoot

Here you can set the response to be carried out when the permissible num-ber of starts within the time range for starts have been overshot:For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important Notes" and Table 5-15.

Response at Pre-Warning

Here you can set the response to be carried out after the second to the last start:For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important Notes" and Table 5-15.

Interlocking time

If a new start command is issued within the time frame after the last per-missible start has been carried out, this new start command will no longer be executed by the setting "Response at Overshoot- switching off". The "Fault - number of starts >" and the set interlocking time is activated.

Interlocking time 0 to 65,535 seconds



5.8 Analog Temperature Monitoring

Schematic and characteristic curve

Up to three analog temperature sensors, such as NTC, KTY 83/84, PT100, PT1000, can be used for temperature monitoring of, for example, the motor windings, the motor bearings, the coolant and the gearbox temperature. SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring for overtemperature: sepa-rate response levels can be set for the warning temperature and the switch off temperature.Temperature monitoring is based on the highest temperature present in all the sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module.

Figure 5-10: "Temperature monitoring" function block

Settings

Temperature Description

Trip level T> -273 °C - 65,262 °C

Response at trip level T >

Set response when the temperature is overshot (see the follo-wing table and chapter "Important Notes")

Marking: Trip level T > No parameters. Optional marking for designating the signal, e.g. "Temperature >"; Range: up to 10 characters

Warning level T > -273 °C -65,262 °C

Response warning- level T >

Set response when the temperature is overshot (see the follo-wing table and chapter "Important Notes")

Marking: Warning level T >

No parameters. Optional marking for designating the signal, e.g. "Temperature >"; Range: up to 10 characters

Hysteresis 0 - 255 °C in 1 °C increments

Table 5-16: Temperature monitoring settings

Temperature monitoring

Trip level (2)

Warning level (1)

Hysteresis

QE1

QE2

QE3

QE4

QE5

- Temperature module

Switchingoff



See

Tables

(Marking)

(Marking)

Event

Trip level T>

- Temperature moduleWarning level T>

Max. temperature of allthe sensor measuringcircuits of the temperature

"Response"

See

Tables

"Response"

module



Trip level activity and warning level activity

The trip level/warning level always takes effect, independent of whether the motor is running or not (operating status "ON").

Response

For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important Notes".• Overtemperature: Here you can choose how SIMOCODE pro should respond

if the temperature overshoots the warning level/trip level.

Table 5-17: "Overtemperature" response

Attention With motors for EEx e applications, the response must remain set to "switch off"!

Note The sensor type, the number of measuring circuits in use and the response to a sensor fault must be set in the "Temperature module inputs (TM inputs)" function block when temperature monitoring is used.

Response Warning limit T> Trip level T>

Deactivated X -

Signal X X

Warn X (d) -

Switch off - X (d)



5.9 Hysteresis for Monitoring Functions

The following diagram shows the function of the hysteresis with the monito-ring functions:

Figure 5-11: The operating principle of hysteresis for the monitoring function


Outputs 6In this chapter

In this chapter you will find information on the outputs of SIMOCODE pro:• Relay outputs on the basic unit and the digital modules• Analog module output• Light-emitting diodes of the operator panel• Signaling data on the PROFIBUS DP.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• planners and configurators• programmers.

Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge:• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets• PROFIBUS DP.


You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:Further function blocks > Outputs.


Outputs

6.1 Introduction

Description

SIMOCODE pro has different types of outputs. These are represented by the different function blocks in SIMOCODE pro. They are the external inter-faces of SIMOCODE pro. Within SIMOCODE pro, the outputs are represen-ted as plugs on the corresponding function blocks and can be assigned via connections to arbitrary functions or signals.The outputs include, for example:• Output terminals located on the outside of the basic units and digital

modules• LED on the operator panel for visualizing the operating state or different stati• Outputs to PROFIBUS DP (cyclic and acyclic).

Schematic

The following schematic shows the general representation of the different types of outputs:

Figure 6-1: General display of the different types of outputs

SIMOCODE pro

DP PROFIBUS DP

LED operator panel

Output

Output

Output

Output terminals

SIMOCODE pro

SIMOCODE pro

Plugs

Plugs

Plugs


Outputs


Outputs are used, e.g. for controlling motor contactors, displaying the sta-tus or signaling via PROFIBUS DP. The system provides different types of outputs depending on the device series and the expansion modules in use:

Table 6-1: Outputs

SIMOCODE

Outputs pro C (BU1) pro V(GG2)

Basic unit BU (BU outputs) ✓ ✓

Operator panel LED (BU LED) ✓ ✓

Digital module 1 outputs (DM1 outputs) — ✓

Digital module 2 outputs (DM2 outputs) — ✓

Analog module output (AM output) — ✓

Acyclic signaling data (Acyclic Send) ✓ ✓

Cyclic signaling data (Cyclic Send) ✓ ✓


Outputs

6.2 Basic Unit Outputs

Description

SIMOCODE pro has a "BU - outputs" function block with 3 relay outputs. You can e.g. switch contactors or lamps via the relay outputs. For this, the inputs (plugs) of the function block must be connected to the corresponding sok-kets (typically the contactor controls QE. of the control function). The "BU - outputs" function block consists of• 3 plugs, corresponding to the relay outputs Out1 to Out3• 3 relays• Output terminals.

In total there is:– 1 "BU - outputs" function block for BU1 and BU2.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "BU - outputs" function block:

Figure 6-2: "BU - outputs" function block

Application examples

• Controlling the main contactor in the motor feeder: You can e.g. define which relay output is used for controlling the motor con-tactor in the motor feeder. For this, connect the desired relay output with the corresponding "QE." contactor control.

• Controlling lamps for displaying the operating states: You can e.g. define which relay outputs are used for controlling lamps/LEDs displaying the operating states of the motor (fault, ON, OFF, fast, slow...). For this, connect the desired relay output to the corresponding "QE." con-tactor control. These are specially designed for controlling lamps and LEDs: The "QL..." lamp controls also automatically signal to the status displays via a 2 Hz flashing frequency:

– Test mode (QLE.../QLA lamp outputs are flashing)– Unacknowledged fault case (lamp output general fault QLS is flashing)– Passing on any other information, signals, warnings, faults, etc. to the

1

2

BU - output

3

1

2

3

6

7

Out1

Out2

Out3

Output terminals

Terminal numbers

SIMOCODE pro


Outputs

relay outputs– Lamp test: all QL outputs are activated for approx. 2s.

Settings

BU outputs Description

Outputs 1 to 3 Controls the "BU- outputs" function block from an arbitrary signal (optional sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc. (usually from the QE contactor controls)

Table 6-2: BU output settings


Outputs

6.3 Operator Panel LEDs

Description

SIMOCODE pro has an "OP - LED" function block to control the 7 freely usable 7 LEDs. The LEDs are on the operator panel and can be used for arbi-trary status displays. For this, the inputs (plugs) of the "OP - LED" function block must be connected to the corresponding sockets (e.g. with the sok-kets for the status signals of the control function).

Note The "OP - LED" function block can only be used if the operator panel (OP) is connected and parameterized in the device configuration!

The "OP - LED" function block contains• 4 plugs, "OP - LED green 1" to "OP - LED green 4", corresponding to the green

LEDs. The green LEDs are optically/logically assigned to the buttons of the operator panel. They usually display the feedback of the motor operating state

• 3 plugs, "OP - LED yellow 1" to "OP - LED yellow 3", corresponding to the yel-low LEDs

• 4 green LEDs• 3 yellow LEDs

In total there is:– 1 "OP - LED" function block for BU1 and BU2.

Operator panel LEDs

The following diagram shows the front view of the operator panel with the LEDs:

Figure 6-3: LEDs of the operator panel

TEST/RESET


Green 1 Green 2 Green 3 Green 4

Yellow 1 Yellow 2 Yellow 3


Outputs

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "OP - LED" function block:

Figure 6-4: Schematic of the "OP - LED" function block


• Displaying operating states: You can e.g. define which LEDs are to be activated for displaying the motor operating states (fault, ON, OFF, fast, slow...). For this, connect the desired LED to the corresponding "QL." lamp control of the control function.

• Passing on any other information, signals, warnings, faults, etc. to the yellow LEDs.

Settings

OP LED Description

Green 1 - Green 4 Controls the "OP - LED" function block from an arbitrary signal (arbitrary sockets , e.g. feedback operating state "motor")

Yellow 1 - Yellow 3 Controls the "OP - LED" function block from an arbitrary signal (arbitrary sockets , e.g. displays for status, events, faults)

Table 6-3: OP LED settings

Yellow 1

Yellow 2

Yellow 3

Green 1

Green 2

Green 3

Green 4

OP - LED LED


Outputs

6.4 Digital Module Outputs

Description

SIMOCODE pro has 2 function blocks: "DM1 - outputs" and "DM2 - outputs", with 2 relay outputs each. You can e.g. switch contactors or lamps via the relay outputs. For this, the inputs (plugs of the "DM - outputs" function blocks) must be connected to the corresponding sockets (e.g. of the control function).

Note Function blocks can only be used if the corresponding digital modules (DM) are connected and parameterized in the device configuration!

Each function block contains• 2 plugs, corresponding to the relay outputs Out1, Out2• 2 relays• Output terminals.

In total there is– 1 "DM1 - outputs" function block for BU1 and BU2.– 1 "DM2 - outputs" function block for BU1 and BU2.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "DM - outputs" function blocks:

Figure 6-5: Schematic of the "DM1 - outputs"/"DM2 - outputs" function block


• Controlling the motor contactor in the motor feeder: You can e.g. define which relay output is to be used for controlling the main contactor in the motor feeder. For this, connect the desired relay output with the corresponding "QE." con-tactor control of the control function.

• Controlling lamps for displaying the operating states: You can e.g. define which relay outputs are to be used for controlling the lamps/LEDs displaying the motor operating states (fault, ON, OFF, fast, slow ...). For this, connect the desired relay output with the corresponding "QL..." lamp control of the control function.

• Passing on any other information, signals, warnings, faults, etc. to the relay outputs.

1

2

DM1 - outputs

Out1

Out2

1

2

DM2 - outputs

Out1

Out2

Output terminals Output terminals


Outputs

Settings

DM1 / DM2 output

settings

Description

Outputs 1 to 2 Controls the "DM1 outputs" and "DM2 outputs" function blocks from an arbitrary signal , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc. (usually from the QE contactor controls)

Table 6-4: "DM1/DM2 - outputs" settings


Outputs

6.5 Analog Module Output

Description

You can expand the basic unit 2 by an analog output using the analog module. The corresponding function block allows every analog value (2 byte/1 word) in SIMOCODE pro to be output as a 0/4 A - 20 mA signal, for example, on a pointer instrument which is connected. By activating the function block via the "Assigned analog output value" plug with an arbitrary integer value between 0 and 27,648, an equivalent analog signal of 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA is outputted to the output terminals of the analog module..

Note The "AM - output" function block can only be used if the analog module (AM) is connected and parameterized in the device configuration!

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "AM - output" function block:

Figure 6-6: Schematic of the "AM - output" function block

Settings

Table 6-5: "AM - output" settings

Signal/value Range

Assigned analog output value Arbitrary value (1 word/2 bytes) in SIMOCODE pro

Output signal 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA

Start value range 0 - 65,535

End value range 0 - 65,535

Out+

AM - output

Out+

Assigned Start value range

End value range

Output signal

analog output value


Outputs


1) Output of the effective motor current - over the entire motor current

range

The motor current of a motor is within the range of 0 to 8 A.The nominal current IN of the motor at the rated load is 2 A.The set current Ie parameterized in SIMOCODE ES corresponds to the nomi-nal current IN (2 A). In SIMOCODE pro, the representation of the effective phase currents or of the maximum current (current IL_1, IL_2, IL_3, max. current I_max) is according to the range chosen proportional to the parameterized set current Ie:– 0 A motor current corresponds to 0 % of Ie– 8 A motor current corresponds to 400 % of Ie– The smallest unit for the effective motor current in SIMOCODE pro is

1 % (see measured values data record 94).

Figure 6-7: Application example (output of the motor current - entire range)As a result,– the "Start value range" that can be chosen is: 0– the "End value range" that can be chosen is: 400.

When the parameterized "Output signal" = 0 - 20 mA:– 0 % motor current corresponds to: 0 mA on the analog module output– 400 % motor current corresponds to: 20 mA on the analog module output.


Max. current I_max

Out+

AM - output

Out+

Start value range

End value range

Output signal

0

400

0-20 mA

Assignedanalog output value


Outputs

2) Output of the effective motor current - partial range (overload range)

of the motor current only

The motor current of a motor is within the range of 0 to 8 A.The nominal current IN of the motor at the rated load is 2 A.The set current Ie parameterized in SIMOCODE ES corresponds to the nomi-nal current IN (2 A). However, only the overload range (2 A - 8 A) is to be dis-played on a pointer instrument via the analog module output. In SIMOCODE pro, the representation of the effective phase currents or of the maximum current (current IL_1, IL_2, IL_3, max. current I_max) is accor-ding to the range chosen proportional to the parameterized set current Ie:– 2 A motor current corresponds to 100 % of Ie– 8 A motor current corresponds to 400 % of Ie– The smallest unit for the effective motor current in SIMOCODE pro is

1 % (see measured values data record 94).

Figure 6-8: Application example: output of the motor current - overload range

As a result– the "Start value range" that can be chosen is: 100– the "End value range" that can be chosen is: 400.


When the parameterized "Output signal" = 4 - 20 mA:– 100 % motor current corresponds to: 4 mA on the analog module output– 400 % motor current corresponds to: 20 mA on the analog module output

Max. current I_max

Out+

AM - output

Out+

Start value range

End value range

Output signal

100

400

0-20 mA



Outputs

3) Cyclic output of an analog value from the automation system via the

PROFIBUS

It is possible to cyclically transmit a word (2 bytes) from the automation system to SIMOCODE pro via the PROFIBUS. An arbitrary value can be out-putted as a 0/4 to 20 mA signal by directly connecting this cyclic control word from PROFIBUS to the analog module output. If the transmitted value is in S7 Format (0 to 27648), this should be taken into consideration for the parameterization:

As a result,– the "Start value range" that can be chosen is: 0– the "End value range" that can be chosen is: 27648.

When the parameterized "Output signal" = 0 - 20 mA:– 0 corresponds to: 0 mA on the analog module output– 27648 corresponds to: 20 mA on the analog module output.

When the parameterized "Output signal" = 4 - 20 mA:– 0 corresponds to: 4 mA on the analog module output– 27648 corresponds to: 20 mA on the analog module output.

Zyklisch Steuern 2/3


(1 cycl. word from the PLC)

Out+

AM - output

Out+

Start value range

End value range

Output signal

0

27648

0-20 mA


Outputs

6.6 Cyclic Send

Description

The "Cyclic signaling" function blocks are used to determine which informa-tion is given cyclically to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP. The "Cyclic signaling" function blocks consists of• 8 bits each (2 bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)• 4 words (= 8 bytes, byte 2 to byte 9 for four analog values, freely parame-

terizable)• 1 output each to the PROFIBUS DP.In total there are– 3 "Cyclic Send" function blocks (0, 1, 2/9).

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Cyclic Send" function blocks:

Figure 6-9: Schematic of the "Cyclic Send" function block

Cyclic Send 2/9

DPByte 4/5

Byte 6/7

Byte 8/9

Byte 2/3

To thePROFIBUS DP

Basic type 1 (for GG2)

Cyclic Send 2/9 with 4 word (8 bytes)for up to four analog values

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

Cyclic Send

DPto PROFIBUS DP

Bit 0Byte 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

Cyclic Send

DPto PROFIBUS DP

Bit 0Byte 1

Cyclic Send 2/9

DPTo thePROFIBUS DP

Byte 2/3

Basic type 2 (for GG2)

Basic type 1 (for GG2)Basic type 2 (for GG2)

Basic type 1 (for GG2)Basic type 2 (for GG2)

Cyclic Send 0 with 8 Bits Cyclic Send 1 with 8 Bitsfor binary Informationfor binary information

Cyclic Send 2/3 with 1 word (2 bytes)for one analog value


Outputs

Cyclic services

Cyclic send data is exchanged once in every DP cycle between the DP master and the DP slave. In this case, the DP master sends the cyclic con-trol data to SIMOCODE pro. In response, SIMOCODE pro sends the cyclic send data to the DP master.

Settings

Cyclic signaling

data

Description

Byte 0 to 1 Bit 0 to bit 7 Basic types 1, 2

Controls the bits with arbitrary signals (arbitrary sockets e.g. device inputs, signaling data, etc.)

Byte 2/3 Basic types 1, 2

Controls 1 word (2 bytes) with arbitrary analog values (arbitrary sockets e.g. maximum current Imax, remaining cooling time, actual value of timers, etc.)

Byte 4/5, 6/7, 8/9Basic type 1

Controls 4 words (8 bytes) with arbitrary analog values (arbitrary sockets

Table 6-6: Cyclic Send data settings

Byte 0 of the signaling data is already preset. Byte 2/3 is preset with the max. current!

For this, see also chapter 12.2 "Transmitting Data".


Outputs

6.7 Acyclic Send

Description

In addition to "Cyclic Send", it is also possible to transmit an additional 16 bits of information to the PLC/PC via acyclic services.The "Cyclic Send" function block is used to determine which information is issued cyclically to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP. For this, the inputs (plugs) of the function blocks must be connected to the correspon-ding sockets.The "Cyclic Send" function block consists of• 8 bits each (2 byte, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)• 1 output each to the PROFIBUS DP.In total there are• 2 "Acyclic Send" function blocks for the BU1 and BU2.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Acyclic signaling" function blocks:

Figure 6-10: Schematic of the "Acyclic signaling" function block

Acyclic services

Acyclic signaling data is only transmitted on request. The information (2 bytes) is in data record 203. This data record can be read by every master (PLC or PC) which supports the acyclic services of PROFIBUS DPV1.

Settings

Acyclic Send data Description

Byte 0 to 1 Bit 0 to bit 7

Controls the bits with arbitrary signals (arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, signaling data, state infor-mation, fault signals, etc.)

Table 6-7: Acyclic Send data settings

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

Acyclic Send

DPto PROFIBUS DP

Bit 0Byte 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

Acyclic Send

DPto PROFIBUS DP

Bit 0Byte 1


Inputs 7In this chapter

In this chapter you will find information on the inputs of SIMOCODE pro.The inputs include:• Binary inputs on the basic units and digital modules• Operator panel buttons• Temperature module inputs• Analog module inputs• Control data from PROFIBUS DP.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• planners and configurators• programmers.

Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge:• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets.


You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:Device parameters > Inputs.


Inputs

7.1 Introduction

Description

SIMOCODE pro has different inputs. These are represented by the different function blocks in SIMOCODE pro. They are the external interfaces of SIMOCODE pro. Within SIMOCODE pro, these inputs are represented as sockets on the corresponding function blocks and can be assigned via con-nections to arbitrary functions. The inputs can be:• Input terminals , located on the outside of the basic units and digital

modules• Buttons on the operator panel (1 button test/reset, 4 freely parameterizable

buttons) and basic units (1 button test/reset)• Temperature module inputs• Analog module inputs• Inputs from PROFIBUS DP (cyclic and acyclic).

Schematic

The following schematic shows the general representation of the different types of inputs:

Figure 7-1: General representation of the input types

SIMOCODE pro

DPPROFIBUS DP

Input

Input

Input

Input terminals

SIMOCODE pro

SIMOCODE pro

Buttons- Control commands- Test/reset

Sockets

Sockets

Sockets


Inputs


Inputs are used, for example, for inputting external signals e.g. via pushbut-tons, key-operated switches, etc. These external signals are processed fur-ther internally via corresponding connections. The system provides different inputs, depending on the device series:

SIMOCODE

Inputs pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)

Basic unit inputs (BU inputs) ✓ ✓

Operator panel buttons (OP buttons) ✓ ✓

Digital module 1 - inputs (DM1 inputs) — ✓

Digital module 2 - inputs (DM2 inputs) — ✓

Temperature module inputs (TM inputs) — ✓

Analog module inputs (AM inputs) — ✓

Acyclic Receive ✓ ✓

Cyclic Receive ✓ ✓

Table 7-1: Inputs


Inputs

7.2 Basic Unit Inputs

Description

The basic unit has a function block "BU - inputs" function block with 4 grou-ped binary inputs. You can connect e.g. the buttons for a local control sta-tion to the inputs. These signals can be used for further processing in SIMOCODE pro by internally connecting the sockets of the "BU - inputs" function block. The "BU - inputs" function block consists of• Input terminals , located on the outside of the basic unit, corresponding

to the sockets "BU - input 1" to "BU - input 4"• Sockets in SIMOCODE pro which can be connected to any plugs, e.g. to the

"control stations" function block• A socket for the "TEST/RESET" button:

The function of the "test/reset" button is generally dependent on the opera-ting status of the device: - Reset function for the acknowledgement of faults - Test function for carrying out device tests. In addition, other functions can be assigned to the "TEST/RESET" button (e.g. operation of the memory module, addressing plug). For this, see also chapter 10.2 "Test/Reset".

In total there is:– 1 "BU - inputs" function block for BU1 and BU2.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "BU - inputs" function block:

Figure 7-2: Schematic of the "BU - inputs" function block

Basic unit (BU)

9

10

4

5

BU - inputs

1

2

3

4

Terminalnumbers

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

BU - test/reset button

8

TasteTest/reset


Inputs


The inputs can be used, for example, to connect the start and stop buttons of the local control station, which can then be assigned to the "local control" internal control station.Via the corresponding assignments, the input signals can be used to acti-vate, for example, function blocks such as "Reset" or "External fault".


See chapter 1.7.1 "Basic Units (BU)".

Settings

Basic unit Description

Delay Inputs If necessary, you can set a delay time for the inputs.Range: 6, 16, 26, 36 ms (default setting: 16 ms).

Table 7-2: "BU - inputs" settings


Inputs

7.3 Operator Panel Buttons

Description

The operator panel contains the buttons 1 to 4 and the "TEST/RESET" button. Correspondingly, the "OP - buttons" function block has 5 available sockets in SIMOCODE pro.

Note The "OP - LED" function block can only be used if the operator panel (OP) is connected and parameterized in the device configuration!

• Operator panel, buttons 1 to 4: The buttons 1 to 4 are usually intended for inputting control commands for the motor feeder. Control commands can be:

– motor on (ON>), motor off (OFF) for a direct starter– motor left (ON<), motor off (OFF), motor right (ON>) for a reversing

starter– motor slow (ON>), motor fast (ON>>), motor off (OFF) for a Dahlander

circuit.

However, the buttons 1 to 4 are not rigidly assigned to the above mentio-ned control commands and can also be assigned to other functions by internally connecting the corresponding sockets of the function block in SIMOCODE pro.

• Operator panel, "TEST/RESET" button The function of the "TEST/RESET" button is generally assigned to fixed functions:

– Reset function for the acknowledgement of faults– Test function for carrying out device tests.– Operation of the memory module or the addressing plug

Despite this, the status of the "TEST/RESET" button can be read from the corresponding socket of the function block and can be assigned to further functions in SIMOCODE pro. For this, see also chapter 10.2 "Test/Reset".


Inputs

Operating panel buttons

The following diagram shows the front view of the operator panel with but-tons:

Figure 7-3: Operator panel buttons

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "OP - buttons" function block:

Figure 7-4: Schematic of the "OP - buttons" function block


Button 1 Button 2 Button 3 Button 4

TEST/RESET

"TEST/RESET" button

Button 1

Button 2

Button 3

Button 4

ButtonTEST/RESET

OP - button 1

OP - button 2

OP - button 3

OP - button 4

OP - Test/Reset button

OP - buttons


Inputs

7.4 Digital Module Inputs

Description

SIMOCODE pro has two "DM - inputs" function blocks with 4 grouped binary inputs. You can connect e.g. the buttons for a local control station to the inputs. These signals can be used for further processing in SIMOCODE pro by internally wiring the of the sockets of the "DM - inputs" function blocks.

Note The "DM - inputs" function block can only be used if the corresponding digi-tal module (DM) is connected and parameterized in the device configura-tion!

Every "DM - inputs" function block consists of• Input terminals , located on the outside of the digital module, correspon-

ding to the sockets "DM - input 1" to "DM - input 4"• Sockets in SIMOCODE pro which can be connected to any plugs, e.g. to the

"control stations" function block.

In total there is:– 1 function block "DM1 - input" and "DM2 - input" for BU2.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "DM - inputs" function blocks:

Figure 7-5: Schematic of the "DM - inputs" function block

Digital module (DM)

23

24

26

27

DM1 - inputs

1

2

3

4

Terminalnumbers

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

Digital module (DM)

23

24

26

27

DM2 - inputs

1

2

3

4

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

25 25


Inputs


Digital modules offer the option of further increasing the number of binary inputs and outputs on basic device 2.SIMOCODE pro V can thus be extended to a maximum of 12 binary inputs and 7 binary outputs. Via the corresponding assignments, the input signals can be used to activate, for example, function blocks such as "Reset" or "External fault". An external fault can be the binary signal of an external rota-tional-speed monitor which signals that the setpoint speed of a motor has been undershot.


See chapter 1.7.5 "Expansion Modules for the SIMOCODE pro V Device Series".

Settings

Basic unit Description

Delays Inputs If necessary, you can set a delay time for the inputs.Range: 6, 16, 26, 36 ms. Default setting: 16 ms. These values are valid for digital modules with a 24 V DC input supply. For digital modules with a 110 to 240 V AC/DC input supply, the values are about 40 ms higher.

Table 7-3: "DM - inputs" settings


Inputs

7.5 Temperature Module Inputs

Description

SIMOCODE pro has a "TM - inputs" function block with three analog sockets corresponding to the three sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module. The temperature (°C) of the three measuring circuits can be read from these sockets and processed internally. An additional analog socket supplies the maximum temperature of the three measured temperatures. The two binary sockets of the function block represent the status of the sensor measuring circuits. The temperatures can be processed internally and/or transmitted to the automation system via the "Cyclic Send" function block.

Note The "TM - inputs" function block can only be used if the corresponding tem-perature module (TM) was connected and parameterized in the device confi-guration!

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "TM - inputs" function block:

Figure 7-6: Schematic of the "TM - inputs" function block

Notes on wiring

You can connect up to three 2-wire or 3-wire temperature sensors. Further information can be found in chapter 13.3 "Wiring".

TM - inputs

Max. temperature

Temperature 1

Temperature 2

Temperature 3

Signal

Sensor fault

u

R

1 2

PT / KTY

u

R

1 2

NTC

Out of range

1T3

2T3

3T3

1T2

2T2

3T2

50

51

52

53

54

55

Inputs

T156

T157

Sensor type

Response to sensor fault /Out of range

Number of act. sensors

Terminalnumbers


Inputs


You can monitor, amongst others, the following motor components:• Motor windings• Motor bearings• Motor coolant temperature• Motor gearbox oil temperature.

The individual temperatures of the 3 sensor measuring circuits can be moni-tored independently of each other by means of a connection to free limit monitors.

Settings

Table 7-4: Temperature module input settings

1)

Table 7-5: "Sensor fault/Out of range" response

For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important Notes".

Temperature module Description

Sensor Type: PT100, PT1000, KTY83, KTY84, NTC

Response 1) to sensor fault/ Out of range

Deactivated, signal, warn (d), switch off

Number of active sensors 1 sensor, 2 sensors, 3 sensors

Response Sensor fault/Out of range

Deactivated X

Signal X

Warn X (d)

Switch off X

Delay -


Inputs

7.6 Analog Module Inputs

Description

SIMOCODE pro has a "AM - inputs" function block with two analog sockets corresponding to the two analog inputs of the analog module. The current analog value of each input can be read from these sockets and processed internally. An additional binary socket of the function block represents the status of the sensor measuring circuits. The analog values can be processed internally and/or transmitted cyclically to the automation system via the "Cyclic Send" function block.

Note The "AM - inputs" function block can only be used if the corresponding ana-log module (AM) was connected and parameterized in the device configura-tion!

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "AM - inputs" function block:

Figure 7-7: Schematic of the "AM - inputs" function block

signal

AM - inputs

IN130

31

33

34

Inputs

IN2

IN1

IN2

Input 1

Input 2

Wire break

Input signal

Response towire break

Active inputsTerminalnumbers


Inputs


Typical applications are, for example:• Fill level monitoring for implementing dry running protection for pumps• Monitoring of pollution in a filter using a differential pressure transducer.

Settings

Table 7-6: Analog module inputs settings

Safety instructions

Attention The inputs of the analog module are passive inputs. This means that in order to configure an analog input circuit, every input requires an additional exter-nal current source connected in series. If the output of the analog module is not being used by another application, it can be used as a current source for an input circuit of the analog module. To make use of this option, the "Start value range" and the "End value range" must be set to 65535. In this way, the max. possible current is made available via the analog module output.

Analog module Description

Input signal 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA

Response to wire break Deactivated, signal, warn (d), switch off

Active inputs 1 input, 2 inputs


Inputs

7.7 Cyclic Receive

Description

With the "Cyclic Receive" function block, you can specify which cyclic infor-mation from PROFIBUS DP will be processed further in SIMOCODE pro. This is normally in the form of binary control commands from the PLC/DCS. The motor can be made controllable via the PROFIBUS DP, by means of a connection with the "control stations" function block in SIMOCODE pro. The "Cyclic Receive" function blocks consist of:• 8 bits each (2 byte, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)• 1 word (= 2 bytes, byte 2 to 3 for an analog value, freely programmable)

for basic type 1• 1 input each from PROFIBUS DP.In total there are:– 3 "Cyclic Receive" function blocks (0, 1, 2/3).

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Cyclic Receive" function blocks:

Figure 7-8: Schematic of the "Cyclic Receive" function block

Cyclic services

The cyclic data is exchanged once in every DP cycle between DP master and DP slave. The DP master sends the cyclic control data (cyclic receive) to SIMOCODE pro. As a response, SIMOCODE pro sends the cyclic signal data (cyclic send) to the DP master.

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Byte 0

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

Cyclic Receive 0

DP From the PROFIBUS DP

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Byte 1

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

Cyclic Receive 1


Byte 2/3Cyclic Receive 2/3 1)

Analog valueDP

1) BU2 with basic type 1 only


Inputs

7.8 Acyclic Receive

Description

In addition to "Cyclic Receive", there is also the option of transferring further information acyclically to SIMOCODE pro via the PROFIBUS DP. With the "Acyclic Receive" function block, you can specify which acyclic information from PROFIBUS DP will be processed further in SIMOCODE pro. For this, you must connect the sockets of the "Acyclic Receive" function block to arbitrary function blocks in SIMOCODE pro.The "Acyclic Receive" function blocks consists of:• 8 bits each (= 2 bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary Information)• 1 word (= 2 bytes, byte 2 to 3 for an analog value, freely parameterizable)• 1 input each from PROFIBUS DPIn total there are:• 3 "Acyclic Receive" function blocks (0, 1, 2/3).

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Acyclic Receive" function blocks:

Figure 7-9: Schematic of the "Acyclic Receive" function block

Acyclic services

Acyclic data is only transferred on request. The information (4 bytes) is in data record 202. This data record can be read by every master (PLC or PC) which supports the acyclic services of PROFIBUS DPV1. Connection monitoring is activated after the receipt of each data set. The content of the data sets is deleted after the time-out has elapsed.

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Byte 0

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

Acyclic Receive 0


Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Byte 1

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

Acyclic Receive 1


Byte 2/3Acyclic Receive 2/3 1)

Analog valueDP

1) BU2 with basic type 1 only


Inputs


Analog Value Recording 8In this chapter

This chapter provides information regarding the possibility of recording the measuring curves of different measured values, e.g. the motor current when the motor is running, using SIMOCODE pro V. The increasing wear on the motor and the equipment driven by the motor all cause the motor current to change over time. By recording the characteristic curve of the motor current at different points in time and making direct com-parisons, conclusions can be drawn regarding the condition of the motor and the equipment.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• configurators• programmers• commissioners• service personnel.

Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge:• SIMOCODE pro• motor protection, motor control• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets• knowledge of electrical drive engineering.


You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:Device parameters > Motor control.


Analog Value Recording

Description

The "Analog value recording" function block can be used to record various analog values (2 bytes/1word) in SIMOCODE pro over a set period of time. For example, you can use this function block to record the characteristic curve of the motor current when the motor is started. Recording is carried out directly in SIMOCODE pro on the basis of the motor feeder and independently of PROFIBUS or the automation system. Every analog value present at the "Allocated analog value" analog socket is recor-ded and saved. The recording starts on the basis of the edge (positive/nega-tive) via any binary signal at the trigger input of the function block. Up to 60 values can be saved internally in the device. The time frame of the recording is indirectly determined by the selected sampling rate:

Sampling time = sampling rate[s] * 60 values.

The pre-trigger can be used to specify how far in advance the recording should commence before the trigger signal is issued. The pre-trigger is set as a percentage of the entire sampling time. In addition, you can also export the measuring curve into a *.csv file for further processing, for example, in MS Excel.

Functional principle

Figure 8-1: Functional principle of the analog value recording

The old measuring curve will be overwritten in SIMOCODE pro each time a new trigger signal is sent to the trigger input.



Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Analog value recording" function block:

Figure 8-2: Schematic of the "Analog value record" function block

Settings

Table 8-1: "Analog value record" settings

Application example

Record of the motor current when the motor starts/sampling time = 12 s/pre-trigger = 25% (3 s):

Figure 8-3: Application example of the analog value record

Signal/value Range

Trigger input The analog value recording starts when any signal is issued (arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, motor current flowing)

Allocated analog value Arbitrary value (1 word/2 bytes) in SIMOCODE pro

Trigger edge Positive/negative

Sampling rate 0.1 to 50 s in 0.1s increments

Pre-trigger 0 to 100% in 5% increments

Record

Allocated

Trigger input

Trigger edge

Sampling rate

Pre-trigger

analog value

0.2 s

25%

Motor current flowing

Record

Trigger edge

Sampling rate

Pre-trigger

Max. current I_max

positive


3UF50 Compatibility Mode 9In this chapter

In this chapter you will find information on the 3UF50 compatibility mode.

Target groups


Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge:• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets• knowledge about PROFIBUS DP.


You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:Device parameters > 3UF50 compatibility mode.

Description

The 3UF50 compatibility mode is applied when a SIMOCODE-DP device is to be replaced by a SIMOCODE pro device without changing the configura-tion. In the 3UF50 compatibility mode you can operate a SIMOCODE pro-V basic unit 2 with a 3UF50 configuration. In this case, the communication using SIMOCODE pro behaves the same as communication using SIMOCODE-DP from the point of view of the PLC (Master class 1). SIMOCODE-DP supports cyclic communication (basic types 1-3), diagnosis as well as DPV1 date records (DR 130, DS 131, DS 133).

Win SIMOCODE DP converter

In order for the technical functions (parameterization) of SIMOCODE-DP to be integrated into the technical functions of SIMOCODE pro V, the device parameters must be adjusted accordingly. The "Win-SIMOCODE-DP Conver-ter" software supports you in this process. This software enables you to con-vert the parameter files (smc files) created with Win-SIMOCODE-DP into SIMOCODE ES parameter files (sdp files).


3UF50 Compatibility Mode

Safety instructions

Attention Communication with a DP-Master (Master class 2), e.g. with the Win-SIMO-CODE-DP Professional software via PROFIBUS DP, is not covered by the 3UF50 compatibility mode.

Attention In the 3UF50 compatibility mode, the start-up parameter block is always set, i.e. the transmission of the device parameters created using SIMOCODE-DP-GSD or the object manager SIMOCODE-DP cannot be integrated into SIMOCODE pro V.

Attention The 3UF50 compatibility mode supports SIMOCODE-DP projects in which SIMCODE-DP is integrated via GSD SIEM8031.gs?, SIEM8069.gs? or via the object manager (OM) SIMOCODE DP.



Diagram of the control and signaling data

The following table shows the control and signaling data in the compatibility mode:

Table 9-1: "Controlling" configuration

Table 9-2: "Signalling" configuration

Controlling

Basic type 1SIMOCODE-

DP

Basic type 1SIMOCODE

pro V


DP.


pro V


DP


pro V

0

Control data

Cyclic receive - bit 0 1.7

0

Control data

Cyclic receive - bit 0 1.7

0

Control data

Cyclic receive - bit 0 1.71 1 1

2 Not supported 2 Not supported 2 Not supported

3 3 3

Signalling


DP


pro V


DP


pro V


DP


pro V

0 Signaling data

Cyclic signaling Bit[0.0] 1.7

0 Signaling data

Cyclic signaling Bit[0.0] 1.7

0

Signaling data

Cyclic signaling Bit[0.0] 1.71 1 1

2Motor current

Specified: Max. current I_max

2Motor current

Specified: Max. current I_max

2 Acycl. signalling Bit[0.0] 1.73 3 3

4 Number of starts

Number of starts (Bytes 0 - 3)5

6

7 Value counter 1

Counter 1 Actual value8

9 Value counter 2

Counter 2 Actual value10

11 Value sensor TM - Max.tempe-rature



Diagram of the diagnosis data

The following table shows the diagnosis data in the 3UF50 compatibility mode:

Byte Bit

Setup 3UF50 - Device-specific diagnosis

acc. to DP standardSIMOCODE-DP

Byte Bit


acc. to DP standard

Equivalent in SIMOCODE pro V

6 0x0B

Same as 3UF50 diagnosis

7 0x81

8 0x04

6 0x0E 9 0x00

7.0 Free 10.0 Free

7.1 Event: DP block 10.1 Event: DP block Event - Start-up parameter block active

7.2 Event: Emergency start 10.2 Event: Emergency start Status - Emergency start performed

7.3 Event: HW test ok 10.3 Event: HW test ok • No fault - HW fault basic unit• No fault - module fault• No fault - Temporary components

7.4 Free 10.4 Free -

7.5 Event: Ext. event 1 10.5 Event: Ext. event 1 Event - Ext. fault 5

7.6 Event: Ext. event 2 10.6 Event: Ext. event 2 Event - Ext. fault 6

7.7 Event: Ext. event 3 10.7 Event: Ext. event 3 -

8.0 Warning: Ext. warning 11.0 Warning: Ext. warning Warning - Ext. fault 3

8.1 Warning: Unbalance > 40% 11.1 Warning: Unbalance > 40% Warning - Unbalance

8.2 Event: Failure PLC-CPU 11.2 Event: Failure PLC-CPU Status - PLC/DCS

8.3 Warning: Sensor short circuit 11.3 Warning: Sensor short circuit Warning - Thermistor short circuit

8.4 Event: Cooling down time active 11.4 Event: Cooling down time active Status - Cooling down time active

8.5 Status: TPF 11.5 Status: TPF Status - test position (TPF)



9.0 Warning: Earth fault 12.0 Warning: Earth fault • Warning - Int. earth fault or

• Warning - Ext. earth fault

9.1 Warning: Overload 12.1 Warning Overload Warning - Overload

9.2 Warning: Overload + Unbalance 12.2 Warning: Overload + Unbalance Warning - Overload + phase failure

9.3 Warning: I1 response level overshot


Warning - Warning level I>

9.4 Warning: I1 response level undershot


Warning - Warning level I<



-



-

Table 9-3: Diagram of the diagnosis data in the 3UF50 compatibility mode



9.7 Warning: Thermistor 12.7 Warning: Thermistor • Warning - Thermistor overload• Warning - Thermistor wire break• Warning - TM warning T>• Signal - TM sensor error• Warning - TM out of range

10.0 Trip: Earth fault 13.0 Trip: Earth fault • Fault - Int. earth fault or

• Fault - Int. earth fault

10.1 Trip: Overload 13.1 Trip: Overload Fault - Overload

10.2 Trip: Overload + Unbalance 13.2 Trip: Overload + Unbalance Fault - Overload + phase failure

10.3 Trip: I1 response level overshot 13.3 Trip: I1 response level overshot Fault - trip level I>

10.4 Trip: I1 response level undershot 13.4 Trip: I1 response level undershot Fault - trip level I<

10.5 Trip: I2 response level overshot 13.5 Trip: I2 response level overshot -

10.6 Trip: I2 response level undershot 13.6 Trip: I2 response level undershot -

10.7 Trip: Thermistor 13.7 Trip: Thermistor • Fault - Thermistor overload• Fault - Thermistor short circuit• Fault - Thermistor wire break• Fault - TM tripping T>• Fault - TM sensor error• Fault - TM out of range

11.0 Trip: F ON* 14.0 Trip: F ON* Fault - Feedback ON

11.1 Trip: F OFF 14.1 Trip: F OFF Fault - Feedback ON

11.2 Trip: Motor blocked 14.2 Trip: Motor blocked Fault - Blocking

11.3 Trip: Positioner blocked 14.3 Trip: Positioner blocked Fault - Blocking positioner

11.4 Trip: Double 0 14.4 Trip: Double 0 Fault - Double 0

11.5 Trip: Double 1 14.5 Trip: Double 1 Fault - Double 1

11.6 Trip: End position 14.6 Trip: End position Fault - End position

11.7 Trip: Antivalence 14.7 Trip: Antivalence Fault - Antivalence

12.0 Trip: Ready for Switch-on 15.0 Trip: Ready for Switch-on Fault - Ext. fault 4

12.1 Trip: OPO 15.1 Trip: OPO Fault: Operational protection off (OPO)

12.2 Trip: UVO 15.2 Trip: UVO Fault - Undervoltage (UVO)

12.3 Trip: Ext. fault 1 15.3 Trip: Ext. fault 1 Fault - Ext. fault 1

12.4 Trip: Ext. fault 2 15.4 Trip: Ext. fault 2 Fault - Ext. fault 2

12.5 Trip: TPF fault 15.5 Trip: TPF fault Fault - Cold starting (TPF) error

12.6 Trip: Runtime ON 15.6 Trip: Runtime ON Fault - Execution ON command

12.7 Trip: Runtime OFF 15.7 Trip: Runtime OFF Fault - Execution OFF command

13.0 Trip: Parameter fault 0 16.0 Trip: Parameter fault 0 Fault - Parameterization

13.1 Trip: Parameter fault 1 16.1 Trip: Parameter fault 1 -



13.4 Trip: Parameter fault 4 16.4 Trip: Parameter fault 4 Fault - Configuration fault



13.7 Trip: Parameter fault 7 16.7 Trip: Parameter fault 7 Fault - Configuration fault

Byte Bit



Byte Bit


acc. to DP standard


Table 9-3: Diagram of the diagnosis data in the 3UF50 compatibility mode (cont.)



14 - 15

Number of overload trips Number of overload trips

16 - 17

I of the overload trip [%/IE)] Last tripping current

18 - 19

Operating hours [10h] Motor operating hours

Byte Bit



Byte Bit


acc. to DP standard


Table 9-3: Diagram of the diagnosis data in the 3UF50 compatibility mode (cont.)


Standard Functions 10In this chapter

In this chapter you will find information about the standard functions stored as function blocks in SIMOCODE pro. Standard functions are typical motor functions which can be activated according to need and can be set indivi-dually for each motor feeder.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• configurators• programmers of application programs for comprehension purposes.

Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge:• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets• Motor protection• control functions, control stations.


You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:Further function blocks > Standard functions.


Standard Functions

10.1 Introduction

Description

In SIMOCODE pro there are also so-called "standard functions" in the form of function blocks for use according to need. These function blocks can contain:• Plugs )• Sockets ) in the form of a signal• Setting values, e.g. the response when external faults occur ("Signal", "Warn"

or "Switch off").

Schematic

The following schematic shows the general representation of the function block of a standard function:

Figure 10-1: General representation of the function block of a standard function


These function blocks work independently of the selected control function and can be used as optional supplements. They are already available and only have to be activated by connecting the plug(s) of the respective function block. Depending on the device series, the system offers several different function blocks for such standard functions:

SIMOCODE pro

Function block pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)

Test 2 2

Reset 3 3

Test position feedback (TPF) 1 1

External fault 4 6

Operational protection off (OPO) — 1

Power failure monitoring (UVO) — 1

Emergency start 1 1

Watchdog (monitoring PLC/DCS) 1 1

Timestamping — 1

Table 10-1: Function blocks

Plug 1 - n

Plug 1 - n

Plug 1 - n

Standard function

Setting value


Standard Functions

10.2 Test/Reset

Test/reset description

The function of the "test/reset" button is generally dependent on the opera-ting status of the device:• Reset function: When a fault occurs• Test function: In other operating states.

In addition to the TEST/RESET buttons, SIMOCODE pro offers a further option to trip an internal Test/Reset via the "Test" function block. The "Test" function block consists of:• 1 plug.

In total there are:• 2 "Test 1" and "Test 2" function blocks for BU1 and BU2, whereby the function

blocks differ from each other functionally:– Test 1: when testing/switching off the output relays– Test 2: without switching off the output relays (normally for a test via the

bus).

Schematic

The following schematic shows the general representation of the "Test/Reset" function block:

Figure 10-2: "Test/reset" function blocks

Reset 3

Test 1

Test/reset buttons locked

Test 2

Reset 1

Reset 2

"TEST/RESET" BU button

Control functions

"Test/reset" function block

"TEST/RESET" OP button

Test 1

Test 2

Reset 1

Reset 2

Reset 3


Standard Functions

Carrying out the test

The test can be carried out as follows:• Via the "TEST/RESET" button on the basic device and on the operator panel

(can be deactivated) as well as via PC using the SIMOCODE ES software.• Via the plugs of the internal "Test 1" and "Test 2" function blocks

The test function can be terminated at any time - it does not influence the thermal motor model/overload function, i.e. after switching off using Test, it can immediately be switched back again. Switching off only occurs for Test 1 if the operating mode is set to "Remote".

Reset function:

The reset function can be carried out as follows:• Via the "TEST/RESET" button on the basic device and on the operator panel

(can be deactivated) as well as via PC using the SIMOCODE ES software.• Via the "Reset input" plug of the internal function blocks via the plugs of the

internal function blocks "Reset 1", "Reset 2" and "Reset 3".

The "Reset" function block consists of:• 1 plug.

In total there are:– 3 function blocks, "Reset 1 to 3" for BU1 and BU2.All reset inputs (sockets) are equal (OR function).

Test function:

A function test of SIMOCODE pro can also be initialized using the test function.The test function includes the following steps:• Lamp/LED test (test function activated < 2 s)• Testing the device functionality (test function activated 2 to -5 s)• Only for the "Test 1" function block: Switching off the QE (test function activa-

ted > 5 s).


Standard Functions

Test phases

The following table shows the test phases carried out when the "TEST/RESET" button is pressed for the respective period of time:

Test settings

Test phase

Status Without main current With main current

O.K. Fault *) O.K. Fault

Hardware test/lamp test

< 2s

"DEVICE" LED Orange Green Orange Green

"GEN.FAULT" LED

Contactor control Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged

Show QL*

Results of the hardware test/lamp test

2s - 5s

"DEVICE" LED Green Red Green Red

"GEN.FAULT" LED

Contactor control Unchanged Deactivated Unchanged Deactivated

Relay test

> 5s


"GEN.FAULT" LED

Contactor control Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated

LED lit/activated LED flashing LED flickering LED off

*) "Fault" displayed after 2 s

Table 10-2: States of the status LEDs/contactor controls during the test

Test 1 to 2 - Description

Input Activates the "Test" function block using any signal (arbitrary sok-kets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Test/reset button locked

The blue test/reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel are designed for acknowledgement of faults and for carrying out device tests. The buttons can be locked using "Test/reset button locked". They can then be used for other purposes.

Table 10-3: Test settings


Standard Functions

Acknowledgement of faults

The following applies to the acknowledgement of faults:• Faults can only be acknowledged– when the cause of the fault has been eliminated– there is no "ON" control command.• No reset will be carried out when a reset command is issued if the cause of

the fault or an "ON" control command is still present. The reset is saved, depending on the type of fault. The saving of the reset is indicated by the "GEN. FAULT" LED on the basic unit and the control panel. The LEDs change from flashing to a continuous signal.

Automatic acknowledgement of faults

Faults are automatically acknowledged in the following cases:• A reset is saved and the cause of the fault disappears (user previously ack-

nowledged fault)• An overload tripping or thermistor tripping is automatically reset if motor pro-

tection reset = Auto (the acknowledgement occurs automatically after the cooling down time expires). The motor cannot start immediately since a reset cannot occur if an ON command is present.

• If a configured module fails, all associated faults are automatically acknowled-ged. However, a configuration fault is generated (exception: operator panel when parameterized accordingly). This ensures that a module fault does not cause the general fault to be acknowledged automatically.

• If a function or module is deactivated in the device configuration (via parame-terization), all associated faults are acknowledged automatically (the motor cannot start immediately since no parameters can be entered if an ON com-mand is present).

• If a function’s parameter is changed from "Switch off" to "Warn", "Signal" or "Deactivated", all associated faults are automatically acknowledged.

• For an external fault: with its own parameter: "Auto reset".

Reset settings

Reset 1 to 3 - Description

Input Activates the "Reset" function block from any signal (arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Test/reset button locked

The blue test/reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel are designed for acknowledgement of faults and carrying out device tests. The buttons can be locked using "Test/reset button locked". They can then be used for other purposes.

Table 10-4: Reset settings


Standard Functions

10.3 Test Position Feedback (TPF)

Description

You can carry out the "Cold starting" function test using the "test position feedback (TPF)" function. The input (plug) of the function block must be con-nected to the corresponding socket. The active test position is indicated by a flashing QL of the control function.The "Test position feedback (TPF)" function block consists of• 1 plug• 1 "Status - test position" socket

It is set when a signal is issued to the input.• 1 "Fault - test position feedback fault" socket.

It is set when– "TPF" is activated, even if current is flowing in the main circuit– "TPF" is activated, and current is flowing in the main circuit.

In total there is– 1 "Test position feedback" function block for BU1 and BU2.

Note When the test position is enabled, the QLE/QLA sockets of the control function are controlled through blinking to indicate test operation, for example, of the motor feeder via a blinking LED button.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Test position feedback" function block:

Figure 10-3: "Test position feedback" function block

InputFault -Feedback fault test position

Status -Test positionTPF

Type


Standard Functions

Cold starting

If the motor feeder is in the test position, its main circuit is isolated from the network. However, the control voltage is connected. The "Cold starting" function test is carried out in this status. Cold starting is defined as the testing of the motor feeder without current in the main cir-cuit. This function must be enabled via the socket to differentiate this function from normal operation. The feedback that the motor feeder is isolated from the mains voltage can be achieved using an auxiliary contact of the main switch in the motor fee-der which is connected to any device input (terminal). This is then internally connected to the "Test position feedback (TPF)" plug of the function block. When using current/voltage measuring modules, this type of auxiliary con-tact is no longer needed. The "RMT" function module can be enabled by monitoring for undervoltage ("Voltage monitoring"). Following this, the contactor outputs can be set via the control stations (see chapter 4"Motor Control"), which enables the current-free status to be tested. If current falsely flows during the test operation, the contactor outputs are switched off with the message "Fault - Test position feedback fault".

"Fault - Test position feedback (TPF)" fault message and acknowledgement

Attention "Fault - Test position feedback (TPF)" is generated when: • "TPF" is activated, even if current is flowing in the motor feeder • "TPF" is activated, and current is flowing in the motor feeder

Acknowledge with "Reset".

Settings

Test position

feedback (TPF)

Description

Input Controls the "Test position feedback (TPF)" function block using any signal (arbitrary sockets , e.g. device input)

Type Specifies the input logic• NO contact (1-active)• NC contact (0-active)

Table 10-5: Test position feedback (TPF) settings


Standard Functions

10.4 External Fault

Description

The "External faults 1-6" function blocks can optionally be used to monitor any statuses and/or external devices and to create fault messages. In order to do this, the inputs (plugs) of the "External fault" function blocks must be connected to any sockets (e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.). External faults can also be "labeled" in SIMOCODE pro. This makes it easier to allocate them to the actual malfunction. Example: monitoring the rotational speed of the motor using an external rotational-speed monitor. The "External fault" function block consists of• 2 plugs (1 plug for setting, 1 plug for resetting)• 1 "Event - external fault" socket. It is set when a signal is issued to the input.

In total there are:– 4 "External faults 1 to 4" function blocks for BU1– 6 "External faults 1 to 6" function blocks for BU2.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "External fault" function blocks:

Figure 10-4: "External fault" function blocks

Event -Input

Type

Reset

External fault 1

Type

Activity

Response

Reset

(Marking)

Ext. fault 1Event -

InputType

Reset

External fault 2

Type

Activity

Response

Reset

(Marking)

Ext. fault 2

Event -Input

Type

Reset

External fault 3

Type

Activity

Response

Reset

(Marking)

Ext. fault 3Event -

InputType

Reset

External fault 4

Type

Activity

Response

Reset

(Marking)

Ext. fault 4

Event -Input

Type

Reset

External fault 5

Type

Activity

Response

Reset

(Marking)

Ext. fault 5Event -

InputType

Reset

External fault 6

Type

Activity

Response

Reset

(Marking)

Ext. fault 6


Standard Functions

Special reset options:

A reset input is also available in addition to the other reset options (remote reset, test/reset button, OFF command reset). Furthermore, auto reset can also be activated. See below.

Settings

"External fault" response

Table 10-7: "External fault" response

External fault 1 to 6 -

Description

Input Activates the "External fault" function block using the monitored signal (arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Type Specifies the input logic:• NO contact (1-active)• NC contact (0-active)

Activity Specifies in which motor operating state the external fault should be evaluated:• Always:

Always evaluate, regardless of whether the motor is running or stationary.

• only when the motor is ON: Evaluation only when the motor is switched ON.

Response Specifies the response to an external fault when activated via the input (see the following table and the chapter "Important Notes").

Reset Acknowledges the "External fault" fault using any signal (arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Reset also by Specifying further (common) acknowledgement possibilities using additional reset types:• Test/Reset Buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel (panel

reset)• Remote Reset: Acknowledgement via Reset 1-3, DPV1, "Reset"

command• Auto-Reset: Fault resets itself after the cause of the fault has

been eliminated (after removal of the activation signal)• Off Command-Reset: "OFF" control command resets the fault.

Marking No parameters. Optional markIng to designate the signal, e.g. "Rotational speed >", e.g. using SIMOCODE ES. Range: Up to a maximum of 10 characters.

Table 10-6: External fault settings

Response External fault

Tripping X

Warning X

Signalling X (d)

Disabled -


Standard Functions

10.5 Operational Protection OFF (OPO)

10.5.1 Response for positioner control function

Description

The "Operational protection off (OPO)" function block puts the positioner into the safe mode. In order to do this, the input (plug) must be connected to the corresponding socket (e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.). The "Operational protection off" function block consists of• 1 plug• 1 "Status - OPO" socket. It is set when a signal is issued to the input.• 1 "Fault - OPO fault" socket. It is set when the corresponding safe end posi-

tion is reached.

In total there is:– 1 "Operational protection off (OPO)" function block for BU2.

The following table shows the main functionality:

Table 10-8: Main functionality of Operational protection off (OPO) for "positioner" control function

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Operational protection off (OPO)" function block:

Figure 10-5: "Operational protection off (OPO)" function block

OPO Initial position when OPO occurs

Positioner is

open

Positioner

opens

Positioner

stopped/OFF

Positioner

closes

Positioner is

closed

Reaction to OPO

Parameterized "Positioner closed" response

Fault Reset: with close command Closes



-

Closes

-

Parameterized "Positioner open" response

- -

Opens

Fault Reset: with open command

Opens


Opens


Opens

Input

Fault -Operational protection off (OPO)

Status -Operational protection off (OPO)

Positioner response

Type

Operational protection off (OPO)


Standard Functions

Settings

Safety instructions

Note No "Fault - Operational protection off (OPO)" fault message is created when the "OPO" command tries to move the positioner to the end position which it is already in or to the position towards which it is already heading.

Note No other control command (counter command or stop command) is carried out while "Operational protection off (OPO)" is active.

Note The "Fault - Operation protection off (OPO)" fault message must be acknow-ledged using the open or close control command, depending on the present end position reached via "OPO".

Note The acknowledgement is carried out even if the desired end position has not yet been reached.

Note The fault message is available as diagnosis via the PROFIBUS DP.

Operational

protection off

(OPO)

Description

Input Activates the "Operational protection off" function block using the monitored signal (arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, etc.)

Positioner response

Specifies the response for the "positioner" control function when activated via the input:• CLOSE: Positioner moves to the "Closed" end position• OPEN: Positioner moves to the "Open" end position.

Type Specifies the input logic• NO contact (1-active)• NC contact (0-active)

Table 10-9: Operational protection off settings


Standard Functions

10.5.2 Response to other control functions

Description

For other control functions, the following scenarios can be differentiated if OPO is used:• The motor is running: The motor switches off with a "Fault - Operational pro-

tection off (OPO)" fault.• The motor is off. Initially no fault. The "Fault - Operational protection off

(OPO)" fault only occurs when the "ON command" is issued.


Standard Functions

10.6 Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)

Description

The "Power failure monitoring (UVO)" is enabled via the plug. This is carried out via an external voltage relay which is connected to the function block via the binary inputs of SIMOCODE pro. Process (see process diagram below).1) All contactors (QE) are immediately deactivated after the monitoring relay/

activation of the input (UVO) have been addressed.

2) The motor switches back into its previous status if the voltage returns within the "Power failure time". This can either take place immediately or can be additionally delayed (restart delay).

3) If the "Power failure time" expires before the voltage returns, the device signals a fault (UVO fault).

Condition: The SIMOCODE pro control voltage is buffered and is not inter-rupted.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Power failure monitoring (UVO)" function block:

Figure 10-6: Schematic of the "Power failure monitoring (UVO)" function block

Figure 10-7: Power failure monitoring (UVO) process diagram

Input*

Fault -Power failure monitoring (UVO)

UVO

Type

Power failure time*ActivationExternal power failure monitoringRestart delay

QE

t

Power failuretime

UVO

t

Fault

t

Fault

1)

2)

3)

Power failuretime


Standard Functions

Settings

Power failure

monitoring (UVO)

Description

Input Activates the "Power failure monitoring" function block using the monitored signal (arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Type Specifies the type of power failure monitoring:• Deactivated• Service supply is not interrupted.

The control voltage from SIMOCODE pro remains constant. The interruption of the mains voltage must be measured by a separate voltage relay (for example).

Power failure time The time at which the power failure starts.If the mains voltage returns within the power failure time period, all the drives that were connected before the power failure are auto-matically reconnected. If the mains voltage does not return within this time period, the drives remain disconnected and the "Fault - Power failure UVO" fault message is generated. The fault message can be acknowledged using "Reset" once the mains voltage returns. Range: 0 to 25.5 seconds

Restart delay (stag-gered)

The restart delay can be set so that not all motors restart at the same time (mains voltage would otherwise collapse again). Range: 0 to 255 seconds

Table 10-10: Power failure monitoring settings


Standard Functions

10.7 Emergency start

Description

The emergency start deletes the thermal memory from SIMOCODE pro each time it is activated. This enables the motor to restart immediately after an overload tripping. This function can be used to:– Enable a reset and start up the motor again immediately after an overload

switch-off– delete the thermal memory (motor model) during operation if required.

Caution If emergency starts are carried out too frequently, this could lead to thermal overloading of the motor!

Since the emergency start is edge-triggered, it is not possible for this function to continuously affect the thermal motor model. The emergency start is carried out as follows:• Via the plug of the function block. In order to do this, the input (plug) of the

function block must be connected to any socket (e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.).

The "Emergency start" function block consists of:• 1 plug• 1 "Status - emergency start carried out" socket. It is set when the emergency

start is carried out.

In total there is:– 1 "Emergency start" function block for BU1 and BU2.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Emergency start" function block:

Figure 10-8: "Emergency start" function block

Settings

Emergency start Description

Input Activates the "Emergency start" function block using any signal (arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Table 10-11: Emergency start settings

Input

Status -Emergency startEmergency startcarried out 1)

1) The "Emergency start carried out" signal is triggered by the edge (input) and reset when current flows again.


Standard Functions

10.8 Watchdog (Bus Monitoring, PLC/DCS Monitoring)

Description

The "Watchdog" function block monitors both the communication with the PLC using PROFIBUS DP as well as the operating state of the PLC in the "Remote" operating mode.

Schematic

Bus monitoring:

With this type of monitoring, the "Fault - Bus" fault is generated if• "Bus monitoring" is active• The cyclic data transfer between the PLC and SIMOCODE pro is interrupted,

e.g. by an interruption to the PROFIBUS DP connection when in the "Remote" operating mode (mode selector S1=1 and S2=1).

• The "Status - Bus O.K." can always be evaluated. If the SIMOCODE pro is cyclically exchanging data with the PLC, the "Status - Bus O.K." is set to "1".

PLC/DCS monitoring:

With this type of monitoring, "Fault - PLC/DCS" is generated if• "PLC/DCS monitoring" is activated.• The PROFIBUS DP switches to the "CLEAR" status when in the "Remote"

operating mode (mode selector S1=1 and S2=1). • The "Status - PLC/DCS in Run" can always be evaluated. If the PROFIBUS DP

is in the "CLEAR" status, the "Status - PLC/DCS in Run" is set to "0".

If the "PLC/DCS monitoring - input" is connected by default to the "Cyclic receive - Bit 0.7" bit, the status of the PLC is deduced from this bit alone.

Figure 10-9: "Watchdog (monitoring PLC/DCS)" function block

PLC/DCS monitoring - inputFault - PLC/DCS

Watchdog (Bus monit.) PLC/DCS

Bus/PLC fault - reset

Bus monitoringCyclic communication Status - PLC/DCS in Run

(level sensitive)

PLC/DCS monitoring

Status - Bus O.K. (bus is active)

Fault - bus

Bus response


Standard Functions

Settings

"Bus fault"/"PLC/DCS fault" response

Table 10-13: "Bus fault"/"PLC/DCS fault" response

Watchdog - Description

PLC/DCS monito-ring - input

Activates the "Watchdog" function block using the monitored signal (arbitrary sockets , e.g. control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Bus monitoring • Activated: If a bus fault occurs, the "Fault - Bus" fault message is generated, which must be acknowledged

• Deactivated: No fault message

PLC/DCS monitoring

• Activated: If an SPS fault occurs, the "Fault - PLC/DCS" fault message is generated, which must be acknowledged

• Deactivated: No fault message

Bus/PLC fault - reset

You can select whether the faults are to be acknowledged automa-tically or manually. Range: Manual/automatic

Table 10-12: Watchdog settings

Response Bus fault PLC/DCS fault

Tripping X X

Warning - -

Signalling - -

Disabled X (d) X (d)


Standard Functions

10.9 Timestamping

10.9.1 Timestamping in the fault memory

The timestamping in the fault memory is based on the operating hours (resolution: 1 s) of SIMOCODE pro. The "Error/Fault" and "Mains on" events are recorded. Each of these events is annotated with a timestamp.• Error/Fault:

The last 21 faults are stored in a ring buffer. The fault that occurs (rising edge) is always recorded. A fault that is disappearing (falling edge) is not recorded.

• Mains on: If the most recent entry was "Mains on", this is not recorded multiple times. Instead, the fault number is used as a mains-on counter. This means that the fault memory cannot be deleted by frequent ON/OFF operations.

Entry 1 is the most recent entry and entry 21 the oldest.The data is displayed using the "SIMOCODE ES" software.

Example:

Figure 10-10: Example of event recording using the "SIMOCODE ES" software

Screenshot


Standard Functions

Schematic

The standard function "Timestamping" consists of• 8 sockets "Timestamping - input 0 to input 7".

In total there is:• 1 "Timestamp" function block for BU2.

Figure 10-11: "Timestamp" function block

Settings

You can activate/deactivate the timestamping function via the "Timestam-ping active" checkbox.

10.9.2 Timestamping/time synchronization via PROFIBUS

See chapter 12.8 "Timestamping".

Input 0

Input 2

Input 6

Input 4

Input 1

Input 3

Input 7

Input 5

Timestamp

Timestamping active Signal - timestamp function active+O.K.


Logic Modules 11In this chapter

In this chapter you will find information about the logic modules of SIMOCODE pro. Logic modules are function blocks which are modeled not only on standard logic functions, e.g. truth tables (AND, OR,...), but also on counters and timers. In addition to the predefined control functions, you can use this, for example, to implement logical functions, time relay functions and counter functions without being dependent on external components (relays).

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• configurators• programmers.

Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge:• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets• basics of digital signal processing, e.g. timer, counter etc.


You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:Further function blocks > Logic modules.


Logic Modules

11.1 Introduction

Description

Freely programmable logic modules are function blocks that process input signals and provide binary or analog output signals according to their inter-nal logic components. Logic modules can contain:• plugs• an internal logic component• sockets )• settings, e.g. the time for a timer.

Schematic

The following schematic shows a general representation of a logic module:

Figure 11-1: General representation of a logic module


If you need any other additional functions for your application, you can use the logic modules. These can be used, for example, to implement logical functions, time relay functions and counter functions. Depending on the device series, the system provides several logic modules:

SIMOCODE pro

Logic module pro C

BU1

Number

pro V

BU2

Number

Truth tables for 3 inputs/1 output 3 6

Truth tables for 2 inputs/1 output — 2

Truth tables for 5 inputs/2 outputs — 1

Timers 2 4

Counters 2 4

Signal conditioners 2 4

Non-volatile elements 2 4

Flashing 3 3

Flickering 3 3

Limit monitor — 4

Table 11-1: Logic modules which can be programmed freely

Logic modulePlug 1

Plug n

Plug 1 - n(Logic component)

Setting value


Logic Modules

11.2 Truth Table for 3I/1O

Description

The truth table for 3I/1O contains• 3 plugs• 1 logic component• 1 socket.

You can choose among 8 possible input conditions with which you want to create an output signal.

In total there are:– 3 truth tables 1 to 3 for BU1– 6 truth tables 1 to 6 for BU2

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Truth table for 3I/1O" logic modules:

Figure 11-2: "Truth table for 3I/1O" logic modules

Truth table 1 for 3I/1OInput 1

Input 2

Input 3

Output


Input 2

Input 3

Output


Input 2

Input 3

Output


Input 2

Input 3

Output


Input 2

Input 3

Output


Input 2

Input 3

Output


Logic Modules

Example

You want to implement the following circuit:

Figure 11-3: Example of a truth table

Truth table, input conditions colored in gray:

S1=Input 1

S2=Input 2

S3=Input 3

K1=Output

0 0 0 0

0 0 1 0

0 1 0 0

0 1 1 1

1 0 0 0

1 0 1 1

1 1 0 0

1 1 1 1

S1 S2

S3

K1

Circuit:

K1 switches with:(S1 or S2) and S3orS1 and S2 and S3


Logic Modules

Switching and parameterizing

Figure 11-4: Example circuit and parameterization for truth table 3E/1A

Settings

Truth tables 1-6 for

3I/1O -

Description

Input 1 to 3 Activate the truth table with any signal (arbitrary sockets e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Table 11-2: Settings for truth table for 3I/1O

S2

S3

S1

Circuit:

1

2 Out1

3


Input 2

Input 3

Output

1

2

3

4

L1N

BU

Connecting inputs, i.e.connecting the plugs with the sockets

Setting of bitsParameterization with SIMOCODE ES

for output signals

K1

BU - inputs BU - outputs


Logic Modules


Description

The truth table for 2I/1O contains• 2 plugs• 1 logic component• 1 socket.

You can choose between 4 possible input conditions with which you want to create an output signal.

In total there are:– 2 truth tables 7 to 8 for BU2

Schematic



Example

You want to implement the following circuit:

Figure 11-6: Example of truth table for 2I/1O


Input 2

OutputTruth table 8 for 2I/1O

Input 1

Input 2

Output

Truth table, input conditions colored in gray:

S1=Input 1

S2=Input 2

K1=Output

0 0 0

0 1 1

1 0 1

1 1 1

S1 S2

K1

Circuit:

K1 switches with:S1 or S2


Logic Modules


Description

The truth table for 5I/2O contains• 5 plugs• 1 logic component• 2 sockets.

You can choose between 32 possible input conditions with which you want to create up to 2 output signals.

In total there is:– 1 truth table 9 for BU2.

Schematic



Settings

Truth table 9 for 5I/2O -

Description

Input 1 to 5 Activation by any signal (arbitrary sockets e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Table 11-3: Settings for truth table for 5I/2O

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Output 1

Input 4

Input 5

Output 2

Truth table 9 for 5I/2O


Logic Modules

11.5 Counters

Description

Counters are integrated in the SIMOCODE pro system. These are activated via the plugs "+2" or "-". The counter output switches to "1" when the preset limit is reached. The counter is reset with "Reset". The actual value is available as a socket for further processing and can also be transmitted to the automation system.• Plug +: increases actual value by 1 (maximum: limit value)• Plug –:decreases actual value by 1 (minimum: 0)• Reset: resets the actual value to 0.

The counter contains• 3 plugs (input +, input – and reset)• 1 logic component• 1 socket.• 1 "actual value" analog socket with the current value in the range between

0 up to the limit value. It remains constant in the case of a voltage failure.

In total there are:• 2 counters 1 to 2 for BU1• 4 counters 1 to 4 for BU2.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Counters" logic modules:

Figure 11-8: "Counters" logic modules

Counter 1Input +

Input –

Reset

OutputCounter 2

Input +

Input –

Reset

Output

Limit value Limit value

Counter 3Input +

Input –

Reset

OutputCounter 4

Input +

Input –

Reset

Output

Limit value Limit value

Actual value Actual value



Logic Modules

Safety instructions

Note The time between the events to be counted depends on - the input delay - the device cycle time-.

Note The actual value remains the same - during parameterization or failure of the supply voltage - if there are simultaneous input signals at input + and input -.

Note The output is always 0 following a reset.

Settings

Counters 1 to 4 - Description

Input + Increases the actual value by 1.Activation by any signal (arbitrary sockets e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Input – Decreases the actual value by 1.Activation by any signal (arbitrary sockets e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Reset Resets the counter to 0 (count value and output)Activation by any signal (arbitrary sockets e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Limit value The maximum value that can be reached when counting and where the counter provides an output signal.Range: 0 - 65535

Table 11-4: Counter settings


Logic Modules

11.6 Timer

Description

The timer contains• 2 plugs (input and reset)• 1 socket.• 1 "Actual value" analog socket with the actual value.

The actual value is available as a socket for further processing and can also be transmitted to the automation system.

If there is an input signal, the timer can provide an output signal according to the chosen timer type:• With closing delay• With closing delay with memory• With OFF delay• With fleeting closing.

In total there are:– 2 timers 1 to 2 for BU1– 4 timers 1 to 4 for BU2

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Timer" logic modules:

Figure 11-9: "Timer" logic modules


Timer 1Input

Reset

Output

Value

Type

Timer 2Input

Reset

Output

Value

Type

Timer 3Input

Reset

Output

Value

Type

Timer 4Input

Reset

Output

Value

Type


Actual valueActual value


Logic Modules

Output response

Figure 11-10: Output response of the timer

With closing delay:

Input

Reset

Time

Output

With closing delay with memory:

Input

Reset

Time

Output

With OFF delay:

With fleeting closing:

t t

t tt

Input

Reset

Time

Outputt tt

Input

Reset

Time

Outputt


Logic Modules

Settings

Timers 1 to 4 - Description

Input Activation by any signal (arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Reset Resets the actual value to 0.Activation by any signal (arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Type Different output responsesRange: Closing delay, closing delay with memory Closing delay, with fleeting closing

Value Time during which the timer provides an output signal when activa-ted, depending on the output response (type).Range: 0 to 65535, unit 100 ms

Table 11-5: Timer settings


Logic Modules

11.7 Signal Conditioner

Description

If there is an input signal, the signal conditioner can provide an output signal according to the chosen timer type:• Not inverting• Inverting• Edge rising with memory• Edge falling with memory.

You can set the output response.The signal conditioner contains• 2 plugs (input and reset)• 1 logic component• 1 socket.

In total there are:– 2 signal conditioners for BU1 (signal conditioners 1 to 2)– 4 signal conditioners for BU2 (signal conditioners 1 to 4).

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Signal conditioner" logic modules:

Figure 11-11: "Signal conditioner" logic modules


Signal conditioner 1Input

Reset

Output

Type


Reset

Output

Type


Reset

Output

Type


Reset

Output

Type


Logic Modules

Types of signals/output responses

Figure 11-12: Types of signals/output responses of the signal conditioners

Level inverted

Edge rising with memory

Edge falling with memory

Input

Output

Reset

Input

Output

Reset

Input

Output

Reset

Level not inverted

Input

Output

Reset


Logic Modules

NOR function

You can implement a NOR function with the "level inverted" type of signal:

Table 11-6: NOR function

Settings

Input Reset Output Schematic

0 0 1

1 0 0

0 1 0

1 1 0

Signal

conditioners 1 to 4 -

Description

Input Activation by any signal (arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Reset Resets the signal conditioner to 0.Activation by any signal (arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Type Different output responsesRange: Level not inverted, level inverted, Edge rising with memory, edge falling with memory

Table 11-7: Signal conditioner settings

Input

ResetOutput

>= 1


Logic Modules

11.8 Non-volatile Elements

Description

Non-volatile elements behave like signal conditioners. The output signals remain after failure of the supply voltage.If there is an input signal, the signal conditioner can provide an output signal according to the type of signal conditioner chosen:• Not inverting• Inverting• Edge rising with memory• Edge falling with memory.

You can set the output response.The non-volatile element contains• 2 plugs (input and reset)• 1 logic component• 1 socket.

In total there are:– 2 non-volatile elements1 to 2 for BU1– 4 non-volatile elements1 to 4 for BU2.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Non-volatile elements" logic modules:

Figure 11-13: "Non-volatile elements" logic modules


Non-vol. elem. 1Input

Reset

Output

Type


Reset

Output

Type


Reset

Output

Type


Reset

Output

Type


Logic Modules

Types of signals/output responses

Figure 11-14: Signal types/output responses of non-volatile elements

Level inverted

Edge rising with memory

Edge falling with memory

Input

Output

Reset

Input

Output

Reset

Input

Output

Reset

Level not inverted

Input

Output

Reset

Voltage failure,

Voltage failure,


Logic Modules

NOR function

You can implement a NOR function with the "level inverted" type of signal:

Table 11-8: NOR function

Settings

Input Reset Output Schematic

0 0 1

1 0 0

0 1 0

1 1 0

Non-volatile

elements 1 to 4 -

Description

Input Activation by any signal (arbitrary sockets e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Reset Resets the signal conditioner to 0.Activation by any signal (arbitrary sockets e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Type Different output responsesRange: Level not inverted, level inverted, Edge rising with memory, edge falling with memory

Table 11-9: Non-volatile elements settings

Input

ResetOutput

>= 1


Logic Modules

11.9 Flashing

Description

If there is an input signal at its plug, the "Flashing" function block provides a signal at its socket, which alternates between binary 0 and 1 with a fixed frequency of 1 Hz. You can use this to make the LEDs on the operator panel flash. The logic module consists of• 1 plug• 1 logic component• 1 socket.

In total there are:– 3 "Flashing 1 to 3" logic blocks for BU1 and BU2.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Flashing" logic modules:

Figure 11-15: "Flashing" logic modules

Settings

Flashing 1 to 3 - Description

Input Activation by any signal (arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, signals, status, etc.)

Table 11-10: Flashing settings

Flashing 1

Input OutputFlashing 2

Input Output

Flashing 3

Input Output


Logic Modules

11.10 Flickering

Description

With the "flickering" function blocks, you can e.g. assign the "flickering" function to the operator panel LEDs. If there is an input signal, the "Flickering" function block provides an output signal with a frequency of 4 Hz.The function block contains• 1 plug• 1 logic component• 1 socket.

In total there are:– 3 "Flickering 1 to 3" logic blocks for BU1 and BU2.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Flickering" logic modules:

Figure 11-16: "Flickering" logic modules

Settings

Flickering 1 to 3 - Description

Input Activation by any signal (arbitrary sockets , e.g. signals, etc.)

Table 11-11: Flickering settings

Flickering 1

Input OutputFlickering 2

Input Output

Flickering 3

Input Output


Logic Modules

11.11 Limit Monitor

Description

Any analog values (2 bytes/1 word) can be monitored for limiting overshoo-ting or undershooting. The limit monitor issues the "Limit value" signal to its socket. In addition, limit monitors can be "labeled" according to their function. Example: Monitoring the individual sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module (Temperature 1 - 3) for overtemperature.The limit monitor consists of• 1 analog plug• 1 logic component• 1 socket.

In total there are:– 4 limit monitors 1 to 4 for BU2.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Limit monitor" logic modules:

Figure 11-17: "Limit monitor" logic modules

Response

Table 11-12: Response of the limit values

See also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important Notes".

Response Limit values 1 to 4

Tripping -

Warning -

Signalling X (d)

Disabled -

Delay 0 - 25.5 s

Limit monitor 1

Event -Type

Limit value

Activity

(Marking)

Limit value 1Event -Limit value 2

Limit monitor 3

Event -Type

Limit value

Activity

Limit value 3

Limit monitor 4

Event -Type

Limit value

Activitiy

Limit value 4

Response

(Marking)

Response

(Marking)

Response

Input Input

Input Input

Limit monitor 2

Type

Limit value

Activity

(Marking)

Response


Logic Modules

Functional principle

The limit value signal issued depends on• the operating state of the motor• the TPF function• the parametrized "activity":– ON– On+– Run– Run+.

The following display shows a flow chart with the different "activity" parame-ters.

Figure 11-18: Functional principle of the limit monitor

OFF Start Motor is running OFF

"ON"

"On+"

"Run"

"Run+"

Class-time

Not with TPF 1)

Not with TPF 1)

Not with TPF 1)

Time

Activity

TPF: There is test position feedback, the motor feeder is in the test posi-tion, i.e. its main circuit is isolated from the network. However, the con-trol voltage is connected.

1)


Logic Modules

Settings

Limit monitor - Description

Input Analog plug of the limit monitor to be connected with the analog value (2 bytes) which is to be monitored, e.g. maximum current Imax, remaining cooling time, actual value of timers, etc.).

Type Specifies if the limit value has to be monitored for overshooting or undershooting.

Activity Determines in which motor operating state the limit monitor is to be evaluated:• on, i.e. always evaluate, independent of whether the motor is run-

ning or not (default)• on+, i.e. always evaluate, independent of whether the motor is

running or not Exception: 'TPF', i.e. motor feeder is in test position.

• run, i.e., evaluate only if the motor is in the ON state (TPF)• run+, i.e. evaluate only if the motor is running and the start-up

procedure is finished (i.e. the "Start active" message is not issued) and there is no test position feedback (TPF); Example: Monitoring the power factor.

Limit value Monitor response value. The return value is always determined by the "Limit monitor - delay" parameter. Range: 0 - 65535.

Delay Specifies the time period for which the limit value must be con-stantly exceeded before the "Signal - limit" output is set. Range: 0 - 25.5 s

(Marking) No parameters. Optional marking to designate the signal, e.g. "0/4-20>"; Range: Up to a maximum of 10 characters.

Table 11-13: Limit monitor settings


Logic Modules


Communication 12In this chapter

In this chapter you will find information about the possibilities of SIMO-CODE pro communication, e.g. with a PLC. The presetting of the control, signaling and diagnostic data is sufficient for almost all applications so that the parameterization only has to be changed to a small extent. Otherwise, you can adapt the settings of the individual bits specifically for your applica-tion.

Target groups


Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge:• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets• knowledge about PROFIBUS DP.


You will find the following dialogs in SIMOCODE ES:Device parameters > Bus parameters

Further function blocks > Outputs > Acyclic signaling data Further function blocks >Outputs > Cyclic signaling data


Communication

12.1 Definitions

PROFIBUS DP

PROFIBUS bus system with the DP protocol. DP stands for decentralized periphery. The main task of PROFIBUS DP is fast cyclic data exchange bet-ween the central DP master and the periphery devices.

PROFIBUS DPV1

PROFIBUS DPV1 is an extension of the DP protocol. With this, acyclic data exchange of parameter, diagnostic, control and test data is also possible.

DP master

A master is designated as a DP master if it works with the DP protocol according to the EN 50 170 standard, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.

Class 1 master

A class 1 master is an active station on the PROFIBUS DP. The cyclic data exchange with other stations is characteristic for this type of master. Typical class 1 masters are, for example, PLCs with a PROFIBUS DP connection.

Class 2 master

A class 2 master is an optional station on the PROFIBUS DP. Typical class 2 masters are, for example,• PC/programing devices with the SIMOCODE-ES professional software• SIMATIC PDM (PCS7)• PC with SIMATIC powercontrol software (power management).

DPV1 slave

A slave is designated as a DPV1 slave if it is operated on the PROFIBUS bus with the PROFIBUS DP protocol and works according to the EN 50 170 stan-dard, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.

GSD (device data)

Device data (GSD) include DP slave descriptions in a uniform format. Using GSD (device data) makes it easier to parameterize the DP slave in a DP master system.

OM SIMOCODE pro

OM SIMOCODE pro (object manager) is used instead of GSD (device data) to integrate SIMOCODE pro into STEP7. OM SIMOCODE pro enables the use of SIMOCODE ES Professional (if it is installed) for parameterizing within STEP7.

SIMATIC PDM

Software package for the configuration, parameterization, commissioning and maintenance of devices (e.g. transducers, controllers, SIMOCODE) and


Communication

for configuring networks and PCs.

SIMOCODE pro S7 slave

SIMOCODE pro S7 slave is a slave which is fully integrated into Step7. It is connected via OM SIMOCODE pro. It supports the S7 model (diagnostic alarms, process alarms)

Writing data

Writing data means that data is transmitted to the SIMOCODE pro system.

Reading data

Reading data means that data is transmitted from the SIMOCODE pro system.


Communication

12.2 Transmitting Data

Options for data transfer

The following figure shows the options for data transfer:

Figure 12-1: Options for data transfer

Communication principle

The following figure shows the communication principle in which different data is transmitted depending on the master and slave modes of operation:

Figure 12-2: Communication principle

Data transfer to class 1 master, depending on the slave mode of operation: (table below, "Slave modes of operation")

PROFIBUS DPV1 standard extension: Parameterization, diagnostics, controlling, signaling, testing via PROFIBUS DPV1

PC/PD e.g. with SIMOCODE ES SmartParameterizing, diagnostics, controlling, signaling, testing via system interface

Maximum of 2 class 2 masters possible

Class 1 master

SIMATIC S7 with PROFIBUS DP communication processorClass 2 master

PC or programming device with SIMOCODE ES Professional

PLC

3UF7

PLC-CPU

Communication processor

Cyclic signalling dataCyclic control data

Configuration

cyclic I/O acyclic

GSD

Parameters

Start-upparameterblock

acyclic

DPV1

Master Class 1

acyclic

PC or DCSe.g. SIMOCODE ESProfessional

Master Class 2 (Max. 2)

SIMOCODE pro

Diagnostics Alarms

DPV0

DPV1

Data records Data records

PLC-CPU

Communication processor

Cyclic signalling dataCyclic control data

Configuration

cyclic I/O acyclic

GSD

ParametersParameters

Start-upparameterblock

acyclic

DPV1

Master Class 1

acyclic

PC or DCSe.g. SIMOCODE ESProfessional

Master Class 2 (Max. 2)

SIMOCODE pro

Diagnostics Alarms

DPV0

DiagnosticsDiagnostics AlarmsAlarms

DPV0

DPV1

Data recordsData recordsData records Data recordsData recordsData records


Communication

12.3 Telegram Description and Data Access

12.3.1 Cyclic Data

The cyclic data is exchanged once every DP cycle between the PROFIBUS DP master and DP slave. The PROFIBUS DP master module then sends the control data to SIMOCODE pro. In response, SIMOCODE pro sends the signaling data to the master module. Access to the cyclic data is via the inputs (signaling data) and outputs (con-trol data) in the program of the PLC.The length of the cyclic data which is to be transmitted is already set when SIMOCODE pro is integrated into the DP master system. This is achieved by selecting the basic type which determines the structure and the length of the cyclic data. The following basic types are available:• Cyclic data from the PROFIBUS DP master to SIMOCODE pro:

Table 12-1: Cyclic data from the PROFIBUS DP master to SIMOCODE pro

• Cyclic data from SIMOCODE pro to the PROFIBUS DP master:

Table 12-2: Cyclic data from SIMOCODE pro to the PROFIBUS DP master

The cyclic data contents (digital/analog information) is set by parameteriza-tion, e.g. with the "SIMOCODE ES" software. The cyclic I/O data is already preset when the type of application (control functions) is selected when the "SIMOCODE ES" parameterization software is selected (see chapter B.20 "Assignment of Cyclic Control and Signaling Data for Predefined Control Functions").

Specification Length Specification Information

Basic type 1 4 bytes of control data Cyclic receive - Bit 0.0 to 1.7

BU2Cyclic receive - analog value

Basic type 2 2 bytes of control data Cyclic receive - Bit 0.0 to 1.7

BU1/BU2

Specification Length Specification Information

Basic type 1 10 bytes of signaling data Cyclic Send Bit 0.0 to 1.7

BU2Cyclic Send - analog inputs 1 to 4

Basic type 2 4 bytes of signaling data Cyclic Send - Bit 0.0 to 1.7

BU1/BU2Cyclic Send - analog input 1


Communication

12.3.2 Diagnostic Data and Alarms

The diagnostic data contains important information about the status of SIMOCODE pro. This simplifies troubleshooting. In contrast to the cyclic data, the diagnostic data is only transmitted to the master module if it changes. PROFIBUS DP differentiates between:• Standard diagnostics• Status messages• Channel-related diagnostics• Process and diagnostic alarms according to DPV1.

Configuration of the diagnostic response

For SIMOCODE pro, you can set which diagnostic events are to trigger the transmission of diagnostic data or the alarms to the PLC:• Diagnostics for device errors, e.g. parameterization errors, hardware faults• Diagnostics for process faults:

Diagnostic data or alarms are transmitted to the PLC for all events in Table B-8: Data record 92 - Diagnostics which are marked in the "DP Diagnostics" column with an "F"

• Diagnostics for process warnings: Diagnostic data or alarms are transmitted to the PLC for all events in Table B-8: Data record 92 - Diagnostics which are marked in the "DP Diagnostics" column with a "W"

• Diagnostics for process messages: Diagnostic data or alarms are transmitted to the PLC for all events in Table B-8: Data record 92 - Diagnostics which are marked in the "DP Diagnostics" column with a "M".

Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES

Set the response in the "Device parameters > Bus parameters > Diagno-stics" dialog.


Communication

12.3.3 Configuration of the Slave Diagnostics

Figure 12-3: Configuration of the slave diagnostics

The maximum length of the diagnostic telegram is 62 bytes.

...

Station status 1 to 3

Master PROFIBUS address

High byteLow byte Manufacturer's ID

Identification-related diagnostics

Status messages

Channel-related diagnostics(dynamic, n = 0; 3; 6)

Byte 0

Byte 1

Byte 2

Byte 3

Byte 4

Byte 5

Byte 8

Byte 27

Byte 28

Byte 29

Byte 30

Byte 6

Byte 7

Standarddiagnostics

Channel-related diagnostics(dynamic, n = 0; 3; 6)

Byte 31

Byte 32

Byte 33

Byte 28+n

Byte 48+n

Diagnostic alarm (temporary)Byte 28+n

Byte 48+n

...

...

Diagnostic alarm (temporary)

Extendeddiagnostics


Communication

Station status - definition

The station status provides an overview of the state of a DP slave.

Station status 1

Table 12-3: Configuration of station status 1 (byte 0)

Bit Meaning Cause/corrective measures

0 The DP slave cannont be addressed by the DP master.

Check the following:• Is the correct PROFIBUS address set on

the DP slave?• Is the bus connection plug plugged in?• Is the DP slave supplied with power?• Is the RS-485 repeater configured cor-

rectly?

1 The DP slave is not yet ready for the data transfer.

The DP slave is just starting up. Wait until the start-up is completed.

2 The configuration data sent from the DP master to the DP slave does not correspond to the configuration of the DP slave.

Check whether the correct station type or the correct configuation of the DP slave has been entered in the configuration software.

3 There are external diagnostics pre-sent (general diagnostic display).

Evaluate the identification-related diagno-stics, the status messages and/or the chan-nel-related diagnostics. As soon as all errors are rectified, bit 3 is reset. The bit is reset if there is a new dia-gnostic message in the bytes of the above-mentioned diagnostics.

4 The required function cannot inter-pret the response of the DP slave

Check the configuration.

5 The DP master cannot interpret the response of the DP slave.

Check the bus configuration.

6 The DP slave type does not corre-spond to the software configuration.

Enter the correct station type in the confi-guration software.

7 The DP slave has been parameteri-zed by another DP master (not by the DP master which has access to the DP slave at the moment).

Bit is always 1 when you are e.g. accessing the DP slave from the programming device or from another DP master. The PROFIBUS address of the DP master which parameterized the DP slave is in the "Master PROFIBUS address" diagnostic byte.


Communication

Station status 2

Table 12-4: Configuration of station status 2 (byte 1)

Station status 3

Station status 3 is not relevant for slave diagnostics.

Table 12-5: Configuration of station status 3

Master PROFIBUS address - definition

The PROFIBUS address of the DP master (class 1 master) is stored in the "Master PROFIBUS address" diagnostic byte:• which the DP slave parameterized and• which has read and write access to the DP slave.

The master PROFIBUS address is in byte 3 of the slave diagnostics.

Manufacturer's identification - definition

A code is stored in the manufacturer's identification which describes the DP slave type.

Table 12-6: Configuration of the manufacturer's identification

Bit Meaning

0 The DP slave must be parameterized anew.

1 There is a diagnostic message. The DP slave does not work until the error is rec-tified (static diagnostic message).

2 The bit is always "1" when the slave is present with this PROFIBUS address.

3 The address monitoring is activated for this DP slave.

4 The DP slave received the "FREEZE" control command 1).

5 The DP slave received the "FREEZE" control command 1).

6 0: Bit is always "0".

7 The DP slave is deactivated, i.e. it is decoupled from the current processing.

1) Bit is only updated if another diagnostic message is changed.

Bit Meaning

0 to 7 Bits are always "0".

Byte 4 Byte 5 Manufacturer's identification for

80H FDH SIMOCODE pro


Communication

Identification-related diagnostics - definition

The identification-related diagnostics begins at byte 6 and is 2 bytes long.

Identification-related diagnostics - Configuration

Figure 12-4: Configuration of the identification-related diagnostics

0 1 0 0 0 0 1 07 6 5 0

Byte 6

Bit number

= 0x42

Length of the identification-related diagnosticsincluding byte 6 (= 2 bytes)

Code for identification-related diagnostics

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x7 6 5 0

Byte 7

Bit number

0: Identification-related diagnostics are not available

1: Identification-related diagnostics are available

0 0 0 0 00 0x7 6 5 0

Byte 7

Bit number

0: Identification-related diagnostics are not available

1: Identification-related diagnostics are available

GSD (device data)

OM SIMOCODE pro


Communication

Status messages - definition

The status messages yield the detailed status of SIMOCODE pro.

Status messages - configuration

The status messages are configured as follows:

Figure 12-5: Status messages configuration

The detailed messages can be found in chapter A.5 "Detailed Events of the Slave Diagnostics".

0 0 0 1 0 1 0 07 6 5 0

Byte 8

Bit number

= 0x14

Length of the status messageincluding byte 9 (= 20 bytes)

7 6 5Byte 12

Bit number

7 0Byte 9 0x81

7 0Byte 10 x

Byte 11 0x00

4 3 2 1 0

Slot number

Status message

GSD (device data):OM SIMOCODE pro: 0x04

0x01

Detailed messages...

Byte 27


Communication

Channel-related diagnostics - definition

Channel-related diagnostics are a detailed version of the identification-rela-ted diagnostics. They supply information about the device errors of SIMOCODE pro.

Channel-related diagnostics - configuration

The channel-related diagnostics are configured as follows:

Figure 12-6: Configuration of the channel-related diagnostics

The block for the channel-related diagnostics, which has a length of 3 bytes, is either missing (if there are no channel-related diagnostics) or is available once or twice.

Error types

The diagnostic message is signaled on channel 0.

Table 12-7: Error types

No. Error type Meaning/cause

F9 01001: Error

• Internal error/device error• Error during self-test

Exact information: See chapter B.7 "Data Record 92 - Device Diagnostics".F16 10000:

Parameterization error

• Incorrect parameter value

1 0 0 0 0 0 x x7 6 5 0

Byte 28

Bit number

Code for channel-related diagnostics

1 1 0 0 0 0 0 07 6 5 0

Byte 29

Bit number

Input/output channel

7 6 5 0Byte 30

Bit number

Channel type:

Error type 9 or 16 (table below)

000B: No special channel type

Byte 31 to Next channel-related diagnostics message(Allocation as for byte 28 to 30)Byte 33

0 0 0

0x80 GSD0x83 OM SIMOCODE pro


Communication

Alarms

Alarms - diagnostic alarm

Device errors or parameter errors are alarm sources for diagnostic alarms. As soon as SIMOCODE pro sets a diagnostic alarm, the OB 82 diagnostic alarm is started in the SIMATIC-S7.

Diagnostic alarm - configuration

The diagnostic alarm is configured as follows:

Figure 12-7: Configuration of the diagnostic alarm

The first byte of the block for diagnostic alarms can be moved by 3 or 6 bytes depending on the number of blocks for the channel-related diagno-stics.

You will find a detailed description of the information contained in data record 1 in chapter B.2 "Data Record 0/1 - S7 System Diagnostics".

0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 = 0x14

Length of the diagnostic alarmincluding header byte 9 (= 20 bytes)

7 00x01

7 0x

0x00

Slot number

Diagnostic alarm


0x01

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number

Byte 28+n

Byte 29+n

Byte 30+n

Byte 31+n

Byte 32+n

Byte 48+n

Contents of data record 1

n = 0; 3; 6


Communication

Alarms - process alarm

Process messages, warnings and errors are alarm sources for process alarms. As soon as SIMOCODE pro sets a process alarm, the OB 40 process alarm is started in the SIMATIC-S7.

Process alarm - configuration

The process alarm is configured as follows:

Figure 12-8: Configuration of the process alarm

The first byte of the block for process alarms can be moved by 3 or 6 bytes depending on the number of blocks for the channel-related diagnostics.

The detailed messages can be found in chapter A.5 "Detailed Events of the Slave Diagnostics".

0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 = 0x14

Length of the process alarmincluding header byte 9 (= 20 bytes)

7 0

7 0x

0x00

Slot number

Process alarm


0x01

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number

Byte 28+n

Byte 29+n

Byte 30+n

Byte 31+n

Byte 32+n

Byte 48+n

Detailed messages

n = 0; 3; 6

7 6 5 0 Bit number

0x02


Communication

12.4 Integration of SIMOCODE pro in the DP master systems

12.4.1 Slave Modes of Operation

The following table shows an overview of the slave modes of operation which SIMOCODE pro can be operated with on the class 1 master:

Table 12-8: Slave modes of operation of SIMOCODE pro

12.4.2 Preparing the Data Transfer

A connection according to Table 12-8: Slave modes of operation of SIMOCODE pro as well as the setting of the PROFIBUS-DP address are required for communication with the class 1 master (OLC). See chapter 14.2.2 "Setting the PROFIBUS DP Address" for more informa-tion about setting the address.

SIMOCODE pro connected as:

Class 1 master

DP master manufacturer-

independent,

without DPV1 alarms

DP master manufacturer-

independent,

with DPV1 alarms S7 master

• DPV1 slave via GSD (device data)

• Cyclic data transfer• Standard diagno-

stics• Status messages• Parameterization

start-up (only BU1)• Acyclic writing and

reading of DPV1 data records (if sup-ported by the master)


stics• Status messages• Process and diagno-

stic alarm• Parameterization


reading of DPV1 data records


stics• Status messages• Process and diagno-




• S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro

— — • Cyclic data transfer• Standard diagno-

stics• Process and diagno-


start-up• Acyclic writing and



Communication

12.4.3 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as a DPV1 Slave via GSD in the

Configuration Software

SIMOCODE pro is connected as a standard slave in your system via the GSD file. You can download the GSD file• From the Internet under http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi_d/gsd ( -> Product

Support)• Via a modem under the telephone number +49 (0)911 737972.

The following GSD files are available for SIMOCODE pro C :• SI0180FD.GSG (German)• SI0180FD.GSE (English).

The following GSD files are available for SIMOCODE pro V :• SI1180FD.GSG (German)• SI1180FD.GSE (English).

Attention If you want to use the complete functionality of SIMOCODE pro (e.g. timestamping), your configuration tool must support GSD files - Rev.5 such as e.g. STEP7 V5.3 and higher.

The following table describes how to integrate the GSD file in SIMATIC S7 and SIMOCODE pro from the hardware catalog.

Table 12-9: Integration of SIMOCODE pro as DPV1 slave via GSD in the Configuration Software

Step STEP 7, from V5.1 + SP2

1 Start STEP 7 and call the menu command "Extras > Install new GSD file" in the HW configuration.

2 In the following dialog, select the GSD file to be installed and confirm with "OK" --> The field device is displayed in the hardware catalog in the "PROFIBUS DP" directory under "Further field devices > Switching devices > SIMOCODE pro".

3 Insert "SIMOCODE pro C" or "SIMOCODE pro V" on the PROFIBUS.

4 Ony for SIMOCODE pro V: SIMOCODE pro V can be connected in two basic types (basic type 1 or basic type 2). See chapter 12.3.1 "Cyclic Data". Insert the desired basic type "Basic type 1" or "Basic type 2" as a module.

5 Check the set DP alarm mode (DPV0 or DPV1) as well as the enable of the DPV-1 alarms in the proper-ties of the DP slave. These settings influence the evaluation of the diagnostic data and the alarms (see chapter 12.5 "Evaluating Diagnostic Data" and chapter 12.8 "Timestamping").

6 Ony for SIMOCODE pro C: It is possible to set the device parameters which are automatically trans-mitted to SIMOCODE pro during every start-up in the object properties under "Parameterization > Device-specific parameters" (see chapter 12.7.3 "Starting up Parameter Data").



Communication

12.4.4 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as SIMATIC PDM Object (DPV-1 Slave via

GSD) in STEP7-HW Config

SIMOCODE pro can be integrated as a PDM-Objekt in the STEP7-HW Config as of version 6.0 + SP1 of the SIMATIC PDM (Process Device Manager) software. The PDM option "Integration in STEP 7" is required for this.The following table describes how you can insert SIMOCODE pro as a PDM objekt in the STEP7-HW Config from the hardware catalog.

Table 12-10: Integration of SIMOCODE pro as SIMATIC PDM object (DPV-1 slave via GSD) in STEP7-HW Config

Step STEP 7, from V5.1 + SP2

1 Start STEP 7 and call the "HW Config".

2 To integrate SIMOCODE pro as a PDM object, navigate in the hardware catalog in the "PROFIBUS DP > Switching devices" directory.

3 Insert "SIMOCODE pro C (PDM)" or "SIMOCODE pro V (PDM)" on the PROFIBUS. Ony for SIMOCODE pro V: SIMOCODE pro V can be connected in two basic types (basic type 1 or basic type 2). See chapter 12.3.1 "Cyclic Data". Insert the desired basic type "Basic type 1" or "Basic type 2" as a module.

4 Check the set DP alarm mode (DPV0 or DPV1) as well as the enable of the DPV-1 alarms in the properties of the DP slave. These settings influence the evaluation of the diagnostic data and the alarms (see chapter 12.5 "Evaluating Diagnostic Data" and chapter 12.8 "Timestamping").

5 Start SIMATIC PDM to create the device parameters by double clicking on the slave symbol (see chapter 12.7.2 "SIMATIC PDM").


Communication

12.4.5 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as S7 Slave via OM SIMOCODE pro

The "OM SIMOCODE pro" software must be installed to utilize the advan-tages of SIMOCODE ES Professional to parameterize SIMOCODE pro from the STEP7-HW Config. OM SIMOCODE pro is included in the scope of deli-very of the "SIMOCODE ES Professional" software. Install the corresponding software. The follwoing table describes how you can insert SIMOCODE pro in the STEP7-HW Config from the hardware catalog.

Table 12-11: Integration of SIMOCODE pro as S7 Slave via OM SIMOCODE pro

Step STEP 7

1 Start STEP 7 and call the "HW Config".

2 To integrate SIMOCODE pro as an S7 slave, navigate in the hardware catalog in the "PROFIBUS DP > Switching devices > Motor Management System" directory.

3 Insert SIMOCODE pro C, SIMOCODE pro V (basic type 1) or SIMOCODE pro V (basic type 2) on the PROFIBUS. Ony for SIMOCODE pro V: SIMOCODE pro V can be connected in two basic types (basic type 1 or basic type 2). See chapter 12.3.1 "Cyclic Data". Insert the desired basic type "basic type 1" oder "basic type 2" as module.

4 Start the "SIMOCODE ES Professional" software to create the device parameters with the "Parameters" button under "Parameters" in the object properties of slot 4 of this S7 slave. The parameters created are accepted in STEP 7 and are automatically transmitted to SIMOCODE pro for every start-up (see chapter 12.7.3 "Starting up Parameter Data").


Communication

12.5 Evaluating Diagnostic Data

The way in which the diagnostic data is read out depends on which DP master system you have integrated in SIMOCODE pro and how the inte-gration was carried out (see chapter 12.4 "Integration of SIMOCODE pro in the DP master systems").

12.5.1 SIMOCODE pro integrated with GSD

The DP master with DPV1 alarm support (DPV1 alarm mode) (e.g. all newer

SIMATIC S7-300/400-DP master systems)

The diagnostic data is transmitted and evaluated via diagnostic alarms in DP master systems with DPV1 alarm support. A precondition is that the alarms in the PROFIBUS configuration tool (dia-gnostic alarms, process alarms) are enabled. You can ascertain in which DP alarm mode the integration has been caried out and whether the alarms are enabled using the configuration tool in the properties of the DP slave. In SIMATIC STEP 7 this is carried out in HW-Con-fig via the properties of the DP slave.• Response and process in STEP 7

A diagnostic alarm (OB82) is triggered in the CPU for every new diagnosis of a device error, whereas a process alarm (OB 40) is triggered for every new diagnosis of porcess faults/warnings/events. If the OB 82 or the OB 40 is not programmed, the CPU goes into the "STOP" mode.

• Alarms from a DPV1 slave received with STEP 7 The alarms are read directly in OB 82 or OB 40 with the SFB 54 "RALRM". The data region which is addressed with the SFB 54 via the "AINFO" parame-ter contains written alarm information in section "Diagnostic alarm - configura-tion" and in section "Process alarm - configuration" in chapter 12.3.2 "Diagno-stic Data and Alarms". The first byte which is read corresponds to byte 28.

Note The interface of the SFB 54 "RALRM" is identical to the interface of the FB "RALRM" as defined in the "PROFIBUS Guideline PROFIBUS Communica-tion and Proxy Function Blocks according to IEC 61131-3" standard.

You will find further information about SFB 54 in the STEP7 online help.

The DP master without DPV1 Alarm Support (DPV1 Alarm Mode) (e.g. all newer

SIMATIC S7-300/400-DP Master Systems)

The SIMOCODE pro diagnostic data can be evaluated via device-specific diagnostics (status messages) as well as channel-related diagnostics as part of extended diagnostics in DP master systems (see chapter 12.3.3 "Diagno-stic alarm - configuration"). You can ascertain in which DP alarm mode the integration has been carried out using the configuration tool in the properties of the DP slave.The device-specific diagnostics contain detailed information about faults, warnings and events which are recorded by the process via SIMOCODE pro, while information about faults which concern the hardware of the device are transmitted via the channel-related diagnostics.


Communication

• Response and process in STEP 7: The OB 82 in the CPU is started for every new diagnosis (diagnosis of device errors, diagnosis of process faults/warnings/events). If the OB 82 is not pro-grammed, the CPU goes into the "STOP" mode.

• Reading out the slave diagnostics with STEP 7: It can be ascertained which DP slave has transmitted diagnostic data by eva-luating the start information of the OB82 ("OB82_MDL_ADDR" variable). OB82_MDL_ADDR corresponds to the configured diagnostic address of the slave in the HW Config. The diagnostic data is then read e.g. in the cyclic part of the user program with the SFC 13 "DPNRM_DG". The diagnostic data which is read with the SFC 13 corresponds to the confi-guration described in chapter 12.3.3 "Diagnostic alarm - configuration". You will find further information about SFC 13 in the STEP7 online help.

12.5.2 Integration of SIMOCODE pro in SIMATIC S7 with OM SIMOCODE ES

The diagnostic data about the diagnostic alarms and process alarms is trans-mitted and evaluated during the integration of SIMOCODE pro as an S7 slave.

DP masters which are operated in "DPV1" DP mode (e.g. all newer SIMATIC S7-300/

400 DP master systems)

Response and process in STEP 7: A diagnostic alarm (OB 82) is triggered in the CPU for every new diagnosis of a device error, whereas a process alarm (OB 40) is triggered for every new diagnosis of process faults/warnings/events. If the OB 82 or the OB 40 is not programmed, the CPU goes into the "STOP" mode.• Alarms from a DPV1 slave received with STEP 7:

The alarms are read directly in OB 82 or OB 40 with the SFB 54 "RALRM". The data region which is addressed with the SFB 54 via the "AINFO" parame-ter contains written alarm information in section "Diagnostic alarm - configura-tion" and in section "Process alarm - configuration" in chapter 12.3.2 "Diagno-stic Data and Alarms". The first byte which is read corresponds to byte 28. You will find further information about SFB 54 in the STEP7 online help.

DP masters which are operated in "S7 compatible" DP mode (e.g. all newer SIMATIC

S7-300/400 DP master systems)

Response and process in STEP 7: A diagnostic alarm (OB 82) is triggered in the CPU for every new diagnosis of a device error, whereas a process alarm (OB 40) is triggered for every new diagnosis of process faults/warnings/events. If the OB 82 or the OB 40 is not programmed, the CPU goes into the "STOP" mode. You will find more information about device errors in the start information of the OB 82 in the "OB82_MDL_DEFECT" variable. The data written in the bytes 32 to 35 of the process alarm is contained in the "OB40_POINT_ADDR" variable in the start information of the OB 40 (see section "Diagnostic alarm - configuration" in chapter 12.3.2 "Diagnostic Data and Alarms"). The reading of all diagnostics can e.g. be initiated from the OB 40, while the complete diagnostic data record 92 is read e.g. in the cyclic user program with the SFC 59 "RD_REC". You will find further information about SFC 59 in the STEP7 online help.


Communication

12.6 Data Records

Data records contain additional information about the DP slave which can only be read or partly written.These data records can be accessed for reading and writing via cyclic DPV1 services. This makes it possible, for example, to operate, monitor and para-meterize SIMOCODE pro. You can use these functions if they are supported by the DP master. You will find an overview of the data records available from SIMOCODE pro in chap-ter B "Data Formats and Data Records". Unlike access to cyclic I/O data, special function blocks must be started in the user program in the PLC for access to the DPV1 data records.

Access to data records in STEP 7

Reading and writing access to data records is gained by starting the system functions SFC 59 "RD_REC" and SFC 58 "WR_REC" or at the CPU which sup-ports the "DPV1" mode with the system function blocks SFB 52 "RDREC" and SFB 53 "WRREC".

Note The interface of the SFB 52 "RDREC" and the SFB 53 "WRREC" is identical to the FB "RDREC" and "WRREC" as defined in the "PROFIBUS Guideline PROFIBUS Communication and Proxy Function Blocks according to IEC 61131-3" standard.

You will find further information about SFB and SFC in the STEP7 online help.


Communication

12.7 Parameterization via PROFIBUS

12.7.1 SIMOCODE ES Professional

With SIMOCODE ES Professional you can parameterize all the SIMOCODE pro devices which are connected to the same PROFIBUS DP network from a central location. Parameter data which has been previously created with the software can therefore be transmitted directly via PROFIBUS DP to SIMOCODE pro.

Note A PC with a system connection for PROFIBUS (e.g. SIMATIC NET CP 5512 or CP 5611) is required to carry out online functions via PROFIBUS DP, e.g. transmitting of SIMOCODE pro parameters.

The above-mentioned system connections for PROFIBUS are operated toge-ther with SIMOCODE ES Professional as a class 2 master and use acyclic DPV1 communication functions for the communication with SIMOCODE pro.

Attention The start-up parameter block (device parameter > bus parameter) must always be set for this form of parameterization to avoid overwritting the device parameters with any existing parameter data at start-up.

12.7.2 SIMATIC PDM

The standard version of SIMATIC PDM (PDM Basic) provides you with a comparable functionality for parameterization of SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS as with SIMOCODE ES Professional. The following additional functions are available with the PDM option "Inte-gration in STEP 7":• "Offline saving" of SIMOCODE pro parameter data in the STEP7 project and

manual transmission (no automatic transmission of parameter data at start-up!)

• "Routing via S7 stations". Example: Parameterization of all SIMOCODE pro devices from a central engi-neering station, together with hardware components which provide a data record gateway (CP443-5 Extended, IE/PB link), also in connection with diffe-rent networks.

Attention The start-up parameter block (device parameter > bus parameter) must always be set for this form of parameterization to avoid overwritting the device parameters with any existing parameter data at start-up.

You will find further information about SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC-PDM manual.


Communication

12.7.3 Starting up Parameter Data

For every start-up of SIMOCODE pro on PROFIBUS DP, parameters are transmitted to the device. Depending on the master module and the type of integration used, either standard parameters or standard parameters and device-specific parame-ters (SIMOCODE pro parameters) are transmitted. The parameters are saved in the PLC or in the DP master and are transmitted automatically to the DP slave at the systemstart-up. You can set the device-specific parameters• with the configuration tool when the GSD (BU1 only) is loaded, e.g. with

STEP7-HW Config. This option is available for SIMOCODE pro C. The SIMOCODE pro parameters are created by setting the device-specific para-meters in the slave properties.

• in the "SIMOCODE ES Professional" software during the integration of SIMOCODE pro in STEP7 HW Konfig as a S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro. This option is available for SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V. You can start the "SIMOCODE ES Professional" software to conveniently create the parameterization from STEP7-HW Konfig with the button in the "Parameter" tab in the object properties of slot 4.

Attention In order to be able to carry out the device parameterization at start-up, the start-up parameter block (device parameter > bus parameter) must remain unset. SIMOCODE pro is then parameterized with the device-specific parameters stored in the DP master, and any existing parameters in the device are over-written.


Communication

12.8 Timestamping

Prerequisite:

To use SIMOCODE pro V timestamping, the DP master used must support the time synchronization functions via PROFIBUS (e g. DP master interface connections for SIMATIC S7-400) or a time master (e.g. SICLOCK) must be used.

Process in STEP 7

The time synchronization activation for SIMOCODE pro V is carried out in STEP 7 HW Konfig in the slave properties unter "Time synchronization".

Attention The set synchronization interval must correspond to the configuration of the time master.

In SIMOCODE pro the transmission of time-stamped information occurs in analogy to the transmission with SIMATIC S7 IM 153-2. For this reason, the "FB 62 TIMESTMP" function block for the transmission of time-stamped messages from the "Standard Library > Miscellaneous Blocks" library can be used for further processing of time-stamped informa-tion in the CPU.

Note The "LADDR" parameter contains the diagnostic address of the DP slave from STEP 7 HW Konfig. LADDR2 contains the diagnostic address of slot 2 of SIMOCODE pro in the DP mode "DPV1" of the DP master (integrated via OM SIMOCODE pro). In all other configurations LADDR2 contains the same address as LADDR.

You will find further information about FB 62 in the STEP7 online help.

Timestamping in the fault memory

See chapter 10.9 "Timestamping".


Communication


Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces 13In this chapter

This chapter contains information about how the individual SIMOCODE pro components are mounted and wired.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• mechanics• electricians• maintenance and service personnel.

Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge:• Basic general knowledge about SIMOCODE pro.


Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces

13.1 General Information about Mounting and Wiring

Safety instructions

Warning Dangerous electrical voltage! Can cause electrical shock and burns. Disconnect the device from the system before beginning work.

Attention Follow the information contained in the operating manual.

Fixing lugs for screw attachments

Attention For technical reasons, there are two sorts of mounting lugs for screw attach-ments: For basic units and expansion modules: Order No. 3RP1903 For current measuring modules, 45 mm and 55 mm width: Order No. 3RP1900-0B

Removable terminals

Attention The removable terminals are mechanically coded and only fit in a particular position!



13.2 Mounting

13.2.1 Basic Units and Expansion Modules

You can attach these system components in the following manner:• Snap-on mounting onto a 35 mm standard mounting rail without requiring

tools• Snap-on mounting of the basic units onto current measuring modules with a

width of 45 mm and 55 mm (up to 100 A) with integrated standard mounting rail

• Screw attachment with mounting lugs (order No: 3RP1903) and screws on a level surface. These mounting lugs are only suitable for basic units and expansion modules!

Figure 13-1: Mounting the basic unit

SIMOCODE pro C SIMOCODE pro Vwith increased mounting depth

Snap-on mounting onto standard mounting rails

Screw attachment

3RP1903

Ø 5 mm

Expansion module

Ø 5 mm

3RP1903

Snap-on mounting onto the current measuring module

e.g. 45 mm wide current measuring module with BU1

Standard mounting rails

BU1 BU2



13.2.2 Current Measuring Modules

You can attach these system components in the following manner:• Current measuring module up to 100 A: Standard mounting rail mounting or

screw attachment with mounting lugs (order No: 3RP1903-0B) and screws on a level surface. These mounting lugs are only suitable for the current measu-ring modules (and current/voltage measuring modules)! For the current measuring modules up to 25 A you also require an additional 25 mm long spa-cer.

• Current measuring module up to 200 A: Standard mounting rail mounting or screw attachment.

• Current measuring module up to 630 A: Screw attachment.

Figure 13-2: Mounting the current measuring modules

3RP1900-0B

3UF7000-1AU00-03UF7101-1AA00-0

25 mm spacer3RP1900-0B

Snap-on mounting

3UF7102-1AA00-0

Screw attachment

45 mm width 55 mm width

3UF7103-1AA00-0 3UF7103-1BA00-0 3UF7104-1BA00-0

0.3 A up to 3 A2.4 A up to 25 A 10 A up to 100 A

20 A up to 200 A 20 A up to 200 A 63 A up to 630 AScrew attachmentSnap-on mounting or

Screw attachmentSnap-on mounting orScrew attachment



13.2.3 Current/voltage Measuring Modules

You can attach these system components in the following manner:• Current/voltage measuring modules up to 100 A: Standard mounting rail

mounting or screw attachment with mounting lugs (Order No: 3RP1903-0B) and screws on a level surface. These mounting lugs are only suitable for the current/voltage measuring modules (and current measuring modules)! For the current/voltage measuring modules up to 25 A you also require an additional 25 mm long spacer.

• Current/voltage measuring modules up to 200 A: Standard mounting rail mounting or screw attachment.

• Current/voltage measuring modules up to 630 A: Screw attachment.

Figure 13-3: Mounting the current/voltage measuring modules

3UF7101-1AA00-03UF7101-1AA00-0

25 mm spacer3RP1900-0B

Snap-on mounting

3UF7101-1AA00-0

Screw attachment

45 mm width 55 mm width

3UF7101-1AA00-0 3UF7104-1BA00-0 3UF7104-1BA00-0

0.3 A up to 3 A2.4 A up to 25 A 10 A up to 100 A

20 A up to 200 A 20 A up to 200 A 63 A up to 630 AScrew attachmentSnap-on mounting or

Screw attachmentSnap-on mounting orScrew attachment

3RP1900-0B



13.2.4 Operator Panel

The operator panel is designed to be installed e.g. in the front panel of motor control centers or in switchgear cabinet doors. For this, carry out the following steps:

Table 13-1: Procedure for mounting an operator panel

Figure 13-4: Mounting the operator panel

Step Description

1 Create a cutout, e.g. in the front panel or switchgear cabinet door. See dia-gram for dimensions.

2 Place the operator panel in the cutout.

3 Snap the four mounting brackets onto the operator panel.

4 Lock the operator panel in position by tightly screwing the four screws of the mounting bracket.

4x

90+0.5

30+

0.5 Front panel

Cutout

Switchgearcabinet door

Operator panel Mounting bracket

etc.



13.3 Wiring

13.3.1 Basic Units and Expansion Modules

Basic units and expansion modules have removable terminals. You do not have to detach the wiring to replace the components!

Figure 13-5: Removable terminals for basic units and expansion modules

Attention The removable terminals are mechanically coded and only fit in a particular position!

Cables

The cable cross section is the same for all devices. The following table shows the cable cross sections, strip lengths and tightening torques of the cables for the removable terminals:

Table 13-2: Cable cross sections, strip lengths and tightening torques of the cables

Removable terminals Screwdriver Tightening torque

TORQUE: 7 IN LB - 10.3 IN LB0.8 Nm -1.2 Nm

Strip lengths Cable cross-section

2x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 - 4 mm2

2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12

2x 0.5 mm2 -0.06 in2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 -0.10 in2

2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14

Removable terminalsBasic units Expansion modules

A

D

C

A, C, D: coded

A

C

D

PZ2/Ø 5 mm - 6 mm

10 Solid

10 Strandedwith/withoutwith/withoutend sleeves



Supplying the inputs of the basic unit

You have three possibilities for supplying the inputs:• a): 24 V DC internal.• b): 24 V DC external. However, input 3 is the reference potential, i.e.

3 inputs are available.• c): 24 V DC external. Only possible for the basic unit with a supply

voltage of 24 V DC!

Figure 13-6: 24 V DC for supplying the inputs

All inputs work reaction-free, i.e. the signal states on the neighboring inputs do not influence each other.

Basic unit (BU)

BU - inputs

1

2

3

4

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

24 V DC internal, 4 inputs usable

Basic unit (BU)

BU - inputs

1

2

3

4

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

24 V DC external, 3 inputs usable

Basic unit (BU)

BU - inputs

1

2

3

4

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

24 V DC external, 4 inputs usable

A1

A2

a) b) c)

Only possible for the basic unit with asupply voltage of 24 V DC !

24 V DC

(not usable)



Basic unit pin assignment

The following table shows the pin assignment of the removable terminals:

Table 13-3: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the basic unit

Procedure for wiring the removable terminals of basic units


Table 13-4: Wiring the detachable terminals of the basic unit

Connection Assignment

Upper terminals

1 Roots of relay outputs 1 and 2

2 Relay output OUT1

3 Relay output OUT2

4 Digital input IN3

5 Digital input IN4

T2 Thermistor connection (binary PTC)

6 Relay output OUT3

7 Relay output OUT3

8 24 V DC only for IN1 to IN4

9 Digital input IN 1

10 Digital input IN2

T1 Thermistor connection (binary PTC)

Lower terminals

A1 Pin 1 supply voltage

A2 Pin 2 supply voltage

A PROFIBUS DP Pin A

B PROFIBUS DP Pin B

SPE/PE Shielded/PE

Step Description

1 Connect the cables to the upper and lower terminals.

2 If you want to use terminals A/B for PROFIBUS DP, place the PROFIBUS DP cable-shielding on the SPE/PE terminal.

Attention The A/B terminals are an alternative to the 9-pole SUB-D connection! Baud rates up to 1.5 MBit/s are possible!

3 Connect the system shielding to the SPE/PE terminal.

1 OUT1 2 .2 3 4 IN3 IN4 5 T2

OUT3 7 8 9 IN1 IN210 T16

DEVICEBUSGEN. FAULT

ϑ

TEST/RESET

PROF

IBUS

DP

A1 A2 A B SPE/PE

24 V

SIMOCODE pro



Example for connecting the terminals of the basic unit

Figure 13-7: Example for connecting the terminals of the basic unit

Device

Bus

Gen. Fault

9 10 4 5 8

1

2

3

6

7PROFIBUS DP

SPE/PEA B

a)

b)

T1 T2

A1 A2

IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 24 V

OUT1

OUT2

OUT3

max. 1.5 MBd



Supplying the inputs of the digital module

• Digital module with 24 V DC input supply• Digital module with 110 to 240 V AC/DC input supply.

Figure 13-8: Supplying the inputs of the digital module

Digital module pin assignment


Table 13-5: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the digital module


Upper terminals

20 Roots of relay outputs 1 and 2

21 Relay output OUT1

22 Relay output OUT2



25 N/M for IN1 to IN4

Lower terminals



PE PE

24 V DC external 110 V up to 240 V AC/DC external

Digital module (DM)

DM - inputs

1

2

3

4

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

N/M

Digital module (DM)

DM - inputs

1

2

3

4

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

N/M~

20 21 22OUT1 .2

23 24 25IN2

READY

26 27 PEIN3 IN4

IN1



Example for connecting the terminals of the digital module

Figure 13-9: Example for connecting the terminals of the digital module

Ready

23 24 26 27

20

21

22

PE

25

+

–

~ AC

DC

N/MIN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

OUT1

OUT2



Earth-fault module pin assignment


Table 13-6: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the earth-fault module


Upper terminals

40 Input C1 - Summation current trans-former

43 Input C2 - Summation current trans-former

Lower terminals

PE PE

40

READY

C1

43 C2

EM3UF7 500–1AA00–0

G/JJMMTT *Exx*

PE



Example for connecting the terminals of the earth-fault module

Figure 13-10: Example for connecting the terminals of the earth-fault module

*) Cable shielding recommended.

Ready

C1

PE

3UL22 Z1

C2

40 43

L1L2L3N

Z2

*)



Temperature module pin assignment


Table 13-7: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the temperature module

You can connect up to three 2-wire or 3-wire temperature sensors.• 2-wire temperature sensors:

Bridge the T2 terminals with the T3 terminal.• 3-wire temperature sensors.

Doubly assign terminals 56 and 57 if three sensors are used.

Connectio

n

Assignment

Upper terminals

50 Input T3, temperature sensor 1






Lower terminals

56 Input T1, temperature sensor 1 to 3

57 Input T1, temperature sensor 1 to 3

PE Shielded/PE READYTM3UF7 700–1AA00–0

G/JJMMTT *Exx*

50 1T3 51 2T3 52 3T3

53 1T2 54 2T2 55 3T2

56 T1 57 PE



Example for connecting the terminals of the temperature module

Figure 13-11: Example for connecting the terminals of the temperature module

NTC Type: B 57227-K333-A1

J

RQ 63022-K7182-S1

Ready

T1

PE

1T2

56 57

1T3

1)ϑ

3 x max.

53

1T2

T1

50

1T3

54

2T2

51

2T3

55

3T2

52

3T3

2)ϑ

3 x max.

T1

T1 2T2 2T3T1 3T2 3T3

T1 1T2 1T3T1 2T2 2T3T1 3T2 3T3

*) *) *) Cable shielding recommended.

Temperature sensor NTC:



Analog module pin assignment


Table 13-8: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the analog module


Upper terminals

30 Analog input IN1+




Lower terminals

36 Analog output OUT+

37 Analog output OUT+

PE PE READYAM3UF7 400–1AA00–0

G/JJMMTT *Exx*

33 IN1- 34IN2-

36 +OUT- PE37

30 IN1 31IN2+



Example for connecting the terminals of the analog module

Figure 13-12: Example for connecting the terminals of the analog module

Procedure for wiring the removable terminals of expansion modules


Table 13-9: Wiring the removable terminals of the expansion module

Step Description

1 Connect the cables to the upper and lower terminals.

2 Connect the system shielding to the PE terminal.

Ready

PE36 37

30

IN1+

33

IN1-

31

IN2+

34

IN2-

L++

-

IN1 IN1-

RL

RL < 500 Ohm

+

-

IIN (0/4 mA - 20 mA)

OUT+ OUT-

IOUT (0/4 A - 20 mA)

IN2+ IN2-

2 x max.

*) M

*) *) Cable shielding recommended for up to 30 m,Cable shielding required for over 30 m



13.3.2 Current Measuring Modules

The size of the motor current determines the size of the corresponding cur-rent measuring module that should be chosen for current measuring:• Push-through system up to 200 A: The cables of the 3 phases are passed

through the push-through openings.• Rail connection system from 20 A to 630 A, also for direct connection

to Siemens contactors.

The following table shows the different current measuring modules:

Attention Pay attention to the correct assignment and the correct routing direction when connecting or routing the cables of the single phases of the main cir-cuit! Follow the information in the operating instructions!

Current measuring module Main current connections

3UF7000-1AU00-0 0.3 A -3 A Ø Push-through openings: 7.5 mm

Push-through system

3UF7101-1AA00-0 2.4 A - 25 A Ø Push-through openings: 7.5 mm

3UF7102-1AA00-0 10 A - 100 A Ø Push-through openings: 14 mm

3UF7103-1AA00-0 20 A -200 AØ Push-through openings: 25 mm

3UF7103-1BA00-0 20 A -200 APin cross section: 16 mm² - 95 mm², AWG 5 to 3/0

Rail connection system

3UF7104-1BA00-0 63 A -630 A Pin cross section: 50 mm² - 240 mm², AWG 1/0 kcmil to 500 kcmil

Table 13-10: Current measuring modules

Ø L1L2L3N

L1 L2 L3

T1 T2 T3

M~3



13.3.3 Current/Voltage Measuring Modules

The size of the motor current determines the size of the corresponding cur-rent/voltage measuring module that should be chosen for current/voltage measuring:• Push-through system up to 200 A: The cables of the 3 phases are passed

through the push-through openings.• Rail connection system from 20 A to 630 A, also for direct connection

to Siemens contactors.

The following figure shows the different current/voltage measuring modu-les:

Current/voltage measuring module ConnectionMain circuit

3UF7101-1AA00-0 0.3 A - 3 A Ø Push-through openings: 7.5 mm

Push-through system

3UF7111-1AA00-0 2.4 A -25 A Ø Push-through openings: 7.5 mm

3UF7101-1AA00-0 10 A - 100 A Ø Push-through openings: 14 mm

3UF7101-1AA00-0 20 A - 200 AØ Push-through openings: 25 mm

3UF7113-1BA00-0 20 A up to 200 APin cross section: 16 mm² - 95 mm², AWG 6 to 3/0

Rail connection system

3UF7104-1BA00-0 63 A - 630 A Pin cross section: 50 mm² - 240 mm², AWG 1/0 kcmil to 500 kcmil

Table 13-11: Current/voltage measuring modules

L1L2L3N

M~3

L1 L2 L3

T1 T2 T3

L1 L2 L3



Safety instructions

Attention Measuring of the measured values relating to voltage or power: Connect the main circuit L1, L2, L3 using a 3-core, short-circuit proof cable with the terminals (L1, L2, L3) of the removable terminals on the current/voltage measuring module.

Attention Pay attention to the correct assignment of the phases on the current/voltage measuring modules and the correct routing direction when connecting or routing the cables of the single phases of the main circuit! Follow the infor-mation in the operating instructions!

Removable terminals

The following table shows the cable cross sections, strip lengths and tighte-ning torques of the cables for the removable terminals:

Table 13-12: Cable cross sections, strip lengths and tightening torques of the cables


Fig. 13-13: Pin assignment of the terminals of the current/voltage measuring modules

Caution The phases L1 and L3 are interchanged at the upper/lower terminals!

Removable terminals Screwdriver Tightening torque

TORQUE: 7 IN LB - 10.3 IN LB0.8 Nm -1.2 Nm

Strip lengths Cable cross section

2x 0,5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 - 4 mm2

2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12

2x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2- 2.5 mm2

2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14

PZ2/Ø 5 mm -6 mm

10 Solid

10 Strandedwith/withoutwith/withoutend sleeves

L1, L2, L3:Terminals for connecting the 3-corecable of the main circuit

Lower: Upper



13.3.4 Current Measuring with an External Current Transformer (Interposing

Transformer)

Description

SIMOCODE pro can be operated with external current transformers. The secondary cables of the current transformer are looped through the push-through openings and short-circuited. The secondary current of the external current transformer is the primary current of the current measuring module of SIMOCODE pro.

Attention If the rated current is used in the maid circuit, the secondary current of the current transformer must be within the setting range of the current measu-ring module!

Figure 13-14: Current measuring with an external 3UF18 current transformer

Transformation ratio

The transformation ratio is calculated using the following formula:

Transformation ratio =

In the following examples, the displayed actual current does not need to be converted, even when an interposing transformer is used, because SIMOCODE pro only outputs the proportional value in relation to the para-meterized set current le.

M3~

L1 L2 L3

K1

K2

K3

L

Main circuit

3UF 71 current measuring

3UF18 current transformer

3UF 70

Secondary circuit

module basic unit

Primary current (external current transformer)

Secondary current x Number of loops n(ext. current transformer) (current measuring module)



Technical data of the current transformer

• Secondary current: 1 A• Frequency: 50 Hz/60 Hz• Transformer rating: Recommended > 2.5 VA, depending on the secondary

current and the cable length• Overcurrent factor: 5P10 or 10P10• Accuracy class: 1

Example 1:

• 3UF1868-3GA00 current transformer:– Primary current: 820 A at nominal load– Secondary current: 1 A• SIMOCODE pro with 3UF7 100-1AA00-0 current measuring module,

Set current 0.3 to 3 A;

This means:– the secondary current of the current transformer is 1 A at the rated load

and is therefore within the 0.3 to 3 A setting range of the current measuring module used

– the set current le to be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro is 1 A.

Figure 13-15: Example (1 of 2) for current measuring with an external 3UF18 current transformer

M3~

L1 L2 L3

K1

K2

K3

L

Main circuit

3UF 71 current measuring module


3UF 70 basic

Secondary circuit

Primary current atnominal load: 820 A

Secondary current: 1 A Set current Ie: 1 A

Setting range:0.3 A - 3 A

unit



Example 2:

• 3UF1868-3GA00 current transformer:– Primary current: 205 A at nominal load– Secondary current: 0.25 A• SIMOCODE pro with 3UF7 100-1AA00-0 current measuring module,

set current 0.3 to 3 A;

This means:– The secondary current of the current transformer is 0.25 A at the rated

load and is therefore not within the 0.3 A to 3 A setting range of the current measuring module used

– The secondary current must be boosted by multiple looping through of the secondary cables through the push-through openings of the current measuring module. For double looping, 2 x 0.25 A = 0.5 A

– The set current le to be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro is 0.5 A.

Figure 13-16: Example (2 of 2) for current measuring with an external 3UF18 current transformer

M3~

L1 L2 L3

K1

K2

K3

L

Main circuit


3UF 70 basic

Secondary circuit

Primary current atnominal load: 205 A

Secondary current: 2 x 0.25 A Set current Ie: 0.5 A

3UF 71 current measuring module

Setting range:0.3 A - 3 A

Double-looping through of the secondary cables

unit



13.4 System Interfaces

13.4.1 General

Please observe the following notes:• SIMOCODE pro system components are connected to each other via the

system interfaces.• There are various different lengths of connecting cables that can be used to

join the system components.• The system is always expanded from the basic unit. Basic units have 2

system interfaces:– Bottom: For outgoing connection cables leading from BU1 to the current

measuring module.– Front: For outgoing connecting cables leading to an expansion module

or operator panel and for PC cables, memory modules or addressing plugs.

• Current measuring modules have one system interface:– Bottom or front incoming connecting cable leading from the basic unit.

• Expansion modules have 2 interfaces on the front. – Left: For incoming connecting cable leading from the upstream expan-

sion module or basic unit BU2.– Right: For outgoing connecting cables leading to an expansion module

or operator panel and for PC cables, memory modules or addressing plugs.

• The operator panel has 2 system interfaces:– Front: For PC cables, memory modules and addressing plugs.– Rear side: For incoming connecting cable leading from the upstream

expansion module or basic unit.• System interfaces that are not used are closed with a cover.

Attention: Applies to system interfaces on operator panels and door adapters (IP54 degree of protection): Press the cover firmly against its stop in the socket when using for the first time!

Figure 13-17: Closing the system interface with the system interface cover on the door adapter and the operator panel

0 0



Example

The following figure shows the configuration for SIMOCODE pro V:

Figure 13-18: Example of system interfaces

UF-0

1130

SIMOCODE pro V

Basic unit (BU2) Current measuringmodule (IM)

Operator panel (OP)

Expansion module

Expansion modules (DM, AM, EM, TM)

Incoming, from• Expansion module• Basic unit BU2

Outgoing, to• Expansion module• Operator panel

Incoming, from• Basic unit

UF-

0113

0

Operator panel (OP)

Incoming, from• Upstream expansion module• Basic unit

Cover

Basic unit (BU)

Outgoing, to• Current measuring module

Outgoing, to• Expansion module• Operator panel

Current measuring module (IM)



13.4.2 System Interfaces on Basic Units, Expansion Modules, Current Measuring

Modules and Current/Voltage Measuring Modules

The system interfaces are located on the front and bottom of the basic units. Other system components can be• joined to them using a connecting cable, e.g. digital modules, current measu-

ring modules• directly plugged into them, e.g. addressing plugs and memory modules.

Use the cover to close system interfaces that are not in use.

Attention Only connect system interfaces when there is no voltage applied!

Figure 13-19: Connecting system components to the system interface

Memory module,

Connecting cable

Expansion modulesBasic units

Current measuring modules

2 systeminterfaces

Systeminterface

Connecting cable

Systeminterfaces

addressing plugSystem interface cover

Current/voltage measuring modules

Systeminterface

Connecting cable

Removable terminals

Removable terminals



Procedure for joining connecting cables to the system interface


Table 13-13: Connecting the system interface

Figure 13-20: Procedure for connecting the system interfaces

Safety instructions

Attention For SIMOCODE pro C, the system interfaces on the bottom can only be used for the current measuring module!

Attention Follow the color coding on the connecting cable (see figure)!

Step Description

1 Place the plug in the plug shaft as straightly as possible. Ensure that the cat-ches on the plug shaft above the plug housing audibly click into place. For SIMOCODE pro C, the system interfaces on the bottom can only be

used for the current measuring module!

2 Use the cover to close system interfaces that are not in use

ConnectingcableCover

System interfaces on the

1

2

3

front side and the bottom

Example: SIMOCODE pro C

Catches

Catches

Color-coded



13.4.3 System Interfaces on the Operator Panel

The operator panel has two system interfaces:• system interface on the rear. This is normally accessible when an integrated

operator panel is used. The incoming cable leading from the basic unit or an expansion module is always connected here.

• system interface on the front. This is normally accessible when an integrated operator panel is used. Components are connected directly when required and then removed again afterwards. These can include:

– Memory module– Addressing plug– PC cable to connect a PC/programming device– Cover (if a system interface is not being used).

Figure 13-21: System interfaces on the operator panel

Procedure for joining connecting cables to the system interface of the operator panel


Table 13-14: Connecting system components to the system interface

Attention In order to ensure Degree of Protection IP54, press the cover firmly against its stop in the socket when using for the first time (see figure!).

Attention For the duration of the connecting procedure you can place the cover in one of the two "park positions" (see Fig. 13-22).

Step Description

1 Place the plug in the plug shaft as straightly as possible. Ensure that the cat-ches on the plug shaft above the plug housing audibly click into place. The incoming connecting cable is connected to the rear side.

2 Use the cover to close system interfaces that are not in use

Rear system interface Front system interface

e.g. memory moduleConnecting cable



Figure 13-22: Procedure for joining connecting cables to the system interface of the operator panel

Attention Follow the color coding on the connecting cable (see figure)!

Connecting cable

2

1

1

Catches

Catches

Color coded

Cover Park pos.

FrontRear side

0



13.5 PROFIBUS DP on a 9-pole SUB-D socket

The PROFIBUS DP can only be connected to the basic unit.

Attention The 9-pole SUB-D connection is an alternative to A/B terminals!

Procedure for connecting PROFIBUS DP to the basic unit


Table 13-15: Wiring the removable terminals of the digital module

Figure 13-23: Connecting the PROFIBUS DP to the 9-pole SUB-D socket

Step Description

1 Connect the PROFIBUS DP cable with the 9-pole SUB-D plug to the PROFIBUS DP interface.

Example: SIMOCODE pro C

PROFIBUS DP cable

PROFIBUS DP interface

9-poleSUB-D plug

9-pole SUB-D socket



13.6 Installation Guidelines for the PROFIBUS DP

Specifications

The key data included in this chapter is valid for Siemens products and cables.

PROFIBUS user organization (PUO) installation guidelines

For electrical PROFIBUS networks, please also adhere to the PROFIBUS DMP/FMS installation guidelines from the PROFIBUS user orga-nization. They contain important information about the cable arrangement and commissioning of PROFIBUS networks.

Publisher:PROFIBUS User Organization e. V.Haid-und-Neu-Straße 776131 Karlsruhe, Germany

Tel.: ++721 / 9658 590Fax: ++721 / 9658 589Internet: http://www.profibus.comGuidelines, Order No. 2.111

Also see the "SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks" manual at http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/1971286.

Application of bus termination modules

The 3UF1900-1K.00 bus termination module is primarily designed for use in MCC motor feeders. It provides proper bus termination even for removed MCC plug-in units. The bus termination module can also be utilized when no (SUB-D) standard plug can be used in the last device on a bus line. The 3UF1900-1KA00 bus termination module can also be connected to 220/230 V, 380/400 V, 115/120 V or 24 V AC. The 3UF1900-1KB00 version can also be used for 24 V DC.

Figure 13-24: Bus termination module


http://www.profibus.com

http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/1971286

Commissioning and Servicing 14In this chapter

In this chapter you will find e.g. information on how SIMOCODE pro is com-missioned, how components are replaced and how statistics are read.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• commissioners• mechanics• maintenance and service personnel.

Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge:• general basic knowledge about SIMOCODE pro e.g. from Chapter 1• SIMOCODE ES software.


Commissioning and Servicing

14.1 General Information about Commissioning and

Servicing

Safety instructions

Warning Dangerous electrical voltage! Can cause electrical shock and burns. Disconnect the device from the system before beginning work.

Attention Follow the information contained in the operating manual.

Prerequisites

The following prerequisites must be fulfilled for commissioning and ser-vicing:• SIMOCODE pro is already mounted and wired• The motor is switched off.

Notes on parameterizing

You can parameterize SIMOCODE pro as follows:• With the memory module on which the parameters from a basic unit have

already been saved: the memory module is plugged into the system inter-face. If the memory module is connected to the system interface and the supply voltage returns to the basic unit, the basic unit is automatically para-meterized by the memory module. The parameters can also be loaded from the memory module into the basic unit by pressing the Test/reset button.

• With the SIMOCODE ES software via the serial interface: The PC/programming device is connected to the system interface with the PC cable.

• With an automation system and/or SIMOCODE ES software via PROFIBUS DP: For this, the PROFIBUS DP cable is connected to the PROFIBUS DP interface of the basic unit.

Possible cases for commissioning

There are 2 possible cases for commissioning:1. Standard case: SIMOCODE pro was not yet parameterized and has the basic

factory default settings: When connected to PROFIBUS DP, the "bus" LED flashes green if a DP master is connected.

2. SIMOCODE pro was already parameterized:

– The parameters were already loaded into the basic unit in advance.– The parameters from a previous application are still present. Check if

the parameters, e.g. the set current, are correct for the new application. Change these correspondingly, if necessary.



14.2 Commissioning

14.2.1 Sequence of steps

Note the information in the previous chapter "General Information about Commissioning and Servicing" on page 14-2.

Carry out the following steps to commission SIMOCODE pro:

Table 14-1: Commissioning the basic unit

Figure 14-1: Connecting a PC to the basic unit

Step Description

1 Switch on the supply voltage. In an error-free state, the following LEDS should light up or flash green:• "Device" (green) lights up• "Bus" if PROFIBUS DP is connected (lights up or flashes). Continue with Step 2.Otherwise, carry out diagnostics according to the LED display. You will find further information in chapter "Diagnostics via LED Display" on page 14-5. Try to rectify the error.

2 If you want to make SIMOCODE pro available on the PROFIBUS DP, set the PROFIBUS DP address. You will find further information on this in chapter "Setting the PROFIBUS DP Address" on page 14-4.

3 Parameterize SIMOCODE pro or check the current parameterization e.g. with a PC with the SIMOCODE ES software installed. For this, connect the PC/programming device to the system interface with the PC cable (see the figure below).

Attention

For basic unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro ), only use the system interface on the front!


PC cable,Order number 3UF7940-0AA00-0



14.2.2 Setting the PROFIBUS DP Address

Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug


Table 14-2: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug

Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES


Table 14-3: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES

Step Description

1 Set the desired valid address on the DIP switch. The switches are numbered. Example address 21: Put the switches "16"+"4"+"12" in the "ON position".

2 Plug the addressing plug in the system interface. The "Device" LED lights up yellow.

3 Briefly press the test/reset button. The set address is accepted. The "Device" LED blinks yellow for approx. 3 seconds.

4 Pull out the addressing plug from the system interface.

Step Description



3 Open the menu Switchgear > Open online.

4 Select RS232 and the corresponding COM interface. Press OK to confirm.

5 Open the dialog Device parameters> Bus parameters.

6 Select the DP address.

7 Save the data in the basic unit with Target system > Load to switchgear. The address is set.



14.2.3 Diagnostics via LED Display

The basic units and the operating panel have 3 LEDs which display certain device states:

Table 14-4: Diagnostics via LED display

LED Status Display Description Corrective measures for errors

Device Device status

Green Device ready for use —

Green flickering

Internal error Send back the basic unit

Yellow Memory module or addressing plug recognized, test/reset buttons control the memory module or addressing plug

—

Yellow flashing

Memory module/ addressing plug read in; basic factory default settings configured (duration: 3 s)

—

Yellow flickering

Memory module pro-grammed (duration: 3 s)

—

Red Parameterization defec-tive (also Gen. Fault on)

Parameterize anew and switch the control voltage off and on again

Basic unit defective (also Gen. Fault on)

Exchange basic unit!

Red flashing

Memory module,addressing plug Expansion module defective (also Gen. Fault on - flashing)

Reprogram/replace the memory module, replace the expansion module

Off Supply voltage too low Check if the supply voltage is connected/turned on

Bus Bus status

Off Bus not connected or bus error

Connect the bus or check the bus parame-ters

Green flashing

Baud rate recognized/communication with PC/programming device

—

Green Communication with PLC/DCS

—

Gen. Fault

Error status

Red Error present; reset is saved

Rectify error, e.g. over-load

Red flashing

Error present; no reset saved

Rectify error, e.g. over-load

Off No error —



14.3 Servicing

14.3.1 Preventive Maintenance

Preventive maintenance is an important step in avoiding faults and unfore-seen costs. Industrial plants require regular professional maintenance in order to e.g. prevent halts in production due to plant downtimes. Preventive maintenance ensures that all components always work properly.

Reading out the statistical data

SIMOCODE pro provides statistical data which you e.g. can read out with SIMOCODE ES under Target system > Service data/Statistical data. By specifying "Motor operating hours" and "Number of starts", for example, you can decide whether motor and/or motor contactors should be replaced.

Figure 14-2: Reading out statistical data



14.3.2 Saving the Parameters

Always save the parameters in the memory module or in a SIMOCODE ES file. This especially applies if you replace a basic unit or if you want to transfer data from one basic unit to another.

Saving parameters from the basic unit into the memory module


Table 14-5: Saving the parameters into the memory module.

Saving parameters from the basic unit into a SIMOCODE ES file


Table 14-6: Saving parameters into a SIMOCODE ES file

Saving parameters from the memory module into the basic unit


Table 14-7: Saving parameters from the memory module into the basic unit

Attention When the memory module is plugged in, the parameters are transferred from the memory module to the basic unit when the supply voltage is swit-ched on.

Step Description

1 Plug the memory module into the system interface. The "Device" LED lights up yellow for approx. 10 seconds. During this time, press the "Test/reset" button for approx. 3 seconds. The parameters are saved in the memory module. After successful data transfer, the "Device" LED flickers yellow for approx. 3 seconds.

2 If necessary, unplug the memory module from the system interface.

Step Description



3 Open the menu Target system > Load into PC. The parameters are loaded into the main memory from the basic unit.

4 Click on the menu Switchgear >Save copy as .... The parameters from the main memory are saved into a SIMOCODE ES file.

Step Description

1 Plug the memory module into the system interface. The "Device" LED lights up yellow for approx. 10 seconds. During this time, press the "test/reset" button for a short period of time. The parameters are saved into the basic unit. After successful data transfer, the "Device" LED flickers yellow for approx. 3 seconds.

2 If necessary, unplug the memory module from the system interface.



Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES file into a basic unit


Table 14-8: Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES file to a basic unit

Step Description



3 Click on the menu Switchgear > Open. The parameters from the SIMOCODE ES file are saved in the main memory.

4 Click on the menu Target system > Load into switchgear. The parameters are loaded from the main memory into the basic unit.



14.3.3 Replacing SIMOCODE pro Components

Replacing a basic unit


Table 14-9: Replacing a basic unit

Replacing an expansion unit


Table 14-10: Replacing expansion units

Step Description

1 Save the parameters. You will find more information on this in chapter "Saving the Parameters" on page 14-7.

2 Switch off the main power for the feeder and the supply voltage for the basic unit.

3 If necessary, pull out the PC cable, the cover or the connecting cable of the system interface.

4 Remove the removable terminals. You do not need to remove the wiring.

5 Demount the basic unit.

6 Remove the removable terminals of the new basic unit.

7 Mount the new basic unit.

8 Plug in the wired removable terminals.

9 Plug the connecting cable into the system interface.

10 Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit.

11 Save the parameters in the basic unit. You will find more information on this in chapter "Saving the Parameters" on page 14-7.

12 Switch on the main power for the feeder.

Step Description


2 If necessary, pull out the PC cable, the cover or the connecting cable of the system interface.

3 Remove the removable terminals. You do not need to remove the wiring.

4 Demount the expansion module.

5 Remove the removable terminals of the new expansion unit.

6 Mount the new expansion module.

7 Plug in the wired removable terminals.






Replacing the current measuring module and the current/voltage measuring module

Safety instructions

Warning The main power for the feeder and the supply voltage for the basic unit must be switched off before replacing current measuring modules and cur-rent/voltage measuring modules.

Attention Follow the information contained in the operating manual!

Attention You do not have to detach the wiring from the removable terminals to replace the components!


Table 14-11: Replacing the current measuring module and the current/voltage measuring module

Step Description


2 Pull out the connecting cable from the system interface.

3 Pull out the removable terminals from the module as illustrated below (only current/voltage measuring modules).

4 Disconnect the 3 cables of the 3 phases of the main circuit.

5 Replace the module (see chapter 13.2.2 "Current Measuring Modules" and chapter 13.2.3 "Current/voltage Measuring Modules").

6 Connect the 3 cables of the main circuit and lead them through the push-through openings.

7 Plug the removable terminals onto the module (current/voltage measuring modules only).






Figure 14-3: Replacing current/voltage measuring modules

Upper terminals

Lower terminals



14.3.4 Resetting the Basic Factory Default Settings

With the basic factory default settings, all parameters are reset to the fac-tory values.

Resetting the basic factory default settings with the test/reset button on the basic

device


Table 14-12: Resetting basic factory default settings with the test/reset button on the basic device

Attention If one of the steps is not carried out correctly, the basic unit reverts to nor-mal operation.

Attention This function is always active, independent of the "Test/reset buttons locked" parameter.

Resetting the basic factory setting with the SIMOCODE ES software

Prerequisite: SIMOCODE pro is connected via PROFIBUS DP or via the system interface with the PC/programming device and SIMOCODE ES is started.


Table 14-13: Resetting the basic factory settings with the SIMOCODE ES software

Step Description

1 Switch off the supply voltage for the basic unit.

2 Press the test/reset button on the basic unit and keep it pressed.

3 Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit. The "Device" LED lights up yel-low.

4 Release the test/reset button after approx. two seconds.

5 Press the test/reset button again after approx. two seconds.

6 Release the test/reset button after approx. two seconds.

7 Press the test/reset button again after approx. two seconds.

9 Basic factory default settings are reset.

Step Description

1 Click on the menu Switchgear > Open online.

2 In the menu, select Target system > Command > Basic factory settings.

3 Press "Yes" to confirm.

4 Basic factory default settings are reset.


Alarm, Faults and System Messages 15In this chapter

In this chapter you will find information on troubleshooting.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• commissioners• maintenance and service personnel.• configurators• PLC programmers.

Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge:• Basic general knowledge about SIMOCODE pro.• knowledge about SIMOCODE ES software• knowledge about PROFIBUS DP.


Alarm, Faults and System Messages

Event

(alphabetical)

Description

Error processing

Acknow-

ledgement

Contactor

control

Analog module open circuit

A wire break has occurred in the analog value measuring circuit.

Check the measuring transducer and the measuring circuit.

Reset Switched off

Another start permitted

The start after the next one should not be carried out until the interlocking time has expired.

Blocked positio-ner

The torque switch has been acti-vated without or before the corre-sponding limit switch.

• The positioner is possi-bly blocked.

• Acknowledge the fault with "free-wheeling" with the counter com-mand "Open/Close".

• Check the slide appli-cation and the limit switches.

Counter com-mand "Open/Close".

Switched off

Blocking The maximum motor current has exceeded the threshold for the blocking protection. Possible cause: The motor is blok-ked.

Please check the applica-tion which is driven by the motor.

Reset Switched off

Changing of the parameters is not permissible in the current mode

Changing of a least one parame-ter is not possible in the current operating state.

A lot of parameters can only be changed when the motor feeder is swit-ched off and is not in the "Remote" operating mode. For an overview of the parameters that can always be changed: See chapter "Data For-mats and Data Records" on page B-1.

Configuration fault

The configured device configura-tion does not match the current configuration.

• Please check if all con-figured components are present.

• Check the actual confi-guration using "Confi-guration".

Rectify the fault; Reset

Switched off

Double 0 Both torque switches have been activated simultaneously. The motor feeder was turned off.

• Open circuit torque switch.

• Torque switch is defec-tive.

Switched off

Double 1 Both limit switches have been activated simultaneously.

Limit switch is defective. Switched off

Execution ON command

The motor feeder could not be turned on after an ON command.

• Main circuit is interrup-ted (fuse, circuit brea-ker).

• Motor contactor or contactor control is defective.

• Parameter execution time is too short.

Reset Switched off



Execution stop command

The motor feeder could not be turned off after a Stop command.

• The contactor contact is welded.

• Parameter execution time is too short.

• The "Open" end posi-tion has not been rea-ched during the parameterized runtime (only in the case of the "Positioner" and "Valve" control functions).

Reset; Counter command

Switched off

External earth fault

The external earth-fault monito-ring has been activated. A fault current of too high a value is flo-wing.

Please check the motor connection cable for damage.

Reset Switched off

External fault 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6

A signal is pending at the input (socket) of the standard function "External fault 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6".

Check the motor feeder. Depends on the parameteriza-tion

Switched off

Fault - Antiva-lence

The limit switches are not registe-ring any antivalent signals.

• Open circuit of the limit switch.

• Please check the slide application and the limit switches.

Counter com-mand "OPEN/CLOSE".

Switched off

Fault - Bus The PROFIBUS DP communica-tion has been or is being interrup-ted

Check the PROFIBUS connection (plugs, cables, etc.)

Reset, Auto-reset

Switched off

Fault - End posi-tion

Positioner/solenoid valve has left the final position without a com-mand being issued. The motor feeder was turned off.

Acknowledge the fault with "free-wheeling" by the counter command "OPEN/CLOSE".


Switched off

Fault - PLC/DCS The PLC which controls the fee-der was or is in the STOP state.

Please check the opera-ting status of the PLC.

Reset, Auto-reset

Switched off

Fault - Temporary components (e.g. memory module)

One of the following compon-ents is defective:• Addressing plug• Memory module• PC cable.

Please replace the defec-tive components. For this, see chapter 13 "Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces".


Switched off

Feedback (F) OFF The current flow in the motor fee-der was interrupted without the motor feeder being turned off.

• Main circuit is interrup-ted (fuse, circuit brea-ker, main switch).

• Motor contactor or contactor control is defective

Reset Switched off

Event

(alphabetical)

(cont.)

Description

(cont.)

Error processing

(cont.)

Acknow-

ledgement

(cont.)

Contactor

control

(cont.)



Feedback (F) ON The motor feeder could not be turned on after an ON command.

• Main circuit is interrup-ted (fuse, circuit brea-ker)

• Motor contactor or contactor control is defective, "Execution time" parameter is too short

• Only in the case of the "Positioner/Solenoid valve" control function: The end position "CLOSE" has not been reached during the parameterized runtime.


Switched off

Hardware faults The hardware of the SIMOCODE pro basic device is defective.

Please replace the basic unit. See chapter 13 "Moun-ting, Wiring, Interfaces".

Rectify the fault Switched off


The internal earth-fault monitoring has been activated. A fault cur-rent of too high a value is flowing.

Please check the motor connection cable for damage.

Reset Switched off

Module fault At least one SIMOCODE pro module is not ready for use.

• Connecting cable is defective or has not been plugged in cor-rectly.

• Module is defective. Please replace the module. For this, see chapter 13 "Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces".


Switched off

Motor operating hours >

The configured limit value for the motor operating hours has been exceeded.

Please implement the maintenance measures planned for the feeder.

No start permis-sible

The permitted number of starts in the monitoring timeframe was achieved. The next start should not be carried out until the inter-locking time has expired.

Reset Switched off

Operational pro-tection off (OPO)

The "Operational Protection Off (OPO)" signal is pending. A switched-on motor feeder was switched off. Switching on is not possible as long as the OPO signal is pen-ding.

Reset Switched off; for positioners: QE1 or QE2 switched on until end posi-tion - indepen-dent of the configuration

Event

(alphabetical)

(cont.)

Description

(cont.)

Error processing

(cont.)

Acknow-

ledgement

(cont.)

Contactor

control

(cont.)



Overload The motor feeder was over-loaded.

Please check the motor and the application which is driven by the motor. The motor can only be switched on again after the cooling down time has expired or after an emergency start is car-ried out.

Reset, Auto-reset

Switched off

Overload and Unbalance

The motor feeder was overloaded asymmetrically. Possible causes:• Failure of a phase• Fault in the motor windings.

Check the motor feeder and the motor. The motor can only be switched on again after the cooling down time has expired or after an emergency start is car-ried out.

Reset or Auto reset

Switched off

Parameter blok-king during start-up active

The start-up parameter block pre-vents SIMOCODE pro parame-ters which could be saved in the DP Master from being accepted. The block must be set when• SIMOCODE ES

or• SIMATIC PDMis used for parameterizing. The block may not be set when• SIMOCODE pro C/V is integra-

ted in STEP 7 via the SIMOCODE pro object manager (OM) or

• SIMOCODE pro C was parame-terized via GSD.

Parameter is faulty ("Gen. fault" category)

There in an error in the parameter data.

The designation of the faulty parameter can be found on the basis of the number (byte No.) in the system manual chapter A "Tables".


Switched off

Parameter is faulty ("Gen. fault" category)

There is a fault in the parameter data transmitted to the device. Faults can occur in the parameter data, for example, if the device parameterization was not carried out with SIMOCODE ES or SIMATIC PDM.

Check the parameter data (data records 130 133) transmitted to the device to make sure that the contents are correct.

Event

(alphabetical)

(cont.)

Description

(cont.)

Error processing

(cont.)

Acknow-

ledgement

(cont.)

Contactor

control

(cont.)

Attention The parameter block is not active in the case of devices which are still set to the factory default set-tings or which have been reset to the factory default settings!



Permissible num-ber of starts exceeded

The permitted number of starts in the monitoring timeframe has already been exceeded. The next start should not be carried out until the interlocking time has expired.

Reset Switched off

Phase unbalance The limit value for the phase unbalance was exceeded. The phase unbalance can lead to an overload. Possible causes:• Failure of a phase• Fault in the motor

windings.

Check the motor feeder and the motor.

Reset Switched off

Power failure monitoring (UVO)

The network failure lasted longer than the configured network failure time.

Reset Switched off

Pre-warning overload (I > 115%)

The motor feeder is in overload operation. It will be tripped within a short period of time due to overloading if this condition continues to per-sist.

Please check the motor and the application which is driven by the motor.

Required function is not supported

At least one parameterized function is not supported by the product version of the basic unit.

Only activate functions that are supported by the product version of the basic unit. For example, SIMOCODE pro V basic units with the product version E01 do not sup-port the voltage measu-ring module, the temperature module and the analog module.

Status - Cooling down time active

The motor feeder was switched off due to overload.

The motor can only be switched on again after the cooling down time has expired.

Status - Emer-gency start exe-cuted

The thermal memory was deleted with the function "Emergency start".

The motor can immedia-tely be switched on again after an overload release.

Status - Test position Feed-back (TPF)

The motor feeder is in the test position. The main current circuit is inter-rupted and the "cold starting" of the feeder can be carried out.

Stop time > The configured limit value for the stop time has been exceeded.

Please implement the maintenance measures planned for the feeder. If possible, switch on the feeder.

Event

(alphabetical)

(cont.)

Description

(cont.)

Error processing

(cont.)

Acknow-

ledgement

(cont.)

Contactor

control

(cont.)



Temperature module - Warning level overshot

The temperature warning level was exceeded.

Check the temperature measuring station.

Temperature module Out of Range

The temperature sensor is yiel-ding values which are not permit-ted.

Check the temperature sensor.

Reset Switched off

Temperature module sensor fault

Either a short circuit or a wire break has occurred in the tempe-rature sensor circuit.

Check the temperature sensor nd the sensor cable.


Switched off

Test position feedback (TPF)

Current flows in the motor feeder even though the motor feeder is in the test position (TPF).

The main circuit is not interrupted in test opera-tion.

Reset Switched off

Test shutdown The motor feeder was checked and switched off by a test switch-off.

Reset Switched off

Thermistor open circuit

A wire break has occurred in the thermistor sensor cable.

Check the thermistor sensor cable and the thermistor.


Switched off

Thermistor short circuit

A short circuit has occurred in the thermistor sensor cable.

Check the thermistor sensor cable and the thermistor.


Switched off

Thermistor trip level

The thermistor protection has been activated. The temperature of the motor is too high.

Please check the motor and the application which is driven by the motor. The motor cannot be switched on again until the temperature has rea-ched the switch-back point of the thermistor.

Reset, Auto-reset

Switched off

Warning level cos phi <

The power factor has undershot the warning level. Possible cause: The motor is ope-rated without a load.


Warning level I< undershot

The maximum current has undershot the warning level.


Warning level I> overshot

The maximum current has overs-hot the warning level.


Warning level P< undershot

The real power of the motor has undershot the warning level.


Warning level P> overshot

The real power of the motor has overshot the warning level.


Warning level U< undershot

The voltage in the motor feeder has undershot the warning level. Possible causes:• Undervoltage in the network• Fuse has tripped.

Check the motor feeder.

Event

(alphabetical)

(cont.)

Description

(cont.)

Error processing

(cont.)

Acknow-

ledgement

(cont.)

Contactor

control

(cont.)



Table 15-1: Alarm, Faults and System Messages

Warning level 0/4 - 20 mA< undershot

The measured value on the ana-log input has undershot the warning level.

Check the measuring station.

Warning level 0/4 - 20 mA> overshot

The measured value on the ana-log input has overshot the warning level.

Check the measuring station.

Wrong password The SIMOCODE pro parameters are protected by a password. An attempt was made to change the parameters without entering the password.

Please use the correct password for changing the parameters. If you do not know the password, new parame-ters cannot be set until the factory default set-tings have been reset. Please refer to chapter 14.3.4 "Resetting the Basic Factory Default Settings" for a descrip-tion of the factory default settings.

Event

(alphabetical)

(cont.)

Description

(cont.)

Error processing

(cont.)

Acknow-

ledgement

(cont.)

Contactor

control

(cont.)


Tables A In this chapter

In this chapter you will find various tables which can help you when working with SIMOCODE pro.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• configurators

Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge:• good knowledge about SIMOCODE pro.

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 A-1

Tables

A.1 Active Control Stations, Contactor & Lamp Controls

and Status Messages for the Control Functions

Table A-1: Active control stations, contactor/lamp controls and status messages for control functions

1) B

asic

uni

t 1,

SIM

OC

OD

Epr

oC

2) B

asic

uni

t 2,

SIM

OC

OD

Epr

oV

Spec

ifica

tion/

Co

ntro

l fun

ctio

nCo

ntro

l sta

tion

Cont

acto

r con

trol

Lam

p co

ntro

l

QLE

<<

(ON

<<)

QLE

< (O

N<)

QLA

(O

FF)

QLE

> (O

N>)

QLE

>>

(ON

>>)

Stat

us s

igna

l

ON

<<O

N<

OFF

ON

>O

N>>

QE1

QE2

QE3

QE4

QE5

ON

<<O

N<

OFF

ON

>O

N>>

Ove

rloa

d 1)

,2)

--

--

--

-Ac

tive

--

--

--

-

Dire

ct s

tarte

r 1),2

)-

-OF

FON

-ON

--

--

-OF

FON

-

Reve

rsin

g st

arte

r 1),2

)-

Left

OFF

Righ

t-

Righ

tLe

ft-

--

Left

OFF

Righ

t-

Circ

uit b

reak

er 1

),2)

--

OFF

ON-

ONim

puls

e-

OFF

impu

lse

--

--

OFF

ON-

Star

-del

ta

star

ter 2

)-

-OF

FON

-St

arco

ntac

tor

Delta

cont

acto

rN

etw

ork

cont

acto

r-

--

-OF

FON

-

Star

-del

ta s

tart

er

with

reve

rsal

of t

he d

irect

ion

of ro

tatio

n 2)

Left

OFF

Righ

t-

Star

cont

acto

rDe

ltaco

ntac

tor

Righ

tne

twor

kco

ntac

tor

Left

netw

ork

cont

acto

r

-Le

ftOF

FRi

ght

-

Dah

land

er 2

)-

-OF

FSl

owFa

stFa

stSl

owFa

stst

arco

ntac

tor

--

--

OFF

Slow

Fast

Dah

land

er

with

reve

rsal

of t

he d

irect

ion

of ro

tatio

n 2)

Left

fast

Left

slow

OFF

Righ

tsl

owRi

ght

fast

Righ

tfa

stRi

ght

slow

Fast

star

cont

acto

r

Left

slow

Left

fast

Left

fast

Left

slow

OFF

Righ

tsl

owRi

ght

fast

Pole

-cha

ngin

g sw

itch

2)-

-OF

FSl

owFa

stFa

stSl

ow-

--

--

OFF

Slow

Fast

Pole

-cha

ngin

g sw

itch

with

reve

rsin

g th

e di

rect

ion

of ro

tatio

n 2)

Left

fast

Left

slow

OFF

Righ

tsl

owRi

ght

fast

Righ

tfa

stRi

ght

slow

-Le

ftsl

owLe

ftfa

stLe

ftfa

stLe

ftsl

owOF

FRi

ght

slow

Righ

tfa

st

Valv

e 2)

--

Clos

edOp

en-

Open

--

--

--

Clos

edOp

en-

Posi

tione

r 1 2

)-

Clos

edSt

opOp

en-

Open

Clos

ed-

--

-Cl

osed

Stop

Open

-

Posi

tione

r 2 2

)-

Clos

edSt

opOp

en-

Open

Clos

ed-

--

-Cl

osed

Stop

Open

-

Posi

tione

r 3 2

)-

Clos

edSt

opOp

en-

Open

Clos

ed-

--

-Cl

osed

Stop

Open

-

Posi

tione

r 4 2

)-

Clos

edSt

opOp

en-

Open

Clos

ed-

--

-Cl

osed

Stop

Open

-

Posi

tione

r 5 2

)-

Clos

edSt

opOp

en-

Open

Clos

ed-

--

-Cl

osed

Stop

Open

-

Soft

star

ter 2

)-

-OF

FON

-ON

netw

ork

cont

acto

r

-Re

set

ONco

mm

and

--

-OF

FON

-

Soft

star

ter w

ith re

vers

ing

cont

acto

r 2)

-Le

ftOF

FRi

ght

-Ri

ght

netw

ork-

cont

acto

r

Left

netw

ork-

cont

acto

r

Rese

tON

com

man

d-

-Le

ftOF

FRi

ght

-

SIMOCODE pro

A-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01

Tables

A.2 Abbreviations and Specifications

Abbreviations

The following abbreviations are used in the tables:

Abbreviation Meaning

BU1 Basic unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro C)

BU2 Basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V)

IM Current measuring module

UM Current/voltage measuring module

DM1 Digital module 1

DM2 Digital module 2

OP Operator panel

AM Analog module

EM Earth-fault module

TM Temperature module

Th Thermistor

CF Control function

Cycl. Cyclic

Acycl. Acyclic

FAU Fault

M Event

W Warning

Table A-2: Abbreviations


Tables

Specifications

The following specifications apply in the tables:

Figure A-1: Table specifications

Signal - prm error number (bytes): If parameterization is not possible, the number of the parameter group (prm group) which caused the error is transmitted here.

Figure A-2: Example for parameter group

Designation Type Range Unit Information

Reserved Byte[4]

Cos phi Byte 0 .. 100 1% BU2

Reserved Byte[5]

Max. current Imax Word 0 .. 65535 1% / Ie BU1/BU2

Entry relevant for basic unit 1 and basic unit 2

Example

Entries in italics are not relevant (reserved)and, when writing,

should be filled with "0"

Parameters can be changed while running.

Byte.Bit Designation

(Prm group)

0.0 Reserved

4.0 Device configuration (12) Parameter group 12

. . .

. . .

SIMOCODE pro

A-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01

Tables

A.3 Socket Assignment Table - Digital

This table contains all assignment numbers (No.) of the sockets (digital). You only need these assignment numbers if you, for example, use a user pro-gram to fill data records and write these back.

No. Designation Designation Information

0 Static level Not connected BU1/BU2

1 Fixed level value‚ 0 BU1/BU2

2 Fixed level value‚ 1 BU1/BU2

3 Reserved

4 Reserved

5 Reserved

6 Reserved

7 Reserved

8 Basic unit (BU) BU - Test/reset button BU1/BU2

9 BU - input 1 BU1/BU2




13 Reserved

14 Reserved

15 Reserved

16 Digital module (DM) DM1 - input 1 DM1

17 DM1 - input 2 DM1







24 Reserved

25 Reserved

26 Reserved

27 Reserved

28 Reserved

29 Reserved

30 Reserved

31 Reserved

32 Operator panel (OP) OP - Test/reset button OP

33 OP - button 1 OP

34 OP - button 2 OP

35 OP - button 3 OP

36 OP - button 4 OP

37 Reserved

Table A-3: Socket assignment table - digital


Tables

38 Reserved

39 Reserved

40 DPV1/RS-232 interface (acyclic data)

Acyclic receive - bit 0.0 BU1/BU2

41 Acyclic receive - bit 0.1 BU1/BU2















56 PLC/DCS interface PLC [DPV0] (cyclic data)

Cyclic receive - bit 0.0 BU1/BU2

57 Cyclic receive - bit 0.1 BU1/BU2















72 Enabled control command Enabled control command ON <<

Dependent on the control function

73 Enabled control command ON <

74 Enabled control command OFF

75 Enabled control command ON >

76 Enabled control command ON >>

77 Reserved

78 Reserved

79 Reserved


Table A-3: Socket assignment table - digital (cont.)

SIMOCODE pro

A-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01

Tables

80 Contactor controls Contactor control 1 QE1


81 Contactor control 2 QE2




85 Reserved

86 Reserved

87 Reserved

88 Lamp controls Display - QLE<< (ON<<)


89 Display - QLE< (ON<)

90 Display - QLA (OFF)

91 Display - QLE> (ON>)

92 Display - QLE>> (ON>>)

93 Display - QLS (fault) BU1/BU2

94 Reserved

95 Reserved

96 Status messages - General Status - General fault BU1/BU2

97 Status - General warning BU1/BU2

98 Status - Device BU1/BU2

99 Status - Bus BU1/BU2

100 Status - PLC/DCS BU1/BU2

101 Status - Motor current flowing IM

102 Reserved

103 Reserved

104 Status messages - Controlling Status - ON <<


105 Status - ON <

106 Status - OFF

107 Status - ON >

108 Status - ON >>

109 Status - Start active BU1/BU2

110 Status - Interlocking time active All reversing starters and positioners

111 Status - Switching interval active Star-delta, Dahlander, Pole-changing switch

112 Status - Runs in open direction


113 Status - Runs in closed direction

114 Status - FC

115 Status - FO

116 Status - TC

117 Status - TO

118 Status - Cold starting (TPF) BU1/BU2

119 Status - OPO BU2

120 Status - Remote mode of operation BU1/BU2




Tables

121 Status messages - Protection Status - Emergency start executed IM

122 Status - Cooling down time active IM

123 Status - Pause time active IM

124 Status messages - Miscellaneous Status - Device test active BU1/BU2

125 Status - Phase sequence 1-2-3 UM

126 Status - Phase sequence 3-2-1 UM

127 Reserved

128 Events - Protection Event - Overload operation IM

129 Event - Unbalance IM

130 Event - Overload IM

131 Event - Overload + phase failure IM

132 Event - Internal earth fault IM

133 Event - External earth fault EM

134 Event - Warning ext. earth fault EM

135 Event - Thermistor overload Th

136 Event - Thermistor short circuit Th

137 Event - Thermistor open circuit Th

138 Event - TM warning T> TM

139 Event - TM tripping T> TM

140 Event - TM sensor error TM

141 Event - TM Out of range TM

142 Reserved

143 Reserved

144 Events - Level monitoring Event - Warning I> IM

145 Event - Warning I< IM

146 Event - Warning P> UM

147 Event - Warning P< UM

148 Event - Warning cos phi< UM

149 Event - Warning U< UM

150 Event - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA> AM

151 Event - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA< AM

152 Event - Tripping I> IM

153 Event - Tripping I< IM

154 Event - Tripping P> UM

155 Event - Tripping P< UM

156 Event - Tripping cos phi< UM

157 Event - Tripping U< UM

158 Event - Tripping 0/4 - 20 mA> AM

159 Event - Tripping 0/4 - 20 mA< AM

160 Event - Blocking IM

161 Reserved

162 Reserved

163 Event - No start permitted BU1/BU2

164 Event - Number of starts > BU1/BU2



SIMOCODE pro

A-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01

Tables

165 Event - Another start permitted BU1/BU2

166 Event - Motor operating hours > BU1/BU2

167 Event - Motor stop time > BU1/BU2

168 Event - Limit value 1 BU2




172 Events - Miscellaneous Event - External fault 1 BU1/BU2

173 Event - External fault 2 BU1/BU2



176 Event - External fault 5 BU2

177 Event - External fault 6 BU2

178 Reserved

179 Reserved

180 Event - Analog module open circuit AM

181 Reserved

182 Reserved

183 Reserved

184 Events - Timestamp function Event - Timestamp function active+ok BU2

185 Reserved

186 Reserved

187 Reserved

188 Events - System interface Event - Configured operator panel is missing BU1/BU2

189 Reserved

190 Reserved

191 Reserved

192 Faults - General Fault - HW fault basic unit BU1/BU2

193 Fault - Module fault (module e.g. IM, DM) BU1/BU2

194 Fault - Temporary components (e.g. memory module)

BU1/BU2

195 Fault - Configuration fault BU1/BU2

196 Fault - Parameterization BU1/BU2

197 Fault - Bus BU1/BU2

198 Fault - PLC/DCS BU1/BU2

199 Reserved

200 Faults - Controlling Fault - Execution time ON

Not for overload relays201 Fault - Execution time OFF

202 Fault - F ON

203 Fault - F OFF

204 Fault - Blocked positioner Positioner

205 Fault - Double 0 Valve/positioner

206 Fault - Double 1 Valve/positioner

207 Fault - End position Valve/positioner




Tables

208 Fault - Antivalence Positioner

209 Fault - Cold starting (TPF) error BU1/BU2

210 Fault - UVO error BU2

211 Fault - OPO error BU2

212 Reserved

213 Reserved

214 Reserved

215 Reserved

216 Freely programmable elements Truth table 1 3I/1O output BU1/BU2

217 Truth table 2 3I/1O output BU1/BU2

218 Truth table 3 3I/1O output BU1/BU2

219 Truth table 4 3I/1O output BU2





224 Truth table 9 5I/2O output 1 BU2

225 Truth table 9 5I/2O output 2 BU2

226 Reserved

227 Reserved

228 Reserved

229 Reserved

230 Reserved

231 Reserved

232 Timer 1 output BU1/BU2

233 Timer 2 output BU1/BU2

234 Timer 3 output BU2

235 Timer 4 output BU2

236 Counter 1 output BU1/BU2

237 Counter 2 output BU1/BU2

238 Counter 3 output BU2

239 Counter 4 output BU2

240 Signal conditioning 1 output BU1/BU2

241 Signal conditioning 2 output BU1/BU2

242 Signal conditioning 3 output BU2

243 Signal conditioning 4 output BU2

244 Non-volatile element 1 output BU1/BU2

245 Non-volatile element 2 output BU1/BU2

246 Non-volatile element 3 output BU2

247 Non-volatile element 4 output BU2

248 Flashing 1 output BU1/BU2



251 Flickering 1 output BU1/BU2



SIMOCODE pro

A-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01

Tables



254 Reserved

255 Reserved




Tables

A.4 Socket Assignment Table - Analog

This table contains all assignment numbers (No.) of the sockets (analog). You only need these assignment numbers if you, for example, use a user program to fill data records and write these back. All inputs for analog data can only process values of type "Word" (2 bytes). In order to also be able to process values of type "Byte", the following applies:• the byte value is processed as a low byte, the high byte is always 0.

No. Designation Unit Information

0 Not connected BU1/BU2

1 Reserved

2 Reserved

3 Reserved

4 Timer 1 - actual value 100 ms. BU1/BU2

5 Timer 2 - actual value 100 ms. BU1/BU2

6 Timer 3 - actual value 100 ms. BU2

7 Timer 4 - actual value 100 ms. BU2

8 Timer 1 - actual value BU1/BU2

9 Timer 2 - actual value BU1/BU2

10 Timer 3 - actual value BU2

11 Timer 4 - actual value BU2

12 Reserved

13 Reserved

14 Reserved

15 Reserved

16 max. current I_max 1%/Ie IM

17 Current I_L1 1%/Ie IM



20 Phase unbalance 1% IM

21 Reserved

22 Reserved

23 Reserved

24 Voltage U_L1 1 V UM



27 Cos phi 1% UM

28 Reserved

29 Reserved

30 Reserved

31 Reserved

32 Heating up of the motor model 2% IM

33 Time to trip 100 ms. IM

34 Recovery time 100 ms. IM

Table A-4: Socket assignment table - analog

SIMOCODE pro

A-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01

Tables

1) S7 format: 0/4 mA=0 20 mA=27648

35 Last tripping current 1%/Ie IM

36 TM - temperature 1 K TM

37 TM - temperature 1 1 K TM



40 Permitted starts - actual value BU1/BU2

41 Stop time 1h BU1/BU2

42 Reserved

43 Reserved

44 AM - input 1 See 1) AM



47 Reserved

48 Acyclic receive - Analog value BU1/BU2

49 Cyclic receive - Analog value BU2

50 Reserved

51 Reserved

52 Motor operating hours - H word

1s

BU1/BU2

53 Motor operating hours - L word BU1/BU2

54 Int. motor operating hours - H word BU1/BU2

55 Int. motor operating hours - L word BU1/BU2

56 Device operating hours - H word BU1/BU2

57 Device operating hours - L word BU1/BU2

58 Number of starts - H word BU1/BU2

59 Number of starts - L word BU1/BU2

60 Int. number of starts right - H word BU1/BU2

61 Int. number of starts right - L word BU1/BU2

62 Int. number of starts left - H word BU1/BU2

63 Int. number of starts left - L word BU1/BU2

64 Reserved

.. Reserved

69 Reserved

70 Real power P - H word1 W

BU2

71 Real power P - L word BU2

72 Apparent power S - H word1 VA

BU2

73 Apparent power S - L word BU2

75 Reserved

.. Reserved

255 Reserved

No. Designation Unit Information

Table A-4: Socket assignment table - analog (cont.)


Tables

A.5 Detailed Events of the Slave Diagnostics

The following table contains the detailed events of the slave diagnostics for the status messages and the process alarm. This information is also contai-ned in data record 92.

Byte.Bit Status message Information

0.0 Faults - Controlling Fault - Execution ON command BU1/BU2

0.1 Fault - Execution OFF command BU1/BU2

0.2 Fault - F ON BU1/BU2

0.3 Fault - F OFF BU1/BU2

0.4 Fault - Block. Positioner BU1/BU2

0.5 Fault - Double 0 BU1/BU2

0.6 Fault - Double 1 BU1/BU2

0.7 Fault - End position BU1/BU2

1.0 Fault - Antivalence BU1/BU2

1.1 Fault - Cold starting (TPF) error BU1/BU2

1.2 Fault - UVO error BU2

1.3 Fault - OPO error BU2

1.4 Reserved

2.0 Reserved

2.1 Faults - Protection Fault - Unbalance IM/UM

2.2 Fault - Overload IM/UM

2.3 Fault - Overload + phase failure IM/UM

2.4 Fault - Int. earth fault IM/UM

2.5 Fault - Ext. earth fault EM

2.6 Reserved

2.7 Fault - Thermistor overload Th

3.0 Fault - Thermistor short circuit Th

3.1 Fault - Thermistor open circuit Th

3.2 Reserved

3.3 Fault - TM tripping T> TM

3.4 Fault - TM sensor error TM

3.5 Fault - TM Out of range TM

3.6 Reserved

4.0 Faults - Level monitoring

Fault - Tripping I> IM/UM

4.1 Fault - Tripping I< IM/UM

4.2 Fault- Tripping P> UM

4.3 Fault- Tripping P< UM

4.4 Fault - Tripping cos phi< UM

4.5 Fault - Tripping U< UM

4.6 Fault - Tripping 0/4 - 20 mA> AM

4.7 Fault - Tripping 0/4 - 20 mA< AM

5.0 Fault - Blocking IM/UM

5.1 Reserved

Table A-5: Detailed slave diagnostic events

SIMOCODE pro

A-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01

Tables

5.4 Fault - Number of starts > BU1/BU2

5.5 Reserved

6.0 Faults - Miscellaneous

Fault - Ext. fault 1 BU1/BU2

6.1 Fault - Ext. fault 2 BU1/BU2



6.4 Fault - Ext. fault 5 BU2

6.5 Fault - Ext. fault 6 BU2

6.6 Reserved

6.7 Reserved

7.0 Fault - Analog module open circuit AM

7.1 Fault - Test shutdown BU1/BU2

7.2 Reserved

8.0 Warnings - Protection Warning - Overload operation IM/UM

8.1 Warning - Unbalance IM/UM

8.2 Warning - Overload IM/UM

8.3 Warning - Overload + phase failure IM/UM

8.4 Warning - Internal earth fault IM/UM

8.5 Warning - External earth fault EM

8.6 Reserved

8.7 Warning - Thermistor overload Th

9.0 Warning - Thermistor short circuit Th

9.1 Warning - Thermistor open circuit Th

9.2 Warning - TM warning T> TM

9.3 Reserved

9.4 Warning - M sensor fault TM

9.5 Warning - TM Out of range TM

9.6 Reserved

10.0 Warnings - Level monitoring

Warning - Warning I> IM/UM

10.1 Warning - Warning I< IM/UM

10.2 Warning - Warning P> UM

10.3 Warning - Warning P< UM

10.4 Warning - Warning cos phi < UM

10.5 Warning - Warning U< UM

10.6 Warning - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA> AM

10.7 Warning - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA< AM

11.0 Warning - Blocking IM/UM

11.1 Reserved

11.3 Warning - No start permitted BU1/BU2

11.4 - Number of motor starts> BU1/BU2

11.5 Warning - Another start permitted BU1/BU2

11.6 Warning - Motor operating hours > BU1/BU2

11.7 Warning - Motor stop time > BU1/BU2


Table A-5: Detailed slave diagnostic events (cont.)


Tables

12.0 Warnings - Miscellaneous Warning - Ext. fault 1 BU1/BU2

12.1 Warning - Ext. fault 2 BU1/BU2



12.4 Warning - Ext. fault 5 BU2

12.5 Warning - Ext. fault 6 BU2

12.6 Reserved

12.7 Reserved

13.0 Warning - Analog module open circuit BU2

13.1 Reserved

14.0 Reserved

14.1 Status messages - Protection Status - Emergency start executed IM

14.2 Status - Cooling down time active IM

14.3 Status - Pause time active IM

14.4 Reserved

14.5 Reserved

14.6 Status messages - Controlling Status - Cold starting (TPF) BU1/BU2

14.7 Reserved

15.0 Events - Parameterization

Event - Parameter blocking during start-up active BU1/BU2

15.1 Event - Parameter change not permitted in the cur-rent operating state

BU1/BU2

15.2 Event - Device does not support the required functions

BU1/BU2

15.3 Event - Parameter faulty BU1/BU2

15.4 Signal - Wrong password BU1/BU2

15.5 Event - Password protection active BU1/BU2

15.6 Event - Basic factory default setting BU1/BU2

15.7 Event - Parameterization active BU1/BU2


Table A-5: Detailed slave diagnostic events (cont.)

SIMOCODE pro

A-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01

Data Formats and Data Records BIn this chapter

In this chapter you will find information about the data records of SIMOCODE pro.

Target groups


Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge:• good knowledge about writing and reading data records• good knowledge of SIMOCODE pro.

Data records - overview

Table B-1: Data records - Overview

Data record No. Description Read/write

1 S7 system diagnostics Read

63 Recording analog values Read

67 Process image of the outputs Read

69 Process image of the inputs Read

72 Fault memory Read

92 Device diagnostics (faults, warnings, events)

Read

94 Measured values Read

95 Service/statistical data Read/write

130 Basic unit parameter 1 (BU1 BU2) Read/write

131 Basic unit parameter 2 (BU1 BU2) Read/write

132 Extended device parameter 1 (BU2) Read/write

133 Extended device parameter 2 (BU2) Read/write

139 Marking Read/write

160 Communication parameters Read/write

165 Designation Read/write

202 Acyclic receive Read/write

203 Acyclic send Read

224 Password protection Write

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 B-1

Data Formats and Data Records

B.1 Handling Data Records

This section contains helpful information about how best to handle data records.

B.1.1 Writing/reading Data Records

Access to data records via slot and index

• Slot: access via slot 1• Index: data record number.

Writing/reading data records with STEP7

You can access the data records from the user program.• Writing data records:

S7 DPV1 master: by calling SFB 53 "WR_REC" or SFC 58 S7 master: by calling SFC 58

• Reading data records: S7 DPV1 master: by calling SFB 52 "RD_REC" or SFC 59 S7 master: by calling SFC 59.

Further information

You will find further information on the SFBs• in the "System Software for S7-300/400, System and Standard Functions"

reference manual• in the STEP7 online help.

Byte arrangements

When data which is longer than one byte is saved, the bytes are arranged as follows ("big endian"):

Figure B-1: Byte arrangement in the "big endian" format

Byte 0

Byte 1

High byte

Low byte

High byte

Low byte

High byte

Low byte

High word

Low word

Data type

Byte 0

Byte 1

Byte 0

Byte 1

Byte 2

Byte 3

Byte 0

Byte 1

Byte arrangements

Byte

Word

Double word (D-word)

SIMOCODE pro B-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01


B.1.2 Abbreviations

The following abbreviations are used in the tables:

B.1.3 Specifications

The following specifications apply in the tables:

Figure B-2: Specifications

Settings are valid/can only be made when the corresponding system com-ponents are used.


BU1 Basic unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro C)

BU2 Basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V)



DM 1 Digital module 1

DM 2 Digital module 2

OP Operator panel

AM Analog module



Th Thermistor

CF Control function

Cycl. Cyclic

Acycl. Acyclic

Table B-2: Abbreviations

Specification Type Range Unit Information

Reserved Byte[4]

cos phi Byte 0 .. 100 1% BU2

Reserved Byte[5]

Max. current Imax Word 0 .. 65535 1% / Ie BU1/BU2

Entry relevant for basic unit 1 and basic unit 2

Example

Entries in italics are not relevant (reserved)and, when writing,

should be filled with "0"

Parameters can be changed while running.



B.2 Data Record 0/1 - S7 System Diagnostics

Byte

Bit

DR0 DR1 Specification Type No error Error Information

0.0 X X Module fault/OK Bit 0 1

0.1 X X Internal fault Bit 0 0

0.2 X X External fault Bit 0 1

0.3 X X Channel fault Bit 0 1

0.4 X X External auxiliary voltage missing Bit 0 0

0.5 X X Front panel plug missing Bit 0 0

0.6 X X Module not parameterized Bit 0 0

0.7 X X Module parameter false Bit 0 0

1.0 X X Module type Bit[4] 3 3

1.4 X X Channel information available Bit 1 1

1.5 X X Application information available Bit 0 0

1.6 X X Substitute diagnostic alarm Bit 0 0

1.7 X X Reserved = 0 Bit 0 0

2.0 X X Application module false/missing Bit 0 0

2.1 X X Communication fault Bit 0 0

2.2 X X Operating status (0=RUN, 1=STOP)

Bit 0 0

2.3 X X Time monitoring activated Bit 0 0

2.4 X X Internal module supply voltage failed

Bit 0 0

2.5 X X Battery flat (BATTF) Bit 0 0

2.6 X X Standby supply failed Bit 0 0


3.0 X X Rack failure (detected by IM) Bit 0 0

3.1 X X Processor failure Bit 0 0

3.2 X X EPROM error Bit 0 0

3.3 X X RAM error Bit 0 0

3.4 X X ADU/DAU error Bit 0 0

3.5 X X Blown fuse Bit 0 0

3.6 X X PRAL missing Bit 0 0


4.0 X Channel type Byte 0x7D 0x7D

5.0 X Length of the channel-specific diagnostics

Byte 0x20 0x20

6.0 X Number of channels Byte 0x01 0x01

7.0 X Channel fault vector (one bit per channel)

Byte 0x01 0x01

8.0 X Reserved Bit 0 0

8.1 X Short circuit Bit 0 0

8.2 X Undervoltage Bit 0 0

8.3 X Overvoltage Bit 0 0

8.4 X Overload Bit 0 0

8.5 X Overtemperature Bit 0 0



Table B-3: Data record 0/1 - S7 system diagnostics

ByteBit

DR0 DR1 Specification Type No error Error Information

8.6 X Wire break Bit 0 0

8.7 X Upper limit overshot Bit 0 0

9.0 X Lower limit undershot Bit 0 0

9.1 X Error Bit 0 X Error F9







10.0 X Parameterization error Bit 0 X Error F16

10.1 X Sensor or load voltage missing Bit 0 0

10.2 X Fuse defective Bit 0 0


10.4 X Ground fault Bit 0 0

10.5 X Reference channel fault Bit 0 0

10.6 X Process alarm missing Bit 0 0

10.7 X Actuator warning Bit 0 0

11.0 X Actuator switch-off Bit 0 0

11.1 X Safety-related switch-off Bit 0 0

11.2 X External fault Bit 0 0

11.3 X Non-specific fault Bit 0 0





12.0 X Reserved Byte[4] 0 0



B.3 Data Record 63 - Recording of Analog Values

Table B-4: Data record 63 - Recording of analog values

The unit of the measured value is dependent on the assigned analog value. You will find all the available analog values with their units in Kapitel A.4 "Socket Assignment Table - Analog".

B.4 Data Record 67 - Process Image of the Outputs

Byte.Bit Specification Type Range Information

0.0 Reserved Word

2.0 Reserved Byte

3.0 Recording active Bit 0, 1 BU2

3.1 Trigger event occured Bit 0, 1 BU2

3.2 Reserved Bit[6] 0

4.0 Measured value (0) Word 0 ... 65535 BU2


...


124.0 Reserved Byte[76] 0

Byte.Bit Specification Presetting

(also see parameters)

Type Infor-

mation

0.0 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.0 Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] ON< Bit

BU1/BU2

0.1 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.1 Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] OFF Bit

0.2 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.2 Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] ON> Bit

0.3 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.3 Test 1 Bit

0.4 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.4 Motor protection - Emergency start Bit

0.5 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.5 Mode selector S1 Bit

0.6 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.6 Reset 1 Bit

0.7 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.7 Not assigned Bit









2.0 to 3.7 Cyclic receive - Analog value Not assigned Word BU2

Table B-5: Data record 67 - Process image of the outputs



B.5 Data Record 69 - Process Image of the Inputs

Byte.Bit Specification Presetting(also see parameters)

Type Information

0.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.0 Status - ON < Bit

BU1/BU2

0.1 Cyclic send - Bit0.1 Status - OFF Bit

0.2 Cyclic send - Bit 0.2 Status - ON > Bit

0.3 Cyclic send - Bitt 0.3 Event - Overload operation Bit

0.4 Cyclic send - Bit 0.4 Status - Interlocking time active Bit

0.5 Cyclic send - Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode of operation Bit

0.6 Cyclic send - Bit 0.6 Status - General fault Bit

0.7 Cyclic send - Bit 0.7 Status - General warning Bit

1.0 Cyclic send - Bit 1.0 Not assigned Bit








2.0 PLC/DCS analog. input 1 Max. current I_max Word

4.0 PLC/DCS analog. input 2 Not assigned Word BU2



Table B-6: Data record 69 - Process image of the inputs



B.6 Data Record 72 - Fault Memory

Table B-7: Data record 72 - Fault memory

Timestamp

The operating hours of the device are used as a timestamp (resolution: 1 s).

Type/error number

If the type has the value 71, the entry contains a fault: Refer to the error numbers for detailed information: You will find the meaning in Kapitel B.7 "Data Record 92 - Device Diagnostics" in the "Error number" column of the "Data record 92 - diagnostics". If the type has the value 255, the entry displays "Mains ON". In this case, the error number contains the number of mains ON, reduced by 1 (0 = 1x mains ON, ...).

Byte.Bit Entry Specification Type Information

0.0

1

Timestamp D-word BU1/BU2

4.0 Type Byte BU1/BU2

5.0 Error number Byte BU1/BU2

6.0

2




...

120.0

21






B.7 Data Record 92 - Device Diagnostics

Byte.Bit Specification Information DP

Diagn.*)Error No.

***)

0.0 Reserved

1.0 Status messages - General

Status - General fault BU1/BU2

1.1 Status - General warning BU1/BU2

1.2 Status - Device BU1/BU2

1.3 Status - Bus BU1/BU2

1.4 Status - PLC/DCS BU1/BU2

1.5 Status - Motor current flowing IM

1.6 Reserved

2.0 Status messages - Controlling

Status - ON <<


2.1 Status - ON <

2.2 Status - OFF

2.3 Status - ON >

2.4 Status - ON >>

2.5 Status - Start active BU1/BU2

2.6 Status - Interlocking time active All reversing starters and positioners

2.7 Status - Switching interval active Star-delta, Dahlander, pole-changing swit-ches

3.0 Status - Runs in open direction


3.1 Status - Runs in closed direction

3.2 Status - FC

3.3 Status - FO

3.4 Status - TC

3.5 Status - TO

3.6 Status - Cold starting (TPF) BU1/BU2 M

3.7 Status - OPO BU2

4.0 Status - Remote mode of operation BU1/BU2

4.1 Status messages - Protection

Status - Emergency start executed IM M

4.2 Status - Cooling down time active IM M

4.3 Status - Pause time active IM

4.4 Status messages - Miscellaneous

Status - Device test active BU1/BU2

4.5 Status - Phase sequence 1-2-3 UM

4.6 Status - Phase sequence 3-2-1 UM

4.7 Reserved

5.0 Events - Protec-tion

Event - Overload operation IM

Table B-8: Data record 92 - Diagnostics



5.1 Event - Unbalance IM

5.2 Event - Overload IM

5.3 Event - Overload + phase failure IM

5.4 Event - Internal earth fault IM

5.5 Event - External earth fault EM

5.6 Event - Warning ext. earth fault EM

5.7 Event - Thermistor overload Th

6.0 Event - Thermistor short circuit Th

6.1 Event - Thermistor open circuit Th

6.2 Event - TM warning T> TM

6.3 Event - TM tripping T> TM

6.4 Event - TM sensor error TM

6.5 Event - TM Out of range TM

6.6 Reserved

7.0 Events - Level monitoring

Event - Warning I> IM

7.1 Event - Warning I< IM

7.2 Event - Warning P> UM

7.3 Event - Warning P< UM

7.4 Event - Warning cos phi< UM

7.5 Event - Warning U< UM

7.6 Event - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA> AM

7.7 Event - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA< AM

8.0 Event - Tripping I> IM

8.1 Event - Tripping I< IM

8.2 Event - Tripping P> UM

8.3 Event - Tripping P< UM

8.4 Event - Tripping cos phi< UM

8.5 Event - Tripping U< UM

8.6 Event - Tripping 0/4 - 20 mA> AM

8.7 Event - Tripping 0/4 - 20 mA< AM

9.0 Event - Blocking IM

9.1 Reserved

9.3 Event - No start permitted BU1/BU2

9.4 Event - Number of starts > BU1/BU2

9.5 Event - Another start permitted BU1/BU2

9.6 Event - Motor operating hours > BU1/BU2

9.7 Event - Motor stop time > BU1/BU2

10.0 Event - Limit value 1 BU2





Diagn.*)Error No.

***)

Table B-8: Data record 92 - Diagnostics (cont.)



10.4 Events - Miscellaneous

Event - Ext. fault 1 BU1/BU2

10.5 Event - Ext. fault 2 BU1/BU2



11.0 Event - Ext. fault 5 BU2

11.1 Event - Ext. fault 6 BU2

11.2 Reserved

11.3 Reserved

11.4 Event - Analog module open circuit AM

11.5 Reserved

12.0 Events - Timestamp function

Event - Timestamp function active+ok

BU2

12.1 Reserved

12.4 Events - System interface

Event - Configured operator panel missing

BU1/BU2

12.5 Event - Module not supported BU1/BU2

12.6 Reserved

13.0 Events - Memory module

Event - Memory module read in BU1/BU2

13.1 Event - Memory module program-med

BU1/BU2

13.2 Event - Memory module deleted BU1/BU2

13.3 Reserved

13.7 Events - Addres-sing plug

Event - Addressing plug read in BU1/BU2

14.0 Events - Parame-terization

Event - Parameter blocking during start-up active

BU1/BU2 M

14.1 Event - Parameter change not per-mitted in the current operating state

BU1/BU2 M

14.2 Event - Device does not support the required functions

BU1/BU2 M

14.3 Event - Parameter faulty BU1/BU2 M

14.4 Event - Wrong password BU1/BU2 M

14.5 Event - Password protection active BU1/BU2

14.6 Event - Basic factory default setting BU1/BU2

14.7 Event - Parameterization active BU1/BU2

15.0 Event - prm number error (bytes) **) BU1/BU2

16.0 Reserved

17.0 Warnings - Protec-tion

Warning - Overload operation IM W

17.1 Warning - Asymmety IM W

17.2 Warning - Overload IM W

17.3 Warning - Overload + phase failure IM W


Diagn.*)Error No.

***)




17.4 Warning - Internal earth fault IM W

17.5 Warning - External earth fault EM W

17.6 Reserved

17.7 Warning - Thermistor overload Th W

18.0 Warning - Thermistor short circuit Th W

18.1 Warning - Thermistor open circuit Th W

18.2 Warning - TM warning T> TM W

18.3 Reserved

18.4 Warning - TM sensor error TM W

18.5 Warning - TM Out of range TM W

18.6 Reserved

19.0 Warnings - Level monitoring

Warning - Warning I> IM W

19.1 Warning - Warning I< IM W

19.2 Warning - Warning P> UM W

19.3 Warning - Warning P< UM W

19.4 Warning - Warning cos phi < UM W

19.5 Warning - Warning U< UM W

19.6 Warning - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA> AM W

19.7 Warning - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA< AM W

20.0 Warning - Blocking IM W

20.1 Reserved

20.3 Warning - No start permitted BU1/BU2 W

20.4 Warning - Number of motor starts> BU1/BU2 W

20.5 Warning - Another start permitted BU1/BU2 W

20.6 Warning - Motor operating hours > BU1/BU2 W

20.7 Warning - Motor stop time > BU1/BU2 W

21.0 Warnings - Miscellaneous

Warning - Ext. fault 1 BU1/BU2 W

21.1 Warning - Ext. fault 2 BU1/BU2 W



21.4 Warning - Ext. fault 5 BU2 W

21.5 Warning - Ext. fault 6 BU2 W

21.6 Reserved

21.7 Reserved

22.0 Warning - Analog module open cir-cuit

AM W

22.1 Reserved

23.0 Faults - General

Fault - HW fault basic unit BU1/BU2 F9 0

23.1 Fault - Module fault (e.g. module IM, DM)

BU1/BU2 F9 1


Diagn.*)Error No.

***)




23.2 Fault - Temporary components (e.g. memory module)

BU1/BU2 F9 2

23.3 Fault - Configuration fault BU1/BU2 F16 3

23.4 Fault - Parameterization BU1/BU2 F16 4

23.5 Fault - Bus BU1/BU2 5

23.6 Fault - PLC/DCS BU1/BU2 6

23.7 Reserved

24.0 Faults - Controlling

Fault - Runtime ON CF = positioner FAU 8

24.1 Fault - Execution OFF command CF = positioner FAU 9

24.2 Fault - F ON CF = positioner FAU 10

24.3 Fault - F OFF CF = positioner FAU 11

24.4 Fault - Blocked positioner CF = positioner FAU 12

24.5 Fault - Double 0 CF = positioner FAU 13

24.6 Fault - Double 1 CF = positioner FAU 14

24.7 Fault - End position CF = positioner FAU 15

25.0 Fault - Antivalence CF = positioner FAU 16

25.1 Fault - Cold starting (TPF) error BU1/BU2 FAU 17

25.2 Fault - UVO error BU2 FAU 18

25.3 Fault - OPO error BU2 FAU 19

25.4 Reserved

26.0 Reserved

26.1 Faults - Protection Fault - Unbalance IM FAU 25

26.2 Fault - Overload IM FAU 26

26.3 Fault - Overload + phase failure IM FAU 27

26.4 Fault - Int. earth fault IM FAU 28

26.5 Fault - Int. earth fault EM FAU 29

26.6 Reserved

26.7 Fault - Thermistor overload Th FAU 31

27.0 Fault - Thermistor short circuit Th FAU 32

27.1 Fault - Thermistor open circuit Th FAU 33

27.2 Reserved

27.3 Fault - TM tripping T> TM FAU 35

27.4 Fault - TM sensor error TM FAU 36

27.5 Fault - TM Out of range TM FAU 37

27.6 Reserved

28.0 Faults - Level monitoring

Fault - Tripping I> IM FAU 40

28.1 Fault - Tripping I< IM FAU 41

28.2 Fault- Tripping P> UM FAU 42

28.3 Fault- Tripping P< UM FAU 43

28.4 Fault - Tripping cos phi< UM FAU 44

28.5 Fault - Tripping U< UM FAU 45

28.6 Fault - Tripping 0/4 - 20 mA> AM FAU 46


Diagn.*)Error No.

***)




*The "DP Diagn." column contains the bits which are additionally available in the diagnostics using PROFIBUS DP:• FAU Fault• S: Signal• W: Warning• F9, F16:Error types

See also Kapitel A.5 "Detailed Events of the Slave Diagnostics".

**) Event - prm error number (bytes): If parameterization is not possible, the number of the parameter group (prm group) which caused the error is transmitted here. You will find the parame-ter groups in the parameter data records 130 to 133.

Figure B-3: Example of parameter group

***) See "Error numbers" in Kapitel B.6 "Data Record 72 - Fault Memory".

28.7 Fault - Tripping 0/4 - 20 mA< AM FAU 47

29.0 Fault - Blocking IM FAU 48

29.1 Reserved

29.4 Fault - Number of starts > BU1/BU2 FAU 52

29.5 Reserved

30.0 Faults - Miscellaneous

Fault - External fault 1 BU1/BU2 FAU 56

30.1 Fault - External fault 2 BU1/BU2 FAU 57



30.4 Fault - External fault 5 BU2 FAU 60

30.5 Fault - External fault 6 BU2 FAU 61

30.6 Reserved

30.7 Reserved

31.0 Fault - Analog module open circuit AM FAU 64

31.1 Fault - Test shutdown BU1/BU2 FAU 65

31.2 Reserved


Diagn.*)Error No.

***)


Byte.Bit Specification

(Prm group)

0.0 Reserved

4.0 Device configuration (see above) (12) Parameter group 12

. .

.



B.8 Data Record 94 - Measured Values

1) S7 format: 0/4mA = 0 20mA = 27648

2) Representation "Heating up the motor model": Value always refers to symm. trip level, representation in 2% increments in bits 6..0 (range 0 to 254%), bit 7 shows unbalance (fixed level 50%).

3) Representation in Kelvin.

Byte.Bit Specification Type Range Unit Infor-mation

0.0 Reserved Byte[4]

4.0 Heating up the motor model Byte 0 .. 255 See 2) IM

5.0 Phase unbalance Byte 0 .. 100 1 % IM

6.0 Cos phi Byte 0 .. 100 1 % UM


12.0 Max. current Imax Word 0 .. 65535 1% / Ie IM

14.0 Current IL1 Word 0 .. 65535 1% / Ie IM



20.0 Last tripping current Word 0 .. 65535 1% / Ie IM

22.0 Time to trip Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms IM

24.0 Cooling down time Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms IM

26.0 Voltage UL1 Word 0 .. 65535 1 V UM



32.0 AM - Output Word 0 .. 27648

See 1)

AM

34.0 AM - Input 1 Word 0 .. 27648 AM

36.0 AM - Input 2 Word 0 .. 27648 AM

38.0 Reserved

40.0 Max. TM - Temperature Word 0 .. 65535 1 K see 3) TM

42.0 TM - Temperature 1 Word 0 .. 65535 1 K see 3) TM




52.0 Real power P D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 W UM

56.0 Apparent power S D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 VA UM


Table B-9: Data record 94 - Measured values



B.9 Data Record 95 - Service/Statistical Data

Writing the service/statistical data

Writing is only possible if the password protection is not active.

Additional abbreviations

r/w: value can be written/changedr: value can only be read

Byte.Bit Specification Type Range Unit Infor-

mation

0.0 Reserved Byte[4] 04.0 Permitted starts - Actual value Byte 0 .. 255 r BU1/BU25.0 Reserved Byte8.0 Number of parameterizations Word 0 .. 65535 r BU1/BU210.0 Number of overload trippings Word 0 .. 65535 r/w BU1/BU212.0 Number of internal overload trip-

pingsWord 0 .. 65535 r BU1/BU2

14.0 Stop time Word 0 .. 65535 1 h r/w BU1/BU216.0 Timer 1 - Actual value Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms. r BU1/BU218.0 Timer 2 - Actual value Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms. r BU1/BU220.0 Timer 3 - Actual value Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms. r BU222.0 Timer 4 - Actual value Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms. r BU224.0 Timer 1 - Actual value Word 0 .. 65535 r BU1/BU226.0 Timer 2 - Actual value Word 0 .. 65535 r BU1/BU228.0 Timer 3 - Actual value Word 0 .. 65535 r BU230.0 Timer 4 - Actual value Word 0 .. 65535 r BU232.0 Reserved Byte40.0 Motor operating hours D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 s r/w BU1/BU244.0 Int. motor operating hours D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 s r BU1/BU248.0 Device operating hours D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 s r BU1/BU252.0 Numer of starts D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF r/w BU1/BU256.0 Internal number of starts right D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF r BU1/BU260.0 Internal number of starts left D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF r BU1/BU264.0 Reserved Byte[12]

Table B-10: Data record 95 - Diagnostics - Statistical data



B.10 Data Record 130 - Basic Device Parameters 1

Byte

Bit

Specification

(Prm group)

Type Range De-

fault

Note Infor-

mation


4.0 Device configuration (12) Byte[8] BU1/BU2

4.0 Device class Byte 5, 9 5 = BU19 = BU2

BU1/BU2BU2

5.0 Thermistor (Th) Bit 0, 1 1 = active; thermistor in the BU BU1/BU2

5.1 Reserved Bit[7]

6.0 Operator panel (OP) Bit 0, 1 BU1/BU2

6.1 Analog module (AM) Bit 0, 1 BU2

6.2 Temperature module (TM) Bit 0, 1 BU2

6.3 Earth-fault module (EM) Bit 0, 1 BU2

6.4 Digital module 1 (DM1) Bit[2] 0 .. 2 0 = no digital module1 = monostable2 = bistable

BU2

6.6 Digital module 2 (DM2) Bit[2] 0 .. 2 BU2

7.0 Reserved Bit[8]

8.0 Current measuring module (IM)

Bit[7] 0 .. 5 0 = no current measuring1 = 0.3 A - 3 A2 = 2.4 A -25 A3 = 10 A - 100 A4 = 20 A - 200 A5 = 63 A - 630 A

BU1/BU2

8.7 Voltage measuring (UM) Bit 0, 1 BU2

9.0 Reserved

10.0 Control function (CF) 0x00 0x10 0x11 0x12 0x20 0x21 0x30 0x31 0x40 0x41 0x50 0x60 0x61 0x62 0x63 0x64 0x70 0x71

0x00 = overload 0x10 = direct starter 0x11 = reversing starter 0x12 =linked switchgear 0x20 = star-delta starter 0x21 = star-delta starter with reversal of the direction of rota-tion 0x30 =Dahlander 0x31 = Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation 0x40 = pole-changing switch 0x41 = pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation 0x50 = valve 0x60 =positioner 1 0x61 =positioner 2 0x62 =positioner 3 0x63 =positioner 4 0x64 =positioner 5 0x70 =soft starter 0x71 =soft starter with rever-sing contactor

BU1/BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU1 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2 BU2

11.0 Reserved Bit[8]

Table B-11: Data record 130 - Basic device parameter 1



12.0 Bit parameters (16)

12.0 No configuration fault due to OP

Bit 0, 1 0 BU1/BU2

12.1 Parameter blocking during start-up active

Bit 0, 1 1 BU1/BU2

12.2 Test/reset buttons blocked Bit 0, 1 0 BU1/BU2

12.3 Bus and PLC/DCS - Reset Bit 0, 1 0 0 = manual, 1 = automatic BU1/BU2

12.4 Reserved Bit 0

12.5 Reserved Bit 0

12.6 Reserved Bit 0

12.7 Reserved Bit 0

13.0 Diagnostics for process signals

Bit 0, 1 0 BU1/BU2

13.1 Diagnostics for process warnings

Bit 0, 1 1 BU1/BU2

13.2 Diagnostics for process faults Bit 0, 1 1 BU1/BU2

13.3 Diagnostics for device faults Bit 0, 1 1 BU1/BU2

13.4 Reserved Bit 0

13.5 Reserved Bit 0

13.6 Bus monitoring Bit 0, 1 1 BU1/BU2

13.7 PLC/DCS monitoring Bit 0, 1 1 BU1/BU2

14.0 Overload protection - Type of load

Bit 0, 1 0 0 = 3-phase, 1 = 1-phase IM

14.1 Overload protection - Reset Bit 0, 1 0 0 = manual, 1 = automatic IM

14.2 Reserved Bit 0

14.3 Save switching command Bit 0, 1 0

14.4 Non-maintained command mode

Bit 0, 1 0

14.5 Cold starting level (TPF) Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact, 1 = NC contact BU1/BU2

14.6 Type of load Bit 0, 1 0 0 = motor, 1 = resistiveload BU1/BU2

14.7 Reserved Bit 0

15.0 External fault 1 - Type Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact, 1 = NC contact BU1/BU2

15.1 External fault 2 - Type Bit 0, 1 0 BU1/BU2



15.4 External fault 1 - Activity Bit 0, 1 0 0 = always, 1 = only motor ON BU1/BU2

15.5 External fault 2 - Activity Bit 0, 1 0 BU1/BU2



Byte

Bit

Specification

(Prm group)

Type Range De-

fault

Note Infor-

mation

Table B-11: Data record 130 - Basic device parameter 1 (cont.)



16.0 Bit[2] parameters (20)

16.0 Thermistor - Overload response

Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 3

0 = deactivated 1 = signal 2 = warn 3 = switch off

Th

16.2 Thermistor - Response to sensor error

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 2 Th

16.4 Internal earth fault - Response Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0

16.6 Motor protection - Overload response

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 3

17.0 Motor protection - Overload response

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2

17.2 Motor protection - Response to unbala

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 2

17.4 Tripping response I> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0

17.6 Warning response I> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0

18.0 Tripping response I< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0

18.2 Warning response I< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0

18.4 Blocking protection - Response

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0


19.0 Monitoring the number of starts - Response to overshooting

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU1/BU2

19.2 Monitoring the number of starts - Response at pre-warning

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU1/BU2

19.4 Operating hours monitoring - Response

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU1/BU2

19.6 Stop time monitoring - Response

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU1/BU2

20.0 Ext. fault 1 - Response Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 BU1/BU2





21.2 Basic unit - Debounce time inputs

Bit[2] 0 - 3 1 Offset 6 ms BU1/BU2

21.4 Timer 1 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = with clsg. delay1 = with clsg. delay with mem.2 = with OFF delay3 = with fleet. clsg.

BU1/BU2

21.6 Timer 2 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU1/BU2

22.0 Signal conditioning 1 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = non-inverting1 = inverting2 = rising edge with memory3 = falling edge with memory

BU1/BU2

22.2 Signal conditioning 2 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU1/BU2

22.4 Non-volatile element 1 - Type

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU1/BU2


Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU1/BU2

23.0 Reserved Bit[2] 0 BU1/BU2

Byte

Bit

Specification

(Prm group)

Type Range De-

fault

Note Infor-

mation








24.0 External fault 1 - Reset also by

Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B Bit[0] = panel reset Bit[1] = automatic reset Bit[2] = remote reset Bit[3] = OFF command reset

BU1/BU2


Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B BU1/BU2


Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B BU1/BU2


Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B BU1/BU2

26.0 Limit monitor - Hysteresis for limit monitoring

Bit[4] 0 .. 15 5 BU1/BU2




28.0 Byte parameters (28)

28.0 Internal earth fault - Delay Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM

29.0 Overload protection - Class Byte 5, 10 .. 35, 40

10 BU1 BU2

30.0 Motor protection - Delay with overload operation

Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM

31.0 Motor protection - Unbalance level

Byte 0 .. 100 40 IM

32.0 Unbalance protection - Delay with unbalance

Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM

33.0 Interlocking time Byte 0 .. 255 0

34.0 F time Byte 0 .. 255 5 0 = deactivated

35.0 Trip level I> Byte 0 .. 255 0 IM

36.0 Warning level I> Byte 0 .. 255 0 IM

37.0 Trip level I< Byte 0 .. 255 0 IM

38.0 Warning level I< Byte 0 .. 255 0 IM

39.0 Blocking level Byte 0 .. 255 0 IM

40.0 Trip delay I> Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM

41.0 Warning delay I> Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM

42.0 Trip delay I< Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM

43.0 Warning delay I< Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM

44.0 Blocking delay Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM

45.0 Monitoring the number of starts - Permitted starts

Byte 1 .. 255 1 BU1 BU2

46.0 Reserved Byte 0


48.0 Truth table 1 type 3I/1O Byte 0 .. 11111111B

0 BU1/BU2

Byte

Bit

Specification

(Prm group)

Type Range De-

fault

Note Infor-

mation





0 BU1/BU2


0 BU1/BU2


52.0 Word parameters (32)

52.0 Motor protection - Cooling down time

Word 600 ..65535 3000 IM

54.0 Motor protection - Pause time Word 0 .. 65535 0 0 = deactivated IM

56.0 Run time Word 0 .. 65535 10 0 = deactivated

58.0 Monitoring the number of starts - Time range for starts

Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1 BU2

60.0 Monitoring the number of starts - Interlocking time

Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1 BU2

62.0 Stop time level > Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1 BU2

64.0 Timer 1 - Limit value Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1 BU2

66.0 Timer 2 - Limit value Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1 BU2

68.0 Counter 1 - Limit value Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1 BU2

70.0 Counter 2 - Limit value Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1 BU2

72.0 Reserved Word 0


76.0 D-word parameters (36)

76.0 Operator enables Bit[32] 0 .. 1..1B 0.0.0B

80.0 Overload protection - Set current Ie1

D-word 0 .. 63000 30 IM

84.0 Motor operating hours level > D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF

0 BU1 BU2

88.0 Reserved D-word 0

Byte

Bit

Specification

(Prm group)

Type Range De-

fault

Note Infor-

mation




B.11 Data Record 131 - Basic Device Parameter 2 (Plug )

Byte.

Bit

Specification

(Prm group)

Type Range De-

fault

Note Infor-

mation

0.0 Reserved Byte[4]4.0 Byte parameters (40)4.0 BU - Output 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2

5.0 BU - Output 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2

6.0 BU - Output 3 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2

7.0 Reserved Byte 0

8.0 OP - LED green 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 OP




12.0 OP - LED yellow 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 OP




16.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.0 Byte 0 .. 255 105 Default: Status - ON < BU1/BU2

17.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.1 Byte 0 .. 255 106 Default: Status - OFF BU1/BU2

18.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.2 Byte 0 .. 255 107 Default: Status - ON > BU1/BU2

19.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.3 Byte 0 .. 255 128 Default: Event - Over-load operation

BU1/BU2

20.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.4 Byte 0 .. 255 110 Default: Status - Interlocking time active

BU1/BU2

21.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.5 Byte 0 .. 255 120 Default: Status - Remote mode of ope-ration

BU1/BU2

22.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.6 Byte 0 .. 255 96 Default: Status - General fault

BU1/BU2

23.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.7 Byte 0 .. 255 97 Default: Status - General warning

BU1/BU2

24.0 Cyclic send - Bit 1.0 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2








32.0 Acyclic send - Bit 0.0 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2





Table B-12: Data record 131 - Basic device parameter 2














48.0 Monitoring PLC/ DCS input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2

49.0 Motor protection - Emergency start Byte 0 .. 255 60 Default: Cyclic receive - bit 0.4

IM



52.0 Mode selector S1 Byte 0 .. 255 61 Default: Cyclic receive - bit 0.5

BU1/BU2

53.0 Mode selector S2 Byte 0 .. 255 2 Default: Fixed level value "1"

BU1/BU2

54.0 Control station - Local control [LC] ON< Byte 0 .. 255 0 Dependent on the con-trol function

55.0 Control station - Local control [LC] OFF Byte 0 .. 255 0

56.0 Control station - Local control [LC] ON> Byte 0 .. 255 0

57.0 Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] ON< Byte 0 .. 255 56 Default: Cyclic receive - bit 0.0

58.0 Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] OFF Byte 0 .. 255 57 Default: Cyclic receive - bit 0.1

59.0 Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] ON> Byte 0 .. 255 58 Default: Cyclic receive - bit 0.2

60.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] ON< Byte 0 .. 255 0

61.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] OFF Byte 0 .. 255 0

62.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] ON> Byte 0 .. 255 0

63.0 Control station - Operator panel [OP] ON< Byte 0 .. 255 0

64.0 Control station - Operator panel [OP] OFF Byte 0 .. 255 0

65.0 Control station - Operator panel [OP] ON> Byte 0 .. 255 0

66.0 Control function - ON< Byte 0 .. 255 73 Default: General con-trol station ON <

67.0 Control function - OFF Byte 0 .. 255 74 Default: General con-trol station OFF

68.0 Control function - ON> Byte 0 .. 255 75 Default: General con-trol station ON >

69.0 Control function - Feedback ON Byte 0 .. 255 101 Default: Status - Motor current flowing

70.0 External fault 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2



Byte.

Bit

Specification

(Prm group)

Type Range De-

fault

Note Infor-

mation





74.0 External fault 1 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2




78.0 Cold starting (TPF) Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2

79.0 Test 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 59 Default: Cyclic receive - bit 0.3

BU1/BU2

80.0 Test 2 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2

81.0 Reset 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 62 Default: Cyclic receive - bit 0.6

BU1/BU2

82.0 Reset 2 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2

83.0 Reset 3 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2





88.0 Truth table 1 3I/1O - Input 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2










98.0 Timer 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2

99.0 Timer 1 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2

100.0 Timer 2 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2

101.0 Timer 2 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2

102.0 Counter 1 - Input + Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2

103.0 Counter 1 - Input - Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2

104.0 Counter 1 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2

105.0 Counter 2 - Input + Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2

106.0 Counter 2 - Input - Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2

107.0 Counter 2 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2

108.0 Signal conditioning 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2

109.0 Signal conditioning 1 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2

110.0 Signal conditioning 2 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2

111.0 Signal conditioning 2 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2

112.0 Non-volatile element 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2

113.0 Non-volatile element 1 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2

114.0 Non-volatile element 2 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2

Byte.

Bit

Specification

(Prm group)

Type Range De-

fault

Note Infor-

mation




115.0 Non-volatile element 2 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2

116.0 Flashing 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2



119.0 Flickering 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2



122.0 Analog parameters (44)122.0 PLC/DCS analog input Byte 0 .. 255 16 Default: Max. current

I_maxBU1/BU2


Byte.

Bit

Specification

(Prm group)

Type Range De-

fault

Note Infor-

mation




B.12 Data Record 132 - Extended Device Parameter 1

Byte.

Bit

Specification

(Prm group)

Type Range Unit De-

fault

Note Infor-

mation


4.0 Bit parameters (17)

4.0 3UF50 compatibility mode Bit 0, 1 0 BU2

4.1 3UF50 mode of operation Bit 0, 1 0 0 = DPV0, 1 = DPV1

BU2

4.2 Reserved Bit 0

4.3 Reserved Bit 0

4.4 Reserved Bit 0

4.5 Reserved Bit 0

4.6 Reserved Bit 0

4.7 Reserved Bit 0

5.0 Reserved Bit 0

5.1 Reserved Bit 0

5.2 Reserved Bit 0

5.3 Reserved Bit 0

5.4 Analog module - Measuring range Input

Bit 0, 1 00 = 0..20 mA 1 = 4 - 20 mA

AM

5.5 Analog module - Measuring range Output

Bit 0, 1 0 AM

5.6 Reserved Bit 0

5.7 Reserved Bit 0

6.0 Overshooting/undershooting of limit value 1

Bit 0, 1 0 0 = ">" (overshooting) 1 = "<" (undershoo-ting)

BU2


Bit 0, 1 0 BU2


Bit 0, 1 0 BU2


Bit 0, 1 0 BU2

6.4 Reserved Bit 0

6.5 OPO level Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO con-tact, 1 = NC contact

BU2

6.6 Positioner response for OPO Bit 0, 1 0 0 = closed, 1 = open

BU2

6.7 Star-delta - Transformer mounting Bit 0, 1 0 0 = delta1 = in supply cable

7.0 External fault 5 - Level Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact, 1 = NC contact

BU2

7.1 External fault 6 - Level Bit 0, 1 0 BU2

7.2 Reserved Bit 0

7.3 Reserved Bit 0

Table B-13: Data record 132 - Extended device parameter 1



7.4 Monitoring external fault 5 Bit 0, 1 00 = always

BU2

7.5 Monitoring external fault 6 Bit 0, 1 0 BU2

7.6 Reserved Bit 0

7.7 Reserved Bit 0

8.0 Reserved Bit 0

8.1 Reserved Bit 0

8.2 Reserved Bit 0

8.3 Reserved Bit 0

8.4 Timestamping active Bit 0, 1 0 BU2

8.5 Reserved Bit 0

8.6 Reserved Bit 0

8.7 Reserved Bit 0

9.0 Reserved Bit 0

9.1 Reserved Bit 0

9.2 Reserved Bit 0

9.3 Reserved Bit 0

9.4 Reserved Bit 0

9.5 Reserved Bit 0

9.6 Reserved Bit 0

9.7 Reserved Bit 0


10.0 3UF50 basic type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU2



10.6 UVO mode of operation Bit[2] 0, 1 0 0 = deactiva-ted, 1 = activated

BU2

11.0 Tripping monitoring U< Bit[2] 1, 2 1 1 = on+ (always, not TPF) 2 = run (motor ON, not TPF)

UM

11.2 Warning monitoring U< Bit[2] 1, 2 1 UM



12.0 Tripping monitoring 0/4-20 mA>

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = on (always) 1 = on+ (always, not TPF) 2 = run (motor ON, not TPF) 3 = run+ (motor ON, not TPF, start hiding)

AM

12.2 Warning monitoring 0/4 - 20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 AM

12.4 Tripping monitoring 0/4-20 mA<

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 AM

12.6 Warning monitoring 0/4 - 20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 AM

13.0 Limit value 1 monitoring Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU2




Byte.

Bit

Specification

(Prm group)

Type Range Unit De-

fault

Note Infor-

mation

Table B-13: Data record 132 - Extended device parameter 1 (cont.)






14.6 AM - Active inputs Bit[2] 0, 1 0 0=1 input1=2 inputs

AM

15.0 DM - Debounce time inputs Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 10 ms. 1 Offset 6ms DM1/DM2

15.2 AM - Response at open circuit Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 2 0 = deactiva-ted1 = signal2 = warn3 = switch off

AM

15.4 EM - Response to an external earth fault

Bit[2] 1, 3 1 EM

15.6 EM - Response to warning of an external earth fault

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 EM





17.0 TM - Tripping response T> Bit[2] 1, 3 3 0 = deactiva-ted1 = signal2 = warn3 = switch off

TM

17.2 TM - Warning response T> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 TM

17.4 TM - Response to a sensor error/Out of range

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 2 TM

17.6 TM - Active sensors Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 0 = 1 sensor1 = 2 sensors 2= 3 sensors

TM

18.0 Tripping response P> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 0 = deactiva-ted1 = signal 2 = warn 3 = switch off

UM

18.2 Warning response P> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM

18.4 Tripping response P< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 UM

18.6 Warning response P< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM

19.0 Tripping response cos phi< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 UM

19.2 Warning response cos phi< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM

19.4 Tripping response U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 UM

19.6 Warning response U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM

20.0 Tripping response 0/4 - 20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 AM

20.2 Warning response 0/4 - 20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 AM

20.4 Tripping response 0/4 - 20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 AM

20.6 Warning response 0/4 - 20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 AM





22.0 Response - External fault 5 Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 0 = deactiva-ted1 = signal2 = warn3 = switch off

BU2

22.2 Response - External fault 6 Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 BU2



Byte.

Bit

Specification

(Prm group)

Type Range Unit De-

fault

Note Infor-

mation




23.0 Recording of analog values - Trig-ger edge

Bit[2] 0, 1 0 0 = positive 1 = negative

BU2








25.0 Timer 3 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = with clsg. delay

1 = with clsg. delay. & mem.

2 = with OFF delay

3 = with fleet. clsg.

BU2

25.2 Timer 4 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU2

25.4 Signal conditioning 3 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = non-inver-ting 1 = inverting 2 = rising edge with memory 3 = falling edge with memory

BU2

25.6 Signal conditioning 4 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU2


Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU2


Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU2








28.0 TM - Sensor type Bit[3] +bit

000B - 100B 000B 000B = PT100, 001B = PT1000 010B = KTY83 011B = KTY84 100B = NTC

TM



Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B Bit[0] = panel reset, Bit[1] = auto reset, Bit[2] = remote reset, Bit[3] = OFF command reset

BU2


Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B BU2


Byte.

Bit

Specification

(Prm group)

Type Range Unit De-

fault

Note Infor-

mation







32.0 Truth table 7 type 2I/1O Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0 BU2

32.4 Truth table 8 type 2I/1O Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0 BU2



34.0 Hysteresis P - cos phi - U Bit[4] 0 - 15 5 1% UM

34.4 Hysteresis 0/4 - 20 mA Bit[4] 0 - 15 5 1% AM

35.0 Hysteresis free limit values Bit[4] 0 - 15 5 1% BU2




37.0 EM - Delay Byte 0 - 255 100 ms. 5 EM

38.0 Trip level cos phi< Byte 0 - 100 1% 0 UM

39.0 Warnung level cos phi< Byte 0 - 100 1% 0 UM

40.0 Trip level U< Byte 0 - 255 8 V 0 UM

41.0 Warning level U< Byte 0 - 255 8 V 0 UM

42.0 Trip level 0/4 - 20 mA> Byte 0 - 255 *128 0 AM

43.0 Warning level 0/4 - 20 mA> Byte 0 - 255 *128 0 AM

44.0 Trip level 0/4 - 20 mA< Byte 0 - 255 *128 0 AM

45.0 Warning level 0/4 - 20 mA< Byte 0 - 255 *128 0 AM

46.0 Trip delay P> Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM

47.0 Warning delay P> Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM

48.0 Trip delay P< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM

49.0 Warning delay P< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM

50.0 Trip delay cos phi< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM

51.0 Warning delay cos phi< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM

52.0 Trip delay U< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM

53.0 Warning delay U< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM

54.0 Trip delay 0/4 - 20 mA> Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 AM

55.0 Warning delay 0/4 - 20 mA> Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 AM

56.0 Trip delay 0/4 - 20 mA< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 AM

57.0 Warning delay 0/4 - 20 mA< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 AM

58.0 Limit value 1 delay Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 BU2




62.0 TM - Hysteresis Byte 0 - 255 1 K 5 TM

63.0 Maximum time for star operation Byte 0 - 255 1s 20 Star-delta starter

64.0 UVO time Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 0 BU2

65.0 Staggering time Byte 0 - 255 1s 0 BU2

Byte.

Bit

Specification

(Prm group)

Type Range Unit De-

fault

Note Infor-

mation




66.0 Recording of analog values - Pretrigger

Byte 0 - 20 5% 0 BU2




70.0 Truth table 4 type 3I/1O Byte 0 .. 11111111B 0 BU2






76.0 Word parameters (33)

76.0 Analog module - Start value output Word 0 .. 65535 0 Value for 0/4 mA

AM

78.0 Analog module - End value output Word 0 .. 65535 27648 Value for 20 mA

AM

80.0 TM - Trip level T> Word 0 .. 65535 1 K 0 TM

82.0 TM - Warning level T> Word 0 .. 65535 1 K 0 TM

84.0 Limit monitor 1 - Limit value Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU2




92.0 Timer 3 - Limit value Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms 0 BU2

94.0 Timer 4 - Limit value Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms 0 BU2

96.0 Counter 3 - Limit value Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU2

98.0 Counter 4 - Limit value Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU2

100.0 Switching interval Word 0 .. 65535 10 ms 0

102.0 Recording of analog values - Pre-trigger

Word 1 .. 50000 1 ms 100 BU2



108.0 D-word parameters (37)

108.0 Overload protection - Set current Ie2

D-word 0 .. 63000 10 mA 0

112.0 Trip level P> D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 W 0 UM

116.0 Warning level P> D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 W 0 UM

120.0 Trip level P< D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 W 0 UM

124.0 Warning level P< D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 W 0 UM

128.0 Truth table 9 type 5I/2O - Output 1

Bit[32] 0 .. 1..1B 0 BU2

132.0 Truth table 9 type 5I/2O - Output 2

Bit[32] 0 .. 1..1B 0 BU2



Byte.

Bit

Specification

(Prm group)

Type Range Unit De-

fault

Note Infor-

mation




B.13 Data Record 133 - Extended Device Parameter 2

(Plug )

Byte.

Bit

Specification

(Prm group)

Type Range De-

fault

Note Infor-

mation



4.0 DM1 - Output 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 DM1

5.0 DM1 - Output 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 DM1

6.0 DM2 - Output 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 DM2

7.0 DM2 - Output 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 DM2

8.0 Reserved Byte 0

9.0 Reserved Byte 0



12.0 Timestamping - Input 0 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2








20.0 Recording of analog values - Trigger input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2


22.0 Control station - Local control [LC] ON<< Byte 0 .. 255 0 Dependent on the control function

23.0 Control station - Local control [LC] ON>> Byte 0 .. 255 0

24.0 Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] ON<< Byte 0 .. 255 0

25.0 Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] ON>> Byte 0 .. 255 0

26.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] ON<< Byte 0 .. 255 0

27.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] ON>> Byte 0 .. 255 0

28.0 Control station - Operator panel [OP] ON>> Byte 0 .. 255 0

29.0 Control station - Operator panel [OP]<>/ <<>>

Byte 0 .. 255 0

30.0 Control function - ON<< Byte 0 .. 255 0

31.0 Control function - ON>> Byte 0 .. 255 0

32.0 Auxiliary control input - FC Byte 0 .. 255 0

33.0 Auxiliary control input - FO Byte 0 .. 255 0

34.0 Auxiliary control input - TC Byte 0 .. 255 0

35.0 Auxiliary control input - TO Byte 0 .. 255 0

36.0 External fault 5 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

37.0 External fault 6 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2



Table B-14: Data record 133 - Extended device parameter 2



40.0 External fault 5 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

41.0 External fault 6 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2



44.0 UVO error Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

45.0 OPO error Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

46.0 Truth table 4 3I/1O - Input 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2


















64.0 Timer 3 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

65.0 Timer 3 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

66.0 Timer 4 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

67.0 Timer 4 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

68.0 Counter 3 - Input + Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

69.0 Counter 3 - Input - Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

70.0 Counter 3 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

71.0 Counter 4 - Input + Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

72.0 Counter 4 - Input - Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

73.0 Counter 4 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

74.0 Signal conditioning 3 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

75.0 Signal conditioning 3 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

76.0 Signal conditioning 4 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

77.0 Signal conditioning 4 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

78.0 Non-volatile element 3 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

79.0 Non-volatile element 3 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

80.0 Non-volatile element 4 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

81.0 Non-volatile element 4 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2


Byte.

Bit

Specification

(Prm group)

Type Range De-

fault

Note Infor-

mation









88.0 Analog parameters (45)

88.0 Analog module - Output Byte 0 - 255 0 AM

89.0 Analog input limit value 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2





94.0 Recording of analog values - Analog input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2

95.0 PLC/DCS analog input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2





Byte.

Bit

Specification

(Prm group)

Type Range De-

fault

Note Infor-

mation




B.14 Data Record 139 - Marking

The diagnostics• External fault 1 to 6 (events, warnings and faults)• Limit value 1 to 4 (events) • TM warning T>/tripping T> (events, warnings and faults)• Warning/tripping 0/4 - 20 mA<> (events, warnings and faults)

can be parameterized to have various meanings e.g. fill level >, stock hot, etc. To simplify the diagnostics, these texts can be saved in the device. These can be created, read out and displayed, for example, with SIMOCODE ES. The texts have no functionality.

Byte.Bit Specification Type Information



10.0 Marking - External fault 1 Byte[10] BU1/BU2




50.0 Marking - External fault 5 Byte[10] BU2

60.0 Marking - External fault 6 Byte[10] BU2



90.0 Marking - Limit value 1 Byte[10] BU2




130.0 Marking - TM warning T> Byte[10] BU2

140.0 Marking - TM tripping T> Byte[10] BU2

150.0 Marking - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA> Byte[10] BU2

160.0 Marking - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA< Byte[10] BU2

170.0 Marking - Tripping 0/4 - 20 mA> Byte[10] BU2

180.0 Marking - Tripping 0/4 - 20 mA< Byte[10] BU2


Table B-15: Data record 139 - Marking



B.15 Data Record 160 - Communication Parameters

Attention Only the address is relevant for writing. The baud rate is recognized automa-tically. The current baud rate is read.

B.16 Data Record 165 - Comments

Byte Specification Type Information


BU1/BU24.0 Station address Byte

5.0 Baud rate Byte

6.0 to 11.0 Reserved Byte[6]

Table B-16: Data record 160 - Communication parameters



BU1/BU2

4.0 System designation Byte[32]

36.0 Location identification Byte[22]

58.0 Date Byte[16]


112.0 Comment Byte[54]

Table B-17: Data record 165 - Comments



B.17 Data Record 202 - Acyclic Receive

Description

The acylic control data can be used for any functions. The control data is available as device-internal outputs (sockets).



BU1/BU2

4.0 Acyclic Receive - Bit 0.0 Bit




4.4 Acyclic Receive - v 0.4 Bit












6.0 Acyclic Receive - Analog value Word

Table B-18: Data record 202 - Acyclic receive



B.18 Data Record 203 - Acyclic Send

Description

Any data can be transmitted via the acyclic signaling data. The signaling data is available as device-internal inputs (plugs).


0.0 Acyclic send - Bit 0.0 Bit

BU1/BU2
















Table B-19: Data record 203 - Acyclic send



B.19 Data Record 224 - Password Protection

Beschreibung

• Password protection ON If the data record is received with this control flag, the password protection is activated and the password is accepted. If, at the time of receiving, "Pass-word protection ON" and the password are not the same, the event "Event - Password false" is set and no change is carried out.

• Password protection OFF If the data record is received with this control flag, the password protection is deactivated. If the password is false, the event "Event - Password false" is set and no change is carried out.

Table B-20: Data record 224 - Password protection



BU1/BU24.0 Control flag: 0 = password protection OFF 1 = password protection ON

Bit

4.1 Reserved Bit[31]

8.0 Password Byte[8] BU1/BU2




B.20 Assignment of Cyclic Control and Signaling Data for

Predefined Control Functions

B.20.1 Overload Relay

Table B-21: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Overload relay

*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only

Cycl. receive data

Bit 0.0 Not connectedBit 0.1 Not connectedBit 0.2 Not connectedBit 0.3 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Test/reset -> Test 1 - InputBit 0.4 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - InputBit 0.5 Not connectedBit 0.6 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Test/reset -> Reset 1 - InputBit 0.7 Not connectedBit 1.0 Not connectedBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Not connectedBit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected

Cycl. signaling data

Bit 0.0 Not connectedBit 0.1 Not connectedBit 0.2 Not connectedBit 0.3 Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)Bit 0.4 Not connectedBit 0.5 Not connectedBit 0.6 Status - General faultBit 0.7 Status - General warningBit 1.0 Not connectedBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Not connectedBit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_maxByte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 6/7 *) (analog value)( Not connectedByte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected



B.20.2 Direct Starter

Table B-22: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Direct starter


Cycl. receive data

Bit 0.0 Not connectedBit 0.1 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> OFFBit 0.2 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ONBit 0.3 Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - InputBit 0.4 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - InputBit 0.5 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1Bit 0.6 Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - InputBit 0.7 Not connectedBit 1.0 Not connectedBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Not connectedBit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected


Bit 0.0 Not connectedBit 0.1 Status - OFFBit 0.2 Status - ON >Bit 0.3 Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)Bit 0.4 Not connectedBit 0.5 Status - Remote mode of operationBit 0.6 Status - General faultBit 0.7 Status - General warningBit 1.0 Not connectedBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Not connectedBit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_maxByte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 6/7 *) (analog value)( Not connectedByte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected



B.20.3 Reversing Starter

Table B-23: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Reversing starter


Cycl. receive data

Bit 0.0 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON<Bit 0.1 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> OFFBit 0.2 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON>Bit 0.3 Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - InputBit 0.4 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - InputBit 0.5 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1Bit 0.6 Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - InputBit 0.7 Not connectedBit 1.0 Not connectedBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Not connectedBit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected


Bit 0.0 Status - ON <Bit 0.1 Status - OFFBit 0.2 Status - ON >Bit 0.3 Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)Bit 0.4 Status - Interlocking time activeBit 0.5 Status - Remote mode of operationBit 0.6 Status - General faultBit 0.7 Status - General warningBit 1.0 Not connectedBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Not connectedBit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_maxByte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 6/7 *) (analog value)( Not connectedByte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected



B.20.4 Circuit Breaker (MCCB)

Table B-24: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Circuit breaker (MCCB)


Cycl. receive data






B.20.5 Star-delta Starter

Table B-25: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - star-delta starter


Cycl. receive data



Bit 0.0 Not connectedBit 0.1 Status - OFFBit 0.2 Status - ON Bit 0.3 Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)Bit 0.4 Status - Switching interval activeBit 0.5 Status - Remote mode of operationBit 0.6 Status - General faultBit 0.7 Status - General warningBit 1.0 Not connectedBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Not connectedBit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_maxByte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 6/7 *) (analog value)( Not connectedByte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected



B.20.6 Star-delta Starter with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation

Table B-26: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Star-delta starter with reversal of the direction of rotation


Cycl. receive data



Bit 0.0 Status - ON <Bit 0.1 Status - OFFBit 0.2 Status - ON >Bit 0.3 Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)Bit 0.4 Status - Switching interval activeBit 0.5 Status - Remote mode of operationBit 0.6 Status - General faultBit 0.7 Status - General warningBit 1.0 Not connectedBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Not connectedBit 1.3 Status - Interlocking time activeBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_maxByte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 6/7 *) (analog value)( Not connectedByte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected



B.20.7 Dahlander

Table B-27: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Dahlander


Cycl. receive data

Bit 0.0 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON>>Bit 0.1 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> OFFBit 0.2 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON>Bit 0.3 Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - InputBit 0.4 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - InputBit 0.5 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1Bit 0.6 Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - InputBit 0.7 Not connectedBit 1.0 Not connectedBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Not connectedBit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected


Bit 0.0 Status - ON >>Bit 0.1 Status - OFFBit 0.2 Status - ON >Bit 0.3 Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)Bit 0.4 Status - Switching interval activeBit 0.5 Status - Remote mode of operationBit 0.6 Status - General faultBit 0.7 Status - General warningBit 1.0 Not connectedBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Not connectedBit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_maxByte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 6/7 *) (analog value)( Not connectedByte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected



B.20.8 Dahlander with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation

Table B-28: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation


Cycl. receive data

Bit 0.0 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON>>Bit 0.1 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> OFFBit 0.2 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON>Bit 0.3 Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - InputBit 0.4 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - InputBit 0.5 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1Bit 0.6 Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - InputBit 0.7 Not connectedBit 1.0 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON<<Bit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON<Bit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected


Bit 0.0 Status - ON >>Bit 0.1 Status - OFFBit 0.2 Status - ON >Bit 0.3 Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)Bit 0.4 Status - Switching interval activeBit 0.5 Status - Remote mode of operationBit 0.6 Status - General faultBit 0.7 Status - General warningBit 1.0 Status - ON <<Bit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Status ON <Bit 1.3 Status - Interlocking time activeBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_maxByte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 6/7 *) (analog value)( Not connectedByte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected



B.20.9 Pole-changing Switch

Table B-29: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Pole-changing switch


Cycl. receive data

Bit 0.0 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON>>Bit 0.1 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> OFFBit 0.2 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON>Bit 0.3 Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - InputBit 0.4 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - InputBit 0.5 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1Bit 0.6 Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - InputBit 0.7 Not connectedBit 1.0 Not connectedBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Not connectedBit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected


Bit 0.0 Status - ON >>Bit 0.1 Status - OFFBit 0.2 Status - ON >Bit 0.3 Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)Bit 0.4 Status - Switching interval activeBit 0.5 Status - Remote mode of operationBit 0.6 Status - General faultBit 0.7 Status - General warningBit 1.0 Not connectedBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Not connectedBit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_maxByte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 6/7 *) (analog value)( Not connectedByte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected



B.20.10 Pole-changing Switch with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation

Table B-30: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation


Cycl. receive data

Bit 0.0 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON>>Bit 0.1 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> OFFBit 0.2 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON>Bit 0.3 Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - InputBit 0.4 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - InputBit 0.5 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1Bit 0.6 Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - InputBit 0.7 Not connectedBit 1.0 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON<<Bit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON<Bit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected


Bit 0.0 Status - ON >>Bit 0.1 Status - OFFBit 0.2 Status - ON >Bit 0.3 Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)Bit 0.4 Status - Switching interval activeBit 0.5 Status - Remote mode of operationBit 0.6 Status - General faultBit 0.7 Status - General warningBit 1.0 Status - ON <<Bit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Status ON <Bit 1.3 Status - Interlocking time activeBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_maxByte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 6/7 *) (analog value)( Not connectedByte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected



B.20.11 Valve

Table B-31: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Valve


Cycl. receive data

Bit 0.0 Not connectedBit 0.1 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] ->ClosedBit 0.2 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] ->OpenBit 0.3 Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - InputBit 0.4 Not connectedBit 0.5 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1Bit 0.6 Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - InputBit 0.7 Not connectedBit 1.0 Not connectedBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Not connectedBit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected


Bit 0.0 Not connectedBit 0.1 Status - OFF (closed)Bit 0.2 Status - ON> (open)Bit 0.3 Not connectedBit 0.4 Not connectedBit 0.5 Status - Remote mode of operationBit 0.6 Status - General faultBit 0.7 Status - General warningBit 1.0 Not connectedBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Not connectedBit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 (analog value) Not connectedByte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 6/7 *) (analog value)( Not connectedByte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected



B.20.12 Positioner

Table B-32: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Positioner


Cycl. receive data

Bit 0.0 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] ->ClosedBit 0.1 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] ->StoppedBit 0.2 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] ->OpenBit 0.3 Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - InputBit 0.4 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - InputBit 0.5 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1Bit 0.6 Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - InputBit 0.7 Not connectedBit 1.0 Not connectedBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Not connectedBit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected


Bit 0.0 Status - ON< (closed)Bit 0.1 Status - OFF (stopped)Bit 0.2 Status - ON> (open)Bit 0.3 Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)Bit 0.4 Status - Interlocking time activeBit 0.5 Status - Remote mode of operationBit 0.6 Status - General faultBit 0.7 Status - General warningBit 1.0 Status - positioner opensBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Status - positioner closesBit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_maxByte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 6/7 *) (analog value)( Not connectedByte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected



B.20.13 Soft Starter

Table B-33: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Soft starter


Cycl. receive data






B.20.14 Soft Starter with Reversing Contactor

Table B-34: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Soft starter with reversing contactor


Cycl. receive data



Bit 0.0 Status - ON <Bit 0.1 Status - OFFBit 0.2 Status - ON >Bit 0.3 Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)Bit 0.4 Status - Interlocking time activeBit 0.5 Status - Remote mode of operationBit 0.6 Status - General faultBit 0.7 Status - General warningBit 1.0 Not connectedBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Not connectedBit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_maxByte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 6/7 *) (analog value)( Not connectedByte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected


Dimension Drawings CIn this chapter

This chapter contains the technical dimension drawings of the SIMOCODE pro system components.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• configurators• technicians.

Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge:• good knowledge about configuring switchgear.

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 C-1

Dimension Drawings

C.1 3UF70 Basic Unit

C.1.1 SIMOCODE pro C 3UF7000 Basic Unit

C.1.2 SIMOCODE pro V 3UF7010 Basic Unit

865 36

80 106

125

445

80 106

125

45115

5 654

SIMOCODE pro C-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01

Dimension Drawings

C.2 3UF710 Current Measuring Modules

C.2.1 Current Measuring Module (Push-through Converter) 3UF7100, 0.3 A to 3 A, 3UF7101, 2.4 A to 25 A ,

45 405

8438

T1T3

7,5

T2


Dimension Drawings

C.2.2 Current Measuring Module (Push-through Converter) 3UF7102, 10 A to 100 A

55 67

9465

14

5

T1

T2

T3


Dimension Drawings

C.2.3 Current Measuring Module (Push-through Converter) 3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A,

120

95

79 95

5 140

78

25

7


Dimension Drawings

C.2.4 Current Measuring Module (Rail Connection) 3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A

12095

37 179

79 95 119

7 47140

5

84


Dimension Drawings

C.2.5 Current Measuring Module (Rail Connection) 3UF7104, 63 A to 630 A

145

57

255011

985 12

214

7

125

6148

60,5

60,5

6


Dimension Drawings

C.3 Current/Voltage Measuring Modules

C.3.1 Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Push-through Converter) 3UF7110, 0.3 A to 3 A, 3UF7111, 2.4 A to 25 A

711

21

45

855

3166


Dimension Drawings

C.3.2 Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Push-through Converter) 3UF7112, 10 A to 100 A

2023

12

94

5592

605


Dimension Drawings

C.3.3 Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Push-through Converter) 3UF7113-1AA, 20 A to 200 A


Dimension Drawings

C.3.4 Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Rail Connection) 3UF7113-1BA, 20 A to 200 A

3

79

140475

12095

119

9579

9 1737Ø


Dimension Drawings

C.3.5 Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Rail Connection) 3UF7114, 63 A to 630 A

145

6

14967

8832125

147

122

Ø112548

Ø11


Dimension Drawings

C.4 3UF7200 Operator Panel

29

8 29 796

36


Dimension Drawings

C.5 Expansion Modules

Versions:

• 3UF73 digital modules • 3UF7500 earth-fault module• 3UF7700 temperature module • 3UF7400 analog module

1155 4

1068

92

22,5

110

15


Dimension Drawings

C.6 Accessories

C.6.1 Door adapter

13,4

211,7

1,7

R1,5

R3,7

39

Ø 3

46

17

37


Dimension Drawings


Technical Data DIn this chapter

This chapter contains the technical data about SIMOCODE pro.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• configurators

Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge:• good knowledge about configuring switchgear• good knowledge about SIMOCODE pro.

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 D-1

Technical Data

D.1 Common Technical Data

Permiss. ambient temperature

In operation -25 °C - +60 °C

During storage and transport -40 °C - +80 °C

Site height above sea level

<2,000 m

<3,000 m Max. +50 °C (no safe isolation)

<4,000 m Max. +40 °C (no safe isolation)

Degree of protection (according

to IEC 60529)

All components (except current measuring modules, rail connection, operator panel and door adapter)

IP20

Current measuring module with rail connection

IP00

Operator panel (front) and door adapter (front) with cover

IP54

Shock resistance (sine pulse) 15 g/11 ms

Installation location Arbitrary

Frequencies 50/60 Hz ± 5%

EMC stability according to IEC 60947-1

Corresponds to Degree of severity 3

Conducted interference signal injection, burst according to IEC 61000-4-4

2 kV (power ports) Overvoltage limiter is required for inductive loads. 1 kV (signal ports)

Conducted interference signal injection, burst according to IEC 61000-4-5

2 kV (line to earth) 1 kV (line to earth)

Electrostatic discharging, ESD according to IEC 61000-4-2

8 kV (air discharge) 6 kV (contact discharge)

Field-related interference signal injection according to IEC 61000-4-3

10 V/m

EMC emitted interference according to IEC 60947-1

This is a Class A product. This product can

cause radio interference if used in a dome-

stic environment. The user must provide

suitable countermeasures if required. Conducted and emitted interference

DIN EN 55011/DIN EN 55022 (CISPR11/CISPR22)(corresponds to Degree of severity A)

Safe isolation according to IEC 60947-1

All circuits in SIMOCODE pro are isolated from each other according to IEC 60947-1, i.e. dimensioned with double cree-page distance and air gap.

Attention Please observe the information in the "Safe Isolation" test report, No. 2668

SIMOCODE pro D-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01

Technical Data

D.2 Technical Data of the Basic Units

Mounting Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rails or screw attachment via additional plug-in lugs

Display

•Red/green "DEVICE" LED •Green: "Ready for operation"•Red: "Function test was negative, device is blocked"•OFF: "No control supply voltage"

•Green "BUS" LED •Continuous light: "Communication with PLC/DCS"•Flashing: "Baud rate recognized/communication with PC/pro-

gramming device"

•Red "GEN. FAULT" LED Continuous light/flashing: "Feeder fault", e.g. overload tripping

TEST/RESET" button •Resets the device after tripping•Function test (system self-test)•Operation of memory module, addressing plug

System interfaces

•Front For connecting an operator panel or expansion modules. The memory module, addressing plug or a PC cable can also be connected to the system interface for carrying out parameteri-zation.

•Bottom For connecting a current measuring module or current/voltage measuring module


• Interface design•Connection technology

RS4859-pole SUB-D socket (12 MBit)Terminals (1.5 MBit), connection cross section like control cir-cuitFor connecting a PROFIBUS DP cable using the terminal con-nection or the 9-pole SUB-D socket.

Rated control voltage Us (accor-ding to DIN EN 61131-2)

110 V - 240 V AC/DC, 50/60 Hz 24 V DC

Operating range 0.85 x Us - 1.1 x Us 0.8 x Us - 1.2 x Us

Power consumption

•Basic unit 1 (3UF7000) 7 VA 5 W

•Basic unit 2 (3UF7010) (including two expansion modules connected to basic unit 2)

10 VA 7 W

Rated insulation voltage Ui 300 V (for Degree of pollution 3)

Rated surge voltage strength

Uimp

4 kV


Technical Data

Relay outputs:

•Number 3 monostable relay outputs

•Auxiliary contacts of the 3 relay outputs

The isolated NO contacts (NC contact response can be para-meterized via internal signal conditioning), of which 2 relay out-puts have a common root and one is separate, can be freely assigned to control functions (e.g. network, star or delta con-tactor or signaling of the operating state).

•Mandatory short-circuit protec-tion for auxiliary contacts (relay outputs)

•Fuse links, operating class gL/gG 6 A, fast-acting 10 A (IEC 60947-5-1)

•Miniature circuit breaker 1.6 A, C-characteristic (IEC 60947-5-1)

•Miniature circuit breaker 6 A, C-characteristic (Ik < 500 A)

•Rated uninterrupted current 5 A6 A at max. +50 °C

•Rated switching capacity AC-15 6 A/ 24 V AC 6 A/ 120 V AC 3 A/ 230 V AC DC-13 2 A/ 24 V DC 0.55 A/ 60 V DC 0.25 A/ 125 V DC

Inputs (binary) 4 inputs with a common root that are supplied via the device electronics (24 V DC) for measuring process signals (e.g. local control, key-operated switch, limit switch, ...) and can be freely assigned to the control functions.

•24 V DC Cable lengths Input characteristic curve

300 m Type 1 according to EN 61131-2

Thermistor motor protection (binary PTC)

•Total cold resistance < 1.5 kOhm

•Response value 3.4 kOhm - 3.8 kOhm

•Return value 1.5 kOhm -1.65 kOhm

•Cable lengths Cross section:2.5 mm2

1.5 mm 2

0.5 mm2

Lengths:2 x 250 m 2 x 150 m 2 x 50 m

Connection

•Tightening torque TORQUE: 7 IN.LB - 10.3 IN.LB 0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm

•Connection cross sections:

- Solid 2 x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2 / 1 x 0.5 mm2 - 4 mm2

2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12

- Finely stranded, with end sleeves 2 x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm2 / 1 x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2

2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14

Power failure stored-energy time (Longer power failures lead to a shut-off of the relay outputs (monostable))

•SIMOCODE pro C - DC 24 V AC/DC 110 V - 240 V

•SIMOCODE pro V - DC 24 V

•SIMOCODE pro V - AC/DC 110 V - 240 V

typ. 50 ms typ. 200 ms


Technical Data

D.3 Technical Data of the Current Measuring Modules and Current/Voltage Measuring Modules

Mounting

•Set current le = 0.3 A - 3 A; 2.4 A - 25 A; 10 A - 100 A (3UF71.0, 3UF71.1, 3UF71.2)

Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rails or screw attachment via additional plug-in lugs

•Set current le = 20 A -200 A (3UF7103, 3UF7 113)

Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rails, screw attachment onto the mounting plate or directly to the contactor

•Set current le = 63 A -630 A (3UF7104, 3UF7 114)

Screw attachment onto the mounting plate or directly to the contactor

System interface For connection to a basic unit

Main circuit

•Set current Ie 3UF71.0: 0.3 A - 3 A 3UF71.3: 20 A - 200 A

3UF71.1: 2.4 A -25 A 3UF71.4: 63 A - 630 A

3UF71.2: 10 A -100 A

•Rated insulation voltage Ui (for Degree of pollution 3)

690 V

•Rated operational voltage Ue 690 V

•Rated surge voltage strength Uimp 6 kV

•Measurement frequency 50/60 Hz

•Type of current Three-phase current

•Short circuit Additional short-circuit protection in main circuit required 1)

•Accuracy of the current measuring (in the range 1x the minimum set current Iu to 8 x the maximum set current Io)

+/- 3%

Typical measuring range of the voltage measuring•Phase-to-phase voltage/line-to-line

voltage (e.g. UL1L2)•Phase voltage (e.g. UL1)

110 V - 690 V

65 V - 400 V

Accuracy of the•voltage measuring in the range

230 V - 400 V•power factor (cos phi) measure-

ment•apparent power measurement

+/- 3% (typical) +/-5% (typical) +/-5% (typical)

Notes on voltage measuring•Grounded network•Rated control

voltage Us

Suitable for three-phase current networks with grounded neu-tral pointAn earthed ground or a neutral conductor is necessary

Push-through opening Diameter

•Set current 0.3 A - 3 A; 2.4 A - 25 A

7.5 mm

•Set current 10 A -100 A 14.0 mm

•Set current 20 A -200 A 25.0 mm


Technical Data

Rail connection 2)

•Set current Ie 20 A -200 A 63 A -630 A

•Connection screw M8x20 M10x30

•Tightening torque 10 Nm - 14 Nm 14 Nm -24 Nm

•Solid with cable lug 16 mm2 - 95 mm2) 3) 50 mm2 -240 mm2) 4)

•Stranded with cable lug 25 mm2 -120 mm2) 3) 70 mm2 -240 mm2) 4)

•AWG cable 6 kcmil - 300 kcmil 1/0 kcmil - 500 kcmil

Connection for voltage measuring

•Tightening torque TORQUE: 7 IN.LB - 10.3 IN.LB 0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm

•Connection cross sections:


2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12

- Finely stranded, with end sleeves 2x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2

2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14

1) More information is available at http://www.siemens.com/simocode and D.6 "Short-circuit Protection with Fuses for Motor Feeders for Short-circuit Currents up to 50 kA and 690 V" on page D-11.

2) Screw connection is possible with a suitable 3RT19 box terminal.

3) The 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal cover is required to maintain the phase separation when connecting cable lugs complying with DIN 46235 to cables with a cross section larger than 95 mm2.

4) The 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal cover is required to maintain the phase separation when connecting cable lugs complying with DIN 46234 to cables with a cross section larger than 240 mm2 as well as when connecting cable lugs complying with DIN 46235 to cables with a cross section larger than 185 mm2.


http://www.siemens.com/simocode

http://www.siemens.de/simocode

http://www.siemens.de/simocode

Technical Data

D.4 Technical Data of the Expansion Modules

D.4.1 Technical Data of the Digital Modules


Display

• Green "READY" LED •Continuous light: "Ready for operation"•Flashing: "No connection to basic unit"

System interfaces For connecting to a basic unit, an additional expansion module, a current measuring module or a current/voltage measuring module or the operator panel

Control circuit

Rated insulation voltage Ui

300 V (for Degree of pollution 3)

Rated surge voltage strength Uimp

4 kV

Relay outputs

• Number• Auxiliary contacts of the 2 relay

outputs

• Mandatory short-circuit protec-tion for auxiliary contacts (relay outputs)

• Rated uninterrupted current

• Rated switching capacity

2 mono or bistable relay outputs (depending on type)The isolated NO contacts (NC contact response can be para-meterized via internal signal conditioning) whose relay out-puts all have a common root can be freely assigned to control functions (e.g. network, star or delta contactor or signaling of the operating state). •Fuse link, operating class gL/gG 6 A, fast-acting 10 A

(IEC 60947-5-1)•Miniature circuit breaker 1.6 A, C-characteristic

(IEC 60947-5-1)•Miniature circuit breaker 6 A, C-characteristic (Ik < 500 A)5 A 6 A at max. +50 °C AC-15 6 A/ 24 V AC 6 A/ 120 V AC 3 A/ 230 V AC DC-13 2 A/ 24 V DC 0.55 A/ 60 V DC 0.25 A/ 125 V DC

Inputs (binary) 4 externally supplied isolated inputs (24 V DC or 110 V - 240 V AC/DC depending on the type) have inputs with a common root for measuring process signals (e.g. local control, key-ope-rated switches, limit switches, ...) and can be freely assigned to the control functions.

• 24 V DC Cable lengths Input characteristic curve

300 m Type 2 according to EN 61131-2

• 110 V up to 240 V AC/DC Cable lengths Input characteristic curve

200 m (cable capacitance 300 nF/km) —

Connection

• Tightening torque TORQUE: 7 IN.LB - 10.3 IN.LB 0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm

• Connection cross sections:


2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12


2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14


Technical Data

D.4.2 Technical Data of the Analog Module


Display



Control circuit

Type of connection: 2-wire connection

Inputs:

• Channels 2 (passive)

• Parameterizable measuring ran-ges

0/4 mA - 20 mA

• Cable shielding Cable shielding recommended for cables up to 30 m and required for cables over 30 m

• Max. input current (destruction limit)

40 mA

• Accuracy of the 1%

• Input resistance 50 Ohm

• Conversion time 130 ms.

• Resolution 12 bit

• Open circuit recognition For the measuring range 4 mA - 20 mA

Output:

• Channels 1

• Parameterizable output range 0/4 mA - 20 mA

• Cable shielding Cable shielding recommended for cables up to 30 m and required for cables over 30 m

• Max. output voltage 30 V DC

• Accuracy of the 1%

• Max. output load 500 Ohm

• Conversion time 10 ms.

• Resolution 12 bit

• Short-circuit proof Yes

Isolation of the inputs/output from the electronics

No

Connection:




2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12

- Finely stranded, with end sleeves 2 x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm2 / 1 x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2

2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14


Technical Data

D.4.3 Technical Data of the Earth-fault Module

D.4.4 Technical Data of the Temperature Module


Display



Control circuit

Connectable 3UL22 summation current transformer with rated fault currents IN• IEarth fault < 50% IN• IEarth fault > 100% IN

0.3/0.5/1 A

No trippingTripping

Response delay 300 ms - 500 ms, with additional delay

Connection:




2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12


2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14


Display



Sensor circuit

Typical sensor current:

• PT100 1 mA (typical)

• PT1000/KTY83/KTY84/NTC 0.2 mA (typical)

Open circuit recognition/short- circuit recognition/measuring range:

• PT100/PT1000 Open circuit, short circuit; measuring range: -50 °C - +500°C

• KTY83-110 Open circuit, short circuit; measuring range: -50 °C - +175°C

• KTY84 Open circuit, short circuit; measuring range: -40 °C - +300°C


Technical Data

D.5 Technical Data of the Operator Panel

• NTC Short circuit; measuring range: +80 °C - +160°C

Measuring accuracy at an ambi-ent temperature of 20°C (T20)

<+ 2 K

Deviation due to ambient tempera-ture (as % of measuring range)

0.05 per K deviation from T20

Connection:




2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12


2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14

Mounting Installation in a switchgear cabinet door and/or in a front panel, with IP54 system interface covering

Display

• Red/green "DEVICE" LED •Green:•Flashing green:•Red: blocked

•OFF:

"Ready for operation""No connection to basic unit""Function test was negative, device is blocked" "No control supply voltage"

• Green "BUS" LED •Continuous light:•Flashing:

"Communication with PLC/DCS""Baud rate recognized/communication with PC/programming device"

• Red "GEN. FAULT" LED Continuous light/flashing:

"Feeder fault", e.g. overload tripping

• 3 yellow LEDs/4 green LEDs Can be freely assigned to any status signals

Buttons

• Test/reset •Resets the device after tripping•Function test (system self-test)•Operation of memory module, addressing plug

• Control buttons •Control of the motor feeder, freely assignable

System interfaces

• Front For connecting a memory module, an addressing plug or a PC cable for parameterization

• Rear For joining a connection cable to the basic unit or the expansion module


Technical Data

D.6 Short-circuit Protection with Fuses for Motor Feeders

for Short-circuit Currents up to 50 kA and 690 V

Vers

ion:

Janu

ary

20, 2

005

690V

Shor

t-circ

uit p

rote

ctio

n w

ith F

uses

for M

otor

Fee

ders

Fa

st fus

e link

s 3)

for S

hort-

circ

uit C

urre

nts

up to

50k

A a

nd 6

90V

NHTy

pe 3N

A

for 3

UF7

DIAZ

EDTy

pe 5S

B

NEOZ

EDTy

pe 5S

E

Ovrlo

ad re

layC

onta

ctor

CLAS

SOp

erati

ng cl

ass

Settin

g ran

ge5 a

.1015

2025

3035

40gL

(gG)

(Typ

e)Ra

ted op

eratin

g curr

ent Ie

/AC-

3 in A

for

Test

cur

rent

“r”

400V

/50

0V/6

90V

400V

/50

0V/

690V

400V

/50

0V/

690V

400V

/50

0V/6

90V

400V

/50

0V/6

90V

400V

/50

0V/6

90V

400V

/50

0V/6

90V

12

0.3

- 3.0

A3R

T101

53,0

/3,0

/3,0

3,0/

3,0/

3,03,0

/3,0

/3,0

3,0/

3,0/

3,03,0

/3,0

/3,0

3,0/

3,0/

3,03,0

/3,0

/3,0

3520

3RT1

016

3,0/

3,0/

3,03,0

/3,0

/3,0

3,0/

3,0/

3,03,0

/3,0

/3,0

3,0/

3,0/

3,03,0

/3,0

/3,0

3,0/

3,0/

3,035

20

2.4

- 25A

3RT1

015

7,0/

5,0/

4,07,0

/5,0

/4,0

7,0/

5,0/

4,07,0

/5,0

/4,0

7,0/

5,0/

4,07,0

/5,0

/4,0

7,0/

5,0/

4,035

203R

T101

69,0

/6,5

5,29,0

/6,5

5,29,0

/6,5

5,29,0

/6,5

5,29,0

/6,5

5,29,0

/6,5

/5,2

8,5/

6,55,2

3520

3RT1

017

12,0

/9.0

/6,3

11,0

/9,0

/6,3

10,0

/9,0

/6,3

9,5/

9,0/

6,39,0

/9,0

/6,3

9,0/

9,0/

6,38,5

/8,5

/6,3

3520

3RT1

023

9,0/

6,5/

5,29,0

/6,5

/5,2

9,0/

6,5/

5,263

253R

T102

412

,0/

12,0

/9,0

12,0

/12

,0/

9,012

,0/

12,0

/9,0

12,0

/12

,0/

9,012

,0/

12,0

/9,0

12,0

/12

,0/

9,012

,0/

12,0

/9,0

6325

3RT1

025

17,0

/17

,0/

13,0

17,0

/17

,0/

13,0

16,0

/16

,0/

13,0

15,0

/15

,0/

13,0

14,0

/14

,0/

13,0

13,0

/13

,0/

13,0

12,0

/12

,0/

12,0

6325

3RT1

026

25,0

/18

,0/

13,0

18,0

/18

,0/

13,0

16,0

/16

,0/

13,0

15,0

/15

,0/

13,0

14,0

/14

,0/

13,0

13,0

/13

,0/

13,0

12,0

/12

,0/

12,0

100

353R

T103

425

,0/

25,0

/20

,025

,0/

25,0

/20

,022

,3/

22,3

/20

,020

,3/

20,3

/20

,319

,1/

19,1

/19

,117

,6/

17,6

/17

,616

,1/

16,1

/16

,112

563

3RT1

035

25,0

/25

,0/

24,0

25,0

/25

,0/

24,0

25,0

/25

,0/

24,0

25,0

/25

,0/

24,0

25,0

/25

,0/

24,0

25,0

/25

,0/

24,0

23,5

/23

,5/

23,5

125

63

10-1

00A

3RT1

034

32,0

/32

,0/

20,0

25,5

/25

,5/

20,0

22,3

/22

,3/

20,0

20,3

/20

,3/

20,0

19,1

/19

,1/

19,1

17,6

/17

,6/

17,6

16,1

/16

,1/

16,1

125

633R

T103

540

,0/

40,0

/24

,033

,0/

33,0

/24

,029

,4/

29,4

/24

,028

,0/

28,0

/24

,026

,5/

26,5

/24

,025

,0/

25,0

/24

,023

,5/

23,5

/23

,512

563

3RT1

036

50,0

/50

,0/

24,0

38,5

/38

,5/

24,0

32,7

/32

,7/

24,0

29,4

/29

,4/

24,0

26,5

/26

,5/

24,0

25,0

/25

,0/

24,0

23,5

/23

,5/

23,5

160

803R

T104

465

,0/

65,0

/47

,056

,0/

56,0

/47

,049

,0/

49,0

/47

,045

,0/

45,0

/45

,041

,7/

41,7

/41

,738

,2/

38,2

/38

,234

,5/

34,5

/34

,520

012

53R

T104

580

,0/

80,0

/58

,061

,0/

61,0

/58

,053

,0/

53,0

/53

,047

,0/

47,0

/47

,045

,0/

45,0

/45

,043

,0/

43,0

/43

,040

,0/

40,0

/40

,020

016

03R

T104

695

,0/

95,0

/58

,069

,0/

69,0

/58

,059

,0/

59,0

/58

,053

,0/

53,0

/53

,050

,0/

50,0

/50

,047

,0/

47,0

/47

,044

,0/

44,0

/44

,020

016

03R

T105

410

0,0/

100,0

/10

0,093

,2/

93,2

/93

,281

,7/

81,7

/81

,774

,8/

74,8

/74

,869

,0/

69,0

/69

,063

,0/

63,0

/63

,057

,0/

57,0

/57

,035

531

53R

T105

510

0,0/

100,0

/10

0,010

0,0/

100,0

/10

0,097

,5/

97,5

/97

,590

,0/

90,0

/90

,082

,0/

82,0

/82

,074

,0/

74,0

/74

,035

531

5

20-2

00A

3RT1

054

115,0

/11

5,0/

115,0

93,2

/93

,2/

93,2

81,7

/81

,7/

81,7

74,8

/74

,8/

74,8

69,0

/69

,0/

69,0

64,0

/64

,0/

64,0

355

315

3RT1

055

150

/15

0/

150

122

/12

2/

122

107

/10

7/

107

98/

98/

9890

/90

/90

82/

82/

8274

/74

/74

355

315

3RT1

056

185

/18

5/

170

150

/15

0/

150

131

/13

1/

131

120

/12

0/

120

111

/11

1/

111

102

/10

2/

102

93/

93/

9335

531

5

63-6

30A

3RT1

064

225

/22

5/

225

182

/18

2/

182

160

/16

0/

160

146

/14

6/

146

135

/13

5/

135

126

/12

6/

126

500

400

3RT1

065

265

/26

5/

265

215

/21

5/

215

188

/18

8/

188

172

/17

2/

172

159

/15

9/

159

146

/14

6/

146

133

/13

3/

133

500

400

3RT1

066

300

/30

0/

280

243

/24

3/

243

213

/21

3/

213

195

/19

5/

195

180

/18

0/

180

165

/16

5/

165

150

/15

0/

150

500

400

3RT1

075

400

/40

0/

400

324

/32

4/

324

284

/28

4/

284

260

/26

0/

260

240

/24

0/

240

220

/22

0/

220

200

/20

0/

200

630

400

3RT1

076

500

/50

0/

450

405

/40

5/

405

355

/35

5/

355

325

/32

5/

325

300

/30

0/

300

275

/27

5/

275

250

/25

0/

250

630

500

3RT1

264

225

/22

5/

225

225

/22

5/

225

225

/22

5/

225

194

/19

4/

194

173

/17

3/

173

152

/15

2/

152

131

/13

1/

131

500

500

3RT1

265

265

/26

5/

265

265

/26

5/

265

265

/26

5/

265

228

/22

8/

228

204

/20

4/

204

180

/18

0/

180

156

/15

6/

156

500

500

3RT1

266

300

/30

0/

300

300

/30

0/

300

300

/30

0/

300

258

/25

8/

258

231

/23

1/

231

204

/20

4/

204

177

/17

7/

177

500

500

3RT1

275

400

/40

0/

400

400

/40

0/

400

400

/40

0/

400

344

/34

4/

344

316

/31

6/

316

800

800

3RT1

276

500

/50

0/

500

500

/50

0/

500

500

/50

0/

500

430

/43

0/

430

385

/38

5/

385

340

/34

0/

340

316

/31

6/

316

800

800

3TF6

8 2)

63

0/

630

/63

050

2/

502

/50

244

0/

440

/44

040

8/

408

/40

837

6/

376

/37

634

4/

344

/34

431

7/

317

/31

780

050

04)

3TF6

9 2)

63

0/

630

/63

063

0/

630

/63

057

2/

572

/57

253

1/

531

/53

150

0/

500

/50

046

9/

469

/46

943

8/

438

/43

880

063

04)

1) C

an b

e m

ount

ed o

n co

ntac

tors

(afte

r dem

ount

ing

the

box

term

inal

blo

ck)

5) A

ssig

nmen

t and

sho

rt-ci

rcui

t dev

ices

acc

ordi

ng to

IEC

6094

7-4-

12)

Can

not b

e m

ount

ed o

n co

ntac

tors

Ty

pe of

coor

dinati

on “1

” : C

ontac

tors a

nd st

arters

may

not e

ndan

ger e

ither

perso

ns or

syste

ms in

the e

vent

of a s

hort

circu

it. 3)

Obs

erve

ope

ratin

g vo

ltage

T

hey a

re no

t suit

able

for fu

rther

oper

ation

until

they h

ave b

een r

epair

ed or

the r

espe

ctive

parts

have

been

repla

ced.

4) E

nsur

e th

at th

e sa

fety

mar

gin

betw

een

the

max

imum

AC-

3 ope

rating

curre

nt an

d the

fuse

ratin

g is s

uffici

ent.

Type

of co

ordin

ation

“2”:

Conta

ctors

and s

tarter

s may

not e

ndan

ger e

ither

perso

ns or

syste

ms in

the e

vent

of a s

hort c

ircuit

an

d mus

t be s

uitab

le for

furth

er op

erati

on. T

here

is da

nger

of co

ntact

weldi

ng.

Type

of co

ordin

ation

5)


Technical Data


Example Circuits EIn this chapter

In this chapter you will find circuit examples for the following parameterizable control functions:• Overload relay• Direct starter• Reversing starter• Circuit breaker (MCCB)• Star-delta starter• Star-delta starter with reversal of the direction of rotation• Dahlander• Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation• Pole-changing switch• Pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation• Valve• Positioner• Soft starter• Soft starter with reversing contactor.

Target groups

This manual is addressed to the following target groups:• planners• configurators• mechanics• electricians• commissioners.

Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge:• basic knowledge about SIMOCODE pro (see chapter 1, SIMOCODE pro

system manual)• basic knowledge of the SIMOCODE ES parameterization software.

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 E-1

Example Circuits

E.1 General

Target of the example circuits

The examples will• show you how to implement a circuit for each control function

with SIMOCODE pro• help you modify these examples for your respective application• help you to easily implement other applications.

Important steps

• Implementation of the external wiring (for control and feedback of main cur-rent switching devices and control and signaling devices) (see circuit diagrams).

• Implementation/activation of internal SIMOCODE pro functions, with control and evaluation of the SIMOCODE pro inputs/outputs (internal SIMOCODE pro wiring) (see function circuit diagrams with the function blocks of the graphics editor of the "SIMOCODE ES" configuration software).

• Setting of the cyclic control and signaling data for the communication of SIMOCODE pro with a PLC (see function circuit diagrams and the "Assign-ment of cyclic control and signaling data" tables).

Conditions

• Load feeder/motor present• PLC/DCS control with PROFIBUS DP interface is present• The main circuit is already wired• PC/programming device is present• The SIMOCODE ES software is installed• The basic unit has the basic factory default settings. In the "Configuring the

basic factory default settings" section of the SIMOCODE pro manual, you will learn how to implement the basic factory default settings.

SIMOCODE pro E-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01

Example Circuits

E.2 Example for the "overload relay" circuit

E.2.1 Circuit diagram for the "overload relay"


Example Circuits

Figure E-1: Circuit diagram for the "overload relay"


Example Circuits

E.2.2 Function circuit diagram for the "overload relay"

Figure E-2: Function circuit diagram for the "overload relay"


Example Circuits

E.3 Example for the "direct starter" circuit

E.3.1 Circuit diagram for the "direct starter"

Figure E-3: Circuit diagram for the "direct starter"


Example Circuits

E.3.2 Function circuit diagram for the "direct starter"

Figure E-4: Function circuit diagram for the "direct starter"


Example Circuits

E.4 Example for a "reversing starter" circuit

E.4.1 Circuit diagram for the "reversing starter"

Figure E-5: Circuit diagram for the "reversing starter"


Example Circuits

E.4.2 Function circuit diagram for the "reversing starter"

Figure E-6: Function circuit diagram for the "reversing starter"


Example Circuits

E.5 Example for the "circuit breaker (MCCB)" circuit

E.5.1 Circuit diagram for the "circuit breaker (MCCB)"

Figure E-7: Circuit diagram for the "circuit breaker (MCCB)"


Example Circuits

E.5.2 Function circuit diagram for the "circuit breaker (MCCB)"

Figure E-8: Function circuit diagram for the "circuit breaker (MCCB)"


Example Circuits

E.6 Example for the "star-delta starter" circuit

E.6.1 Circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter" circuit

Figure E-9: Circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter" circuit


Example Circuits

E.6.2 Function circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter"

Figure E-10: Function circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter"


Example Circuits

E.7 Example for the "star-delta starter with reversal of the direction of rotation" circuit

E.7.1 Circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter with reversal of the direction of rotation"

Figure E-11: Circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter with reversal of the direction of rotation"


Example Circuits

E.7.2 Function circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter with reversal of the direction of rotation"

Figure E-12: Function circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter with reversal of the direction of rotation"


Example Circuits

E.8 Example for the "Dahlander" circuit

E.8.1 Circuit diagram for the "Dahlander"

Figure E-13: Circuit diagram for the "Dahlander"


Example Circuits

E.8.2 Function circuit diagram for the "Dahlander"

Figure E-14: Function circuit diagram for the "Dahlander"


Example Circuits

E.9 Example for the "Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation" circuit

E.9.1 Circuit diagram for the "Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation"

Figure E-15: Circuit diagram for the "Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation"


Example Circuits

E.9.2 Function circuit diagram for the "Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation"

Figure E-16: Function circuit diagram (1 of 2) for the "Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation"


Example Circuits

Figure E-17: Function circuit diagram (2 of 2) for the "Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation"


Example Circuits

E.10 Example for the "pole-changing switch" circuit

E.10.1 Circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch"


Example Circuits

Figure E-18: Circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch"


Example Circuits

E.10.2 Function circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch"

Figure E-19: Function circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch"


Example Circuits

E.11 Example for the "pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation" circuit

E.11.1 Circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation"

Figure E-20: Circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation"


Example Circuits

E.11.2 Function circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation" circuit

Figure E-21: Function circuit diagram (1 of 2) for the "pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation"


Example Circuits

Figure E-22: Function circuit diagram (2 of 2) for the "pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation"


Example Circuits

E.12 Example for the "valve" circuit

E.12.1 Circuit diagram for the "valve"


Example Circuits

Figure E-23: Circuit diagram for the "valve"


Example Circuits

E.12.2 Function circuit diagram for the "valve"

Figure E-24: Function circuit diagram for the "valve"


Example Circuits

E.13 Example of the "positioner" circuit

E.13.1 Circuit diagram for "positioner 1"

Figure E-25: Circuit diagram for "positioner 1"


Example Circuits

E.13.2 Function circuit diagram for "positioner 1"

Figure E-26: Function circuit diagram for "positioner 1"


Example Circuits




Example Circuits

E.14 Example for the "soft starter" circuit

E.14.1 Circuit diagram for the "soft starter"

Figure E-35: Circuit diagram (1 of 2) for the "soft starter"


Example Circuits

Figure E-36: Circuit diagram (2 of 2) for the "soft starter"


Example Circuits

E.14.2 Function circuit diagram for the "soft starter"

Figure E-37: Function circuit diagram for the "soft starter"


Example Circuits

E.15 Example for the "soft starter with reversing contactor" circuit


Example Circuits

E.15.1 Circuit diagram for the "soft starter with reversing contactor"

Figure E-38: Circuit diagram (1 of 2) for the "soft starter with reversing contactor"


Example Circuits

Figure E-39: Circuit diagram (2 of 2) for the "soft starter with reversing contactor"


Example Circuits

E.15.2 Function circuit diagram for the "soft starter with reversing contactor"

Figure E-40: Function circuit diagram for the "soft starter with reversing contactor"


Safety and Commissioning Information for EEx Areas FIn this chapter

In this chapter you will find safety and commissioning information for potentially explosive areas. It is imperative that you observe this information when you have to protect motors in potentially explosive areas.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• planners and configurators• commissioners• maintenance and service personnel.

Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge:• explosion protection• IEC 60079-14/EN 60079-14/DIN VDE 0165 - 1 Electrical apparatus for explo-

sive gas atmospheres - Electrical installations in hazardous areas (other than mines)

• IEC 60079-17/EN 60079-17/DIN VDE 0165 - 10 - 1 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres - Inspection and maintenance of electrical installa-tions in hazardous areas (other than mines)

• IEC 61241-14/DIN VDE 0165 - 2 Electrical apparatus for use in the presence of combustible dust - Selection and installation

• IEC 61241-17/DIN VDE 0165 - 10 - 2 Electrical apparatus for use in the presence of combustible dust - Inspection and maintenance of electrical installations in hazardous areas (other than mines)

• VDE 0118 for the erection of electrical installations in mines• Ordinance on industrial safety and health.

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 F-1

Safety and Commissioning Information for EEx Areas

F.1 General

Information and standards

The increased danger in potentially explosive areas makes it necessary to carefully observe the following notes and standards:• IEC 60079-14/EN 60079-14/DIN VDE 0165 - 1 Electrical apparatus for explo-

sive gas atmospheres - Electrical installations in hazardous areas (other than mines)

• IEC 60079-17/EN 60079-17/DIN VDE 0165 - 10 - 1 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres - Inspection and maintenance of electrical installa-tions in hazardous areas (other than mines)

• IEC 61241-14/DIN VDE 0165 - 2 Electrical apparatus for use in the presence of combustible dust - Selection and installation

• IEC 61241-17/DIN VDE 0165 - 10 - 2 Electrical apparatus for use in the presence of combustible dust - Inspection and maintenance of electrical installations in hazardous areas (other than mines)

• VDE 0118 for the erection of electrical installations in mines• Ordinance on industrial safety and health.

All 3UF7 devices are approved under Device Group I, Category "M2" (mining) and Device Group II, Category 2 in the area "GD" (areas in which explosive gas, steam, fog and air mixtures, as well as inflammable dust are present):

*) Notice: The safety and commissioning information is also valid for devices with BVS 04 ATEX F 003 certificate numbers.

The devices are suitable for the protection of motors in explosive atmosphe-res according to the standards listed above.Tests other than those stipulated by law (Ordinance on industrial safety

and health) are not necessary.

Warning All work for connecting, commissioning and maintenance must be carried out by qualified, responsible personnel. Unprofessional behavior can cause serious damage to persons and goods.

BVS 06 ATEX F 001 II (2) GD *)

BVS 06 ATEX F 001 I (M2) *)

SIMOCODE pro F-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01


F.2 Setting up and Commissioning

Attention Follow the operating instructions (enclosed with the devices) SIMOCODE pro

Basic device Order number 3ZX1012-0UF70-1AA1 Current measuring module Order number 3ZX1012-0UF71-1AA1 Current/volt. measuring module Order number 3ZX1012-0UF77-1BA1 Digital module Order number 3ZX1012-0UF73-1AA1

F.2.1 Setting the Rated Current of the Motor

Set the 3UF7 to the rated motor current (according to the type plate or design test certificate of the motor).

Attention Note the tripping class/tripping characteristic curve of the 3UF7. Select the tripping class so that the motor is also thermally protected even with a stalled rotor. Motors, cables and contactors must be designed for the selected tripping class.

Attention Set the response of the overload protection to "Switch off"!



Example

Motor 500 V, 50/60 Hz, 110 kW, 156 A, temperature class T3, time TE = 11 s, IA/Ie = 5.5:

Figure F-1: Switch-off conditions of the EExe motor, selected: CLASS 10

IA/Ie = 5.5

TE = 11 s



F.2.2 SIMOCODE pro with Thermistor Input

For the 3UF70 you can use a type A temperature sensor with a characteri-stic curve according to IEC 60947-8 (DIN VDE 0660, Part 303), DIN 44081 and DIN 44082. Depending on the number of sensors, this results in the following tripping and restart temperatures:

Figure F-2: Typical characteristic curve of a type A sensor (logarithmic scale)

Depending on the number of sensors, the following tripping and restart temperatures result in relation to the NFT (nominal functioning temperature of the sensor):

Table F-1: Tripping and restart temperatures

The specified temperatures are limit values.

Attention Set the response of the activated thermistor to "Switch off"!

Tripping temperature Restart temperature

3 sensors NFT + 4 K NFT - 7 K

6 sensors NFT - 5 K NFT - 20 K



F.2.3 Wiring of the Sensor Circuit

Caution Lay the measuring circuit cables as separate control cables. The use of cores of the motor feeder or other main current cables is not per-mitted. Shielded control cables must be used if extremely inductive or capacitive interferences are to be expected due to high-voltage cables that are laid par-allel to each other.

Maximum cable length of the sensor circuit cables:

Table F-2: Maximum cable length of the sensor circuit cables

It is recommended to evaluate the short-circuit recognition of the sensor cable.If the short-circuit recognition of the sensor cable is not evaluated, the sen-sor resistance must be measured with a suitable measuring device during commissioning or after modifications/maintenance work has been carried out (mounting, demounting the system).

F.2.4 Short-circuit Protection according to IEC 60947-4-1 for Type of

Coordination 2

The short-circuit protection must be ensured by separate overcurrent pro-tection devices.

Caution Note the respective maximum fuse protection of the contactor for type of coordination 2 when combining with other contactors.

Cable

cross section

Cable lengths at the thermistor input

without short-circuit

recognition

with short-circuit recognition 1)

2.5 mm2 2x 2,800 m 2x 250 m

1.5 mm2 2x 1,500 m 2x 150 m

0.5 mm2 2x 500 m 2x 50 m

1) A short circuit in the sensor circuit is recognized up to this maximum cable length.



F.2.5 Cable Protection

Caution Avoid impermissibly high surface temperatures of the cables by correctly dimensioning the cross sections! Select a sufficient cross section - especially with heavy starting CLASS 20 to CLASS 40 (see chapter D.6 "Short-circuit Protection with Fuses for Motor Feeders for Short-circuit Currents up to 50 kA and 690 V").

F.2.6 Test

SIMOCODE pro provides users with a convenient method for checking the complete motor protection chain (incl. actuators and sensors such as e.g. contactors, circuit breakers and thermistors). This check can, for example, be used to carry out testing according to IEC 60079-17.This test includes a complete functional test. All three test phases must be run through (hardware test, current feedback, deactivation of the motor con-tactors, see below).The test can be carried out either by pressing the existing "TEST/RESET" buttons or automatically via the bus.Due to the existing self-test routines it is not necessary to add tripping cur-rents to carry out the test

Test phases

• Phase 1: hardware test/lamp test (0 to 2 s): The hardware (e.g. the thermistor electronics) is tested, all LEDs and displays are activated, as are the lamp controls. The contactor controls remain unchan-ged.

• Phase 2: hardware test results (2 to 5 s): If there is an fault, the "HW fault basic unit" fault is triggered. If there is no fault,

– the "GEN. FAULT" LED flashes if no main current is flowing– the "GEN. FAULT" LED flickers if main current is flowing in all three pha-

ses (special case: for "1-phase load" in one phase).• Phase 3: relay test (> 5 s):

If a test is implemented with switch-off, the contactor controls are deactiva-ted.



The following table shows the test phases carried out when the "TEST/RESET" button is pressed for the respective period of time:

Test phase

Status Without main current With main current

O.K. Fault *) O.K. Fault

Hardware test/lamp test

< 2 s

"DEVICE" LED Green Green Green Green

"GEN.FAULT" LED

Contactor control Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged

Show QL*

Results of the hardware test/lamp test

2 s - 5 s"DEVICE" LED Green Red Green Red

"GEN.FAULT" LED

Contactor control Unchanged Deactivated Unchanged Deactivated

Relay test

> 5 s


"GEN.FAULT" LED

Contactor control Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated

LED lit/activated LED flashing LED flickering LED off

*) "Fault" displayed after 2 s

Table F-3: States of the status LEDs/contactor controls during the test



F.2.7 Further Safety Instructions

Caution Only the relay outputs of the 3UF70 basic unit or the 3UF730 monostable digital module may be used for the protection function!

Warning The 3UF7 is not suitable for set-up in potentially explosive areas. The device may only be used in a switchgear cabinet which has at least the IP 4x degree of protection. When setting up in potentially explosive areas, the 3UF7 may not cause any danger of fire. Corresponding measures must be taken (e.g. encapsulation).

Attention The 3UF7 is not suitable for the load-side operation of frequency converters.

F.2.8 Ambient Conditions

Permitted ambient temperature range:• Storage/transport: -40 °C to +80 °C• Operation: -25 °C to +60 °C.

F.3 Maintenance and Repairs

The devices are maintenance-free.

Warning Repairs on the device may only be carried out by the manufacturer.

F.4 Guarantee

The guarantee presumes the observance of this safety and commissioning information of the operating instructions SIMOCODE pro

Basic device Order number 3ZX1012-0UF70-1AA1 Current measuring module Order number 3ZX1012-0UF71-1AA1 Current/voltage measuring module Order number 3ZX1012-0UF77-1BA1 Digital module Order number 3ZX1012-0UF73-1AA1 and the complete manual Order number 3UF7970-0AA01-0



F.5 Further Information

You will find further information about the 3UF7• in the Siemens catalogs LV1 or LV1T "Low-voltage Controls and Distribution -

SIRIUS - SENTRON - SIVACON"

or• on the internet at http://www.ad.siemens.com/csi/cd.


http://www.ad.siemens.com/csi/cd

Index

Numerics Assignment of cyclic control and

SIMOCODE pro

0/4 A -20 mA signal monitoring 5-143UF50 compatibility mode 9-19-pole SUB-D connection 13-31

A

A/B terminals 13-31Abbreviations A-3, B-3Abbreviations and specifications A-3Access to data records in STEP 7 12-21Accessories 1-19, 1-30, C-15Acknowledgement of faults 10-6Active control stations 4-57, A-2Active control stations, contactor & lamp

controls and status signal of the control functions 4-57

Active power monitoring 1-11, 5-1, 5-12, Gl-1

Actual analog signal value 1-16Acyclic receive 7-15Acyclic send 6-3, 6-16Acyclic services 6-16, 7-15Acyclic signaling data 6-3, 6-16, 12-1Acyclic writing and reading of

DPV1 data records 12-15Addressing plug 1-19, 1-22, 1-30, 13-25,

13-29, Gl-1Alarm, faults and system messages 15-1Alarms 12-6, 12-13AM - inputs 7-12AM - output function block 6-10Ambient conditions F-10Analog connecting blocks 1-33Analog module (AM) 1-2, 1-12, 1-18,

1-27, 1-28, 5-14, D-8, Gl-1Analog module inputs 7-1, 7-3, 7-12Analog module open circuit 15-2Analog module outputs 6-1, 6-3, 6-10Analog module pin assignment 13-17Analog temperature monitoring 1-9, 5-1,

5-21Analog value recording 8-1 to 8-3Analog values 1-8Another start permitted 15-2Apparent power 1-16

signaling data for predefined control functions B-40

Automatic acknowledgement of faults reset 10-6

Auto-Reset 3-9, 10-10

B

Basic factory default settings 2-2, 14-2, E-2, Gl-2

Basic unit (BU) 1-10, 1-20, C-2, Gl-2Basic unit outputs 6-3Basic unit inputs 7-3Basic unit pin assignment 13-9Baud rate Gl-1Binary connecting blocks 1-33Binary inputs 1-9, 7-1Binary inputs on the basic units

and digital modules 7-1Bistable relay outputs 1-9Blocked positioner 15-2Blocking 15-2Blocking limit 3-11Blocking protection Gl-2Basic unit - input settings 7-5Basic unit - inputs function block 7-4Basic unit outputs 6-5Bus Gl-2Bus fault/PLC/DCS fault response 10-18Bus monitoring 10-17, 10-18Bus parameters 12-1Bus segment Gl-2Bus termination modules 13-32Bus/PLC fault - reset 10-18Buttons D-11

C

Cable cross sections 13-7Cable lengths D-4Cable length

of the sensor circuit cables F-6Cable protection F-7Cables 13-7Catalogs LV1 or LV1T F-10

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 Index-1

Index

Changing of the parameters is not permis-sible in the current mode 15-2

Channel-related diagnostics 12-6, 12-12Characteristic curve of a type A sensor

F-5Check list for selecting the device

series 1-8Circuit breaker (MCCB) 1-13, 4-23, B-43,

E-10, E-11Circuit breaker control 1-20Class Gl-2Class 1 master 12-2, 12-15, Gl-3Class 2 master 12-2, Gl-3Class interval 3-11Clockwise rotation 4-27Cold starting 10-8Cold starting function test 10-8Color coding of the connection cable

13-28, 13-30Commissioning 2-9, 14-1 to 14-3, F-3Communication 1-14, 12-1Communication principle 12-4Compatibility mode 1-14Configuration fault 15-2Configuration for SIMOCODE pro V

(example) 13-26Configuration of the diagnostic

response 12-6Configuring a reversing starter 2-1Connecting cables 1-19, 1-30, 13-25, Gl-3Connecting plugs with sockets 1-34Connecting system components

to the system interface 13-27, 13-29Connecting the PROFIBUS DP to the

9-pole SUB-D socket 13-31Connection D-4Connection cross sections

D-4, D-7 to D-10Connection for voltage measuring

D-6Contactor 4-57Contactor & lamp controls A-2Control circuit D-7, D-8Control commands 4-1, 4-7, 4-19, 4-27,

4-31, 4-41, 4-47, 4-52Control data from PROFIBUS DP 1-33,

7-1Control function 4-1, 4-2Control function

"Circuit breaker" (MCCB) 4-22 "Dahlander" 4-31, 4-34 "Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation" 4-34 "Direct starter" 4-17 "Overload relay" 4-16 "Pole-changing switch" 4-38

"Pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation" 4-41 "Positioner" 4-47 "Reversing starter" 4-19 "Soft starter" 4-52 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" E-43 "Star-delta starter" 4-24 "Star-delta starter with reversal of the direction of rotation" 4-27 "Valve" 4-45

Control functions 1-13, 4-10, 4-57, Gl-3Control programs 1-2Control station - local control 1-6, 4-3Control station - operator panel 4-2, 4-4Control station - PC 4-2, 4-4Control station - PLC/DCS 4-2, 4-3Control station settings 4-9Control stations 4-1, Gl-3Controlling lamps for displaying the opera-

ting states 6-4Controlling the main contactor in the motor

feeder 6-4Cooling down period 3-7Cooling down time 1-16, Gl-4Cos phi 1-25, Gl-4Counter 11-2Counter settings 11-9Counter-clockwise rotation 4-27Counters 1-15, 11-8Counters logic modules 11-8Cover 1-22Current in phases 1, 2 and 3 1-16Current limits 1-10, 3-11Current limits monitoring 1-8, 1-10, 5-1,

5-5Current limits monitoring I< 5-7Current limits monitoring I> 5-6Current limits function block 5-5Current limits values 5-5Current measuring 1-8, D-5Current measuring module (IM)

1-17, 1-24, 5-5, 13-19, C-3 to C-7, D-5, Gl-4 with an external current transformer (interposing transformer) 13-22

Current measuring with current measuring modules 13-19, 13-20

Current transformer 3-4Current/voltage measuring module

(UM) 1-2, 1-17, 1-25, 5-5, 5-8, 5-12, 13-20, C-8 to C-12, D-5, Gl-4

Cyclic receive 7-14, 12-5Cyclic data transfer 12-15Cyclic output of an analog value 6-13Cyclic send 6-14, 12-5

SIMOCODE pro Index-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6060-22 DS 01

Index

SIMOCODE pro

Cyclic send data 6-15Cyclic services 1-14, 6-15, 7-14Cyclic signaling data 2-12, 6-3, 6-15, 12-1

D

Dahlander 1-13, 1-20, 4-33, B-46, E-16, E-17

Dahlander control function 4-32Dahlander reversing starter 4-12Dahlander starter 4-12Dahlander with reversal of the direction of

rotation 4-36, 4-37, B-47, E-18 to E-20Data access 12-5Data formats B-1Data record 130 -

Basic device parameter 1 B-17Data record 131 -

Basic device parameter 2 B-22Data record 132 -

Extended device parameter 1 B-26Data record 133 -

Extended device parameter 2 B-32Data record 139 - marking B-35Data record 160 - communication

parameters B-36Data record 165 - comments B-36Data record 202 - acyclic receive B-37Data record 203 - acyclic send B-38Data record 224 - password protection

B-39Data record 67 - process image of the

outputs B-6Data record 69 - process image of the

inputs B-7Data record 92 - device diagnostics B-9Data record 94 - measured values B-15Data record 95 - service/statistical

data B-16Data records 12-21, B-1, B-2Debounce time 1-28Degree of protection (according to

60529) D-2Delay parameter 3-9Delay pre-warning 3-9Delays inputs 7-9Device data 12-2Device data (GSD file) Gl-4Device parameters 12-1Device series 1-2Devices 1-17Diagnostic alarm 12-6, 12-13Diagnostic data 1-16, 12-6Diagnostics

for device errors 12-6 for device faults 12-6 for messages 12-6

Diagnostics for warnings 12-6

Digital module (DM) 1-18, 1-27, D-7, Gl-4Digital module 1 inputs 7-3Digital module 1 outputs 6-3Digital module 2 inputs 7-3Digital module 2 outputs 6-3Digital module outputs 6-8Digital module pin assignment 13-11Dimension drawings C-1Direct starter 1-4, 1-5, 1-8, 1-13, 4-12,

4-18, B-41, E-6, E-7Direction of rotation 4-19Display D-3, D-7 to D-9, D-11DM - inputs function blocks 7-8DM - inputs settings 7-9Door adapter 1-19, 1-30, C-15, Gl-5Double 0 15-2Double 1 15-2DP master 12-2, Gl-5DP master

with DPV1 alarm support (DPV1 alarm mode) 12-19 without DPV1 alarm support (DPV1 alarm mode) 12-19

DP masters which are operated in "DPV1" DP mode 12-20 which are operated in "S7 compatible" DP mode 12-20

DP slave/DP standard slave Gl-5DPV1 slave 12-2DPV1 slave via GSD 12-15

E

Early warning and fault signals 1-16Earth fault monitoring 5-1, 5-2Earth-fault module (EM) 1-18, 1-27, 1-28,

D-9, Gl-5Earth-fault module pin assignment 13-1Earth-fault monitoring 1-8 to 1-10, 1-18,

Gl-5EEx e applications 3-6, 3-12, 5-22Electronic overload protection 1-10EMC emitted interference

according to IEC 60947-1 D-2EMC stability

according to IEC 60947-1 D-2Emergency start 1-14, 10-2, 10-16, Gl-5Enabled control command 4-7Enables 4-1, 4-7Error protocolling with time stamp 1-16Error types 12-12Evaluating diagnostic data 12-19Example circuits E-1

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 Index-3

Index

Example for connecting the terminals of the ana-log module 13-18 for connecting the terminals of the basic unit 13-10 for connecting the terminals of the digi-tal module 13-12 for connecting the terminals of the earth-fault module 13-14 for connecting the terminals of the tem-perature module 13-16

Execution ON command 15-2Execution stop command 15-3Execution time 4-14, 4-15Expansion modules 1-27, C-14, D-7, Gl-6Explosion protection F-1External current transformer 13-22External earth fault 15-3External earth fault monitoring 1-10, 5-2

with summation current transformer 5-4

External fault 1-14, 10-2, 10-9, 10-10, 15-3

External fault response 10-10External fault settings 10-10

F

Fault - Antivalence 15-3Fault - Bus 15-3Fault - End position 15-3Fault - PLC/DCS 10-17, 15-3Fault - Power failure UVO 10-15Fault - Temporary components 15-3Fault - Test position feedback (TPF) 10-8Feedback (F) OFF 15-3Feedback (F) ON 15-4Feedback faults 1-16Feedback ON 4-13, 4-14, 4-38Feedback time 4-14, 4-15Fixing lugs for screw attachments 13-2Flashing 1-15, 11-2, 11-19Flashing logic modules 11-19Flashing settings 11-19Flickering 1-15, 11-2, 11-20Flickering logic modules 11-20Flickering settings 11-20Frequencies D-2Function block Gl-6Function test F-7

G

General representation of the input types 7-2

GSD 9-2, 12-2GSD file 1-32, 12-16Guarantee F-9

H

Hardware faults 15-4Hardware test 10-5, F-7, F-8Heating up motor model 1-16, 3-7Hysteresis

for the current limits I> 5-6 for the current limits I< 5-7 for voltage, power factor (cos phi), power 5-9 for 0/4-20 mA signal 5-16 for monitoring functions 5-23

I

Identification-related diagnostics 12-10Independent operation 1-3, Gl-6Information and standards F-2Input characteristic curve D-4Inputs 7-1, 7-3Inputs (binary) D-4, D-7Installation guidelines

for the PROFIBUS DP 13-32Installation location D-2Integration of SIMOCODE pro

as DPV1 Slave via GSD in the configura-tion software 12-16 as S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro 12-18 as SIMATIC PDM objekt (DPV1 slave via GSD) in STEP-7-HW Config 12-17 in SIMATIC S7 with OM SIMOCODE ES 12-20

Interfaces 13-1Interlocking time 4-13, 4-14, 4-19, 5-20Internal comments 1-16Internal earth fault 15-4Internal earth fault monitoring 1-10, 5-3

K

Key-operated switch operation 4-5

L

Lamp controls 4-11, 4-57Lamp test 10-5, F-7, F-8Legend strip 1-22, 1-23Light-emitting diodes of the operator

panel 6-1Limit monitor 1-15, 11-2, 11-21 to 11-23Limit monitor logic modules 11-21Limit temperature 3-12List of abbreviations 1-1Load type 4-13Local 4-5, 4-6Local control 4-9Local control station 2-2, 2-3, 2-9, 4-2, 7-8Locking the contactor 4-13Logic module 1-15, 11-1, 11-2, 11-15,

Gl-6
SIMOCODE pro
Index-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6060-22 DS 01

Index

SIMOCODE pro

M

Main circuit D-5Maintenance F-10Making internal assignments 4-52, 4-55Manual operation 4-5Manufacturer's identification 12-9Master Gl-6Master PROFIBUS address 12-9Measurement frequency D-5Memory module 1-19, 1-22, 1-30, 13-25,

13-29, Gl-7Memory module "park position" 1-23Mode selectors 4-5, 4-6, 4-9Modes of operation 4-1, 4-5, 4-6Module fault 15-4Monitoring 1-8, 1-10Monitoring additional process variables via

the analog module 1-12Monitoring current limits Gl-7, 5-6, 5-7Monitoring earth faults Gl-7Monitoring for further availability 1-11Monitoring for undervoltage 1-11Monitoring functions 5-1, Gl-7Monitoring of 0/4 A - 20 mA 5-1, Gl-8Monitoring of the motor current 5-5Monitoring PLC/DCS 1-14, 10-2Monitoring temperature 1-18Monitoring the number of starts 5-19,

Gl-7Monitoring the power factor 5-10, 11-23Monitoring the voltage 5-8, Gl-8Motor control 4-1Motor control functions 1-20Motor feeder 1-4, 1-5, 2-3Motor model 10-16Motor operating hours 1-16Motor protection 3-1, Gl-8Motor protection functions 3-2Motor stop times 1-16Motor switching state 1-16Motor temperature 1-10Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)

4-12Mounting 13-1, 13-3, D-3, D-5, D-7 to

D-9, D-11Mounting and wiring 13-2Mounting lugs 13-2 to 13-5Mounting

the basic units and expansion modules 13-3

Mounting the current measuring modules 13-4 the current/voltage measuring modules 13-5

N

Navigation in SIMOCODE ES 11-1, 12-1Network contactor 4-27No start permissible 15-4Non-maintained command mode 4-13Non-volatile element 11-2, 1-15 to 11-18Non-volatile elements logic modules

11-16Non-volatile elements settings 11-18NOR function 11-15, 11-18Notes on parameterizing 14-2Number of motor starts 1-16, 5-19Number of overload trippings 1-16Number of permissible starts 1-16Number of starts overshooting limit 5-18Number of starts pre-warning 5-18Number of start-ups 1-12

O

Object Manager (OM) SIMOCODE DP 9-2Object Manager (OM) SIMOCODE pro

1-19, 1-31, 12-2OFF command-reset 10-10Operator panel 4-9OP - buttons function block 7-7Operating data 1-16Operating hours 1-12, 5-17Operating hours monitoring 5-18, Gl-8Operating panel buttons 7-7Operating range D-3Operating, service and diagnostic data

1-16Operation as DPV1 slave downstream

from the Y link 1-14Operation hours monitoring 5-1Operation monitoring 5-17, Gl-8Operational Protection OFF (OPO) 1-14,

10-2, 10-11, 10-12, 15-4, Gl-8Operator enable 4-8Operator Panel (OP) 1-17, 1-22, 13-6,

C-13, D-11, Gl-8Operator panel buttons 7-1, 7-3, 7-6Operator panel LEDs 6-3, 6-6Output of the effective motor current

6-11, 6-12Output response of the timer 11-11Outputs 6-1Overload 3-6, 15-5Overload and Unbalance 15-5Overload protection 1-10, 3-1 to 3-4,

3-11, Gl-9Overload relay 1-8, 1-13, 1-20, 4-12, 4-16,

B-40, E-3, E-5Overshooting the limit value 11-21Overtemperature 5-22Overview of system components 1-17

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 Index-5

Index

P

Panel reset 10-10Parameter 4-13Parameter blocking during start-up

active 15-5Parameter is faulty ("Gen. fault"

category) 15-5Parameterization software 1-31Parameterization start-up 12-15Parameterization via PROFIBUS 12-22Parameterization with

SIMOCODE ES 12-6Pause time 3-7, 4-14, Gl-9PC cable 1-19, 1-30, 13-25, 13-29, Gl-9PCS 7 library SIMOCODE pro 1-31Permissible ambient temperature D-2Permissible number of starts

exceeded 15-6Permissible starts 5-19Phase unbalance 1-10, 1-16, 3-10, 15-6Phase cycle 1-16, 1-25, Gl-4Phase failure 1-8, 1-10Phase sequence identification 1-12Pin assignment of the removable

terminals 13-9, 13-11, 13-13, 13-15, 13-17, 13-21

Pin cross section 13-19, 13-20Plant downtimes 5-17PLC/DCS 4-5, 4-9PLC/DCS monitoring 10-17, 10-18Plugs (analog) 1-33Plugs (binary) 1-33Pole-changing switch 4-12, 4-39, B-48,

E-21, E-23 with reversal of the direction of rotation 4-12, 4-43, 4-44, B-49, E-24 to E-26

Positioner 1-8, 1-13, 4-12, 4-51, 10-11, 10-12, B-51, E-30 to E-39

Power considerations 1-8Power consumption D-3Power factor 1-16Power factor (cos phi) monitoring

1-11, 5-1, 5-10, Gl-9Power failure monitoring 1-14, 10-2,

10-14, 10-15, 15-6Power failure stored-energy time D-4Power management 1-8Power-up time 3-4Prerequisites for commissioning and

servicing 14-2Preventive maintenance 14-6Pre-warning 3-9Pre-warning - overload (I >115%) 15-6Procedure for connecting PROFIBUS DP

to the basic unit 13-31

Procedure for joining connecting cables to the system interface 13-28, 13-29

Process alarm 12-6, 12-14Process and diagnostic alarm 12-15Process monitoring 1-10PROFIBUS DP 1-14, 1-19, 1-31, 2-2, 4-4,

4-52, 4-54, 6-2, 6-3, 6-5, 6-14, 6-16, 7-15, 10-6, 12-2, Gl-9

PROFIBUS DP interface 1-14, D-3, Gl-9PROFIBUS DP on

a 9-pole SUB D socket 13-31PROFIBUS DPV1 6-16, 7-15, 12-2, Gl-10PROFIBUS User Organization (PUO) instal-

lation guidelines 13-32, Gl-10Programmable logical controller (PLC)

Gl-10Programming Device (PD) Gl-10Protecting functions 1-10PTC 3-12Pump 1-6, 1-10Push-through opening 13-19, 13-20, D-5Push-through system 1-17, 13-19, 13-20

R

Rail connection D-6Rail connection system 13-19, 13-20Rated control voltage D-3Rated insulation voltage D-3, D-5, D-7Rated motor current F-3Rated operational voltage D-5Rated surge voltage strength D-3, D-5,

D-7Reading data 12-3Reading out statistical data 14-6Real power 1-16Relay outputs 6-1, D-4, D-7Relay test 10-5, F-7, F-8Remote operation 4-5Remote reset 10-10Remote/automatic 4-5, 4-6Removable terminals 13-2, 13-7, 14-10Repairs F-10Replacing a basic unit 14-9Replacing an expansion unit 14-9Replacing the current measuring module

and the current/voltage measuring module 14-10

Required function is not supported 15-6Reset 1-14, 3-9, 10-2Reset function 10-3, 10-4Reset parameter 3-9Reset settings 10-6Resistive load 4-13Responses x, 3-3Restart delay 10-14Restart delay (staggered) 10-15


Index

SIMOCODE pro

Restart temperature F-5Reversing starter 1-8, 1-13, 2-1, 2-2, 2-9,

4-12, 4-21, B-42, E-8, E-9

S

S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro 12-15Safe isolation according to

IEC 60947-1 D-2Safety and commissioning information for

EEx areas F-1Safety instructions F-9Save switching command 4-13Saving parameters

from a SIMOCODE ES file into a basic unit 14-8 from the basic unit into a SIMOCODE ES file 14-7 from the basic unit into the memory module 14-7 from the memory module into the basic unit 14-7

Screw attachment 13-2 to 13-5Screw terminals 1-33Sensor circuit D-9Sensor circuit error 3-13Sensor error 3-13Sensor measuring circuits 1-11Sensor types 1-29Service data 1-16Service pack 1 1-31Servicing 14-1Set current D-5Setting the PROFIBUS DP address

via SIMOCODE ES 2-11, 14-4 via the addressing plug 2-11, 14-4

Setting the rated current of the motor F-3Setting up F-3Setting up in potentially explosive

areas F-9Shock resistance (sine pulse) D-2Short circuit D-5Short-circuit protection

according to IEC 60947-4-1 for type of coordination 2 F-6

Short-circuit protection for auxiliary contacts (relay outputs) D-4

Signal conditioner 1-15, 11-2, 11-13, 11-14

Signal conditioner logic modules 11-13Signal conditioner settings 11-15Signal types/output responses of non-vola-

tile elements 11-17Signaling data on the PROFIBUS DP 6-1Signaling data to PROFIBUS DP 1-33SIMATIC Gl-10, Gl-11

SIMATIC PDM 4-4, 12-2, Gl-10SIMATIC PDM (PCS7) 12-2SIMATIC powercontrol 12-2SIMATIC S7 1-32, 12-16SIMOCODE ES 1-31, 2-11, 4-1, 6-1, 7-1,

8-1, 9-1, 10-1, 10-10, 11-1, 12-1, 14-2, 14-7, B-35, Gl-10

SIMOCODE ES Graphic 1-19, 1-31SIMOCODE ES parameter files 1-32SIMOCODE ES Professional 1-19, 1-31,

4-4, 12-2, 12-22SIMOCODE ES Smart 1-19, 1-31SIMOCODE ES Smart 2004 +

Service Pack 1 1-31SIMOCODE ES software 2-2SIMOCODE pro integrated with GSD

12-19SIMOCODE pro Object Manager

(OM) Gl-10SIMOCODE pro parameterization 1-30SIMOCODE pro PCS-7 library Gl-11SIMOCODE pro S7 slave 12-3, Gl-11Slave Gl-11Slave diagnostics 12-9Slave modes of operation 12-15Slide control 1-20, 4-50Slider control function 4-49Smooth running down time 4-56Snap-on mounting 13-3Socket assignment table - analog A-12Socket assignment table - digital A-5Sockets (analog) 1-33Sockets (binary) 1-33Soft starter 1-8, 1-13, 4-12, 4-53, B-52,

E-40 to E-42Soft starter control 1-20Soft starter control function 4-53Soft starter with reversing contactor

4-12, 4-54 to 4-56, B-53, E-44 to E-46Software 1-19, 1-31Software tools 1-31Solenoid valve 4-12Specifications A-4, B-3Stall limit 3-11Stall protection 1-10, 3-2, 3-3, 3-11Standard diagnostics 12-6, 12-15Standard function 1-14, 10-1,10-2, Gl-11Standard motor feeders 1-8Standard mounting rail mounting 13-4,

13-5Standards F-2Star contactor 4-27Star-delta connection 4-28Star-delta reversing starter 4-12Star-delta starter 1-8, 1-13, 1-20, 4-12,

B-44, E-12, E-13

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 Index-7

Index

Star-delta starter with reversal of the direction of rotation 4-29, 4-30, B-45, E-14, E-15

Station Gl-11Station status 12-8Station status 1 12-8Station status 2 12-9Station status 3 12-9Statistical data 14-6, Gl-11Status - cooling down time active 15-6Status - emergency start executed 15-6Status - Test Position Feedback (TPF)

15-6Status messages 12-6, 12-11, 12-15, A-2Status signal 4-11, 4-57States of the status LEDs/contactor con-

trols during the test 10-5, F-8STEP 7 12-16 to 12-18, Gl-11Stop time 1-12, 5-17Stop time > 15-6Stop time monitoring 5-18, Gl-11Strip lengths 13-7, 13-21Summation current transformer 1-2, 1-18Supplying the inputs

of the basic unit 13-8 of the digital module 13-11

Switch off time 3-4Switching from star to delta 4-24, 4-27,

4-30Switching interval 4-13, 4-25, 4-38Switching the direction of rotation 4-19,

4-27, 4-34, 4-41, 4-54Switching the direction of travel 4-48Switching the speed 4-31, 4-34, 4-38,

4-41System description 1-1System interface 1-17, 13-28, D-5System interface cover 1-19, 1-30,

13-27, 13-29, Gl-12System interfaces 13-29, D-3, D-7 to D-9,

D-11System interfaces

on basic units, expansion modules, cur-rent measuring modules and current/voltage measuring modules 13-27

System interfaces on the operator panel 13-29

T

Tables A-1Target groups 4-1Technical data D-1Telegram description 12-5Temperature in the sensor measuring

circuits 1, 2 and 3 1-16

Temperature module 1-2, 1-11, 1-18, 1-27, 1-29, 15-7, D-9, Gl-12

Temperature module - warning level overshot 15-7

Temperature module inputs 7-1, 7-3, 7-10, 7-11

Temperature module out of range 15-7Temperature module pin assignment

13-15Temperature monitoring 1-11, Gl-12Temperature monitoring system 1-29Temperature sensors 1-2, 5-21Test 1-14, 10-2, 10-5, F-7Test function 10-3, 10-4Test function block 10-3Test phases 10-5, F-8Test position 10-7Test position feedback (TPF) 1-14, 10-2,

10-7, 10-8, 15-7, Gl-12Test shutdown 15-7TEST/RESET button 10-10, D-3Thermal motor model 10-4Thermistor motor protection 1-8, D-4Thermistor open circuit 15-7Thermistor protection 1-10, 3-1, 3-2,

Gl-12Thermistor sensors 1-10Thermistor short circuit 15-7Thermistor trip level 15-7Thermistors 3-12Tightening torques 13-7, 13-21, D-7 to

D-10Time frame of the start process 5-19Time synchronization 1-14, 12-24Time to trip 1-16Timer 11-2, 11-10Timer logic modules 11-10Timer settings 11-12Timers 1-15Timestamp function block 10-20Timestamping 1-14, 10-2, 10-19, 10-20Timestamping in the fault memory 10-19TM - inputs function block 7-10Torque 4-50Transferring the parameters to the basic

device 2-9Transformation ratio 13-22Transmitting data 12-4Tripping characteristic curve F3Tripping class 3-4, 3-5, F-3, Gl-12Tripping current 1-16Tripping temperature F-5Tripping time 3-5Truth table for 2I/1O logic modules 11-6Truth table for 3I/1O logic modules 11-3Truth table for 5I/2O logic modules 11-7


Index

SIMOCODE pro

Truth tables 1-15, 11-2, 11-4, 11-5Type of current D-5Type of load 3-8Types of signals/output responses

11-14, 11-17

U

Unbalance 1-8Unbalance limit 3-10Unbalance protection 3-1 to 3-3, 3-10,

Gl-12Undershooting the limit value 11-21UVO fault 10-14

V

Valve 4-46, B-50, E-27, E-29Valve control 1-20Valve control function 4-46Valves 1-8, 1-13Variants for slide control 4-50Versions of digital modules 1-27Voltage in phases 1, 2 and 3 1-16Voltage measuring 1-8Voltage monitoring 1-8, 1-11, 5-1, 5-8,

Gl-12

W

Warning level 0/4 - 20 mA 15-8Warning level 0/4 - 20 mA> overshot

15-8Warning level cos phi 15-7Warning level I 15-7Warning level I> overshot 15-7Warning level P 15-7Warning level P> overshot 15-7Warning level U 15-7Warnings 1-14Watchdog 1-14, 10-2, 10-17Watchdog settings 10-17Win SIMOCODE DP converter 1-32, 9-1,

Gl-12Win SIMOCODE DP parameter files 1-32Wiring 13-1, 13-7Wiring of the sensor circuit F-6Wiring

the basic units and expansion modules 13-7 the current measuring modules 13-19 the current/voltage measuring modules 13-20 the removable terminals 13-9, 13-18, 13-31

Writing data 12-3Writing/reading data records B-2Wrong password 15-8

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 Index-9

Index




Acycl. Acyclic

AM Analog module

AS Alarm switch

AS Auxiliary switch

AWG American Wire Gauge

BU Basic unit

CF Control function

Cycl. Cyclic

DCS Process control system

DM Digital module

DP Decentralized periphery


EMC Electromagnetic compatibility

EMF Electromotive force

F Feedback

FC Feedback CLOSE

FMS Fieldbus message specification

FO Feedback OPEN

GSD Device data


LC Local control

NTC Negative temperature coefficient (resistance dependent on temperature)

OM Object manager

OP Operator panel

OPO Operational protection OFF

PCS Process control system

PDM Process device manager

PG Programming device

PLC Programmable logical controller

PTC Positive temperature coefficient (resistance dependent on temperature)

TC Torque switch CLOSE

Th Thermistor


TO Torque switch OPEN

TPF Test position feedback


SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 Abbreviations-1


SIMOCODE pro Abbreviations-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01

Glossary

Active power monitoring

SIMOCODE pro offers the option of two-phase active power monitoring in which not only the current, but also the power factor (cos phi) is taken into account.

Addressing plug

The addressing plug is necessary to enable the "hardware-related" allocation of the PROFIBUS DP address to a basic unit without a PC/programming device.

Analog module (AM)

The analog module offers the option of expanding BU 2 with optional analog inputs and outputs (0/4 mA - 20 mA). This makes it possible to measure and monitor any arbitrary process variables which can be mapped on a 0/4 mA - 20 mA signal. In this case, the automation system has free access to the measured process variables.

Baud rate

The baud rate is the speed with which data is transmitted and indicates the number of transmitted bits per second (baud rate = bit rate). With PROFIBUS DP, baud rates from 9.6 kBaud to 12 MBaud are possible.

Basic factory default settings

The basic factory default settings are used to reset all parameters of a switching device to the default settings to which they were set at the factory. The basic factory default settings can be configured via the "TEST/RESET" button on the basic device or via the SIMOCODE ES software.

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 Glossary-1

Glossary

Basic unit (BU)

The basic units are the fundamental components of the SIMOCODE pro system. Basic units are always required when using SIMOCODE pro. They have the same enclosure width of 45 mm and are equipped with removable terminals.Basic unit 1 is the fundamental component of the SIMOCODE pro C device series. It contains the important motor control functions and motor protection functions. Basic unit 2 is the fundamental component of the SIMOCODE pro V device series. It contains all functions and fulfils all requirements for motor protection, motor control, diagnostics and monitoring.

Blocking protection

After the motor current overshoots an adjustable blocking limit (current limit), a definable and delayable response can be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro. For example, the motor can be set to switch off quickly independently of the overload protection. The blocking protection is only active after the parameterized class interval has elapsed, e.g. for Class 10 after 10 seconds, and prevents unnecessarily high thermal and mechanical loads as well as premature deterioration of the motor.

Bus

A common transmission path with which all stations are connected. It has two defined ends. With PROFIBUS, the bus is a two-wire line (copper conductor) or a fiber optic cable.

Bus segment

The PROFIBUS DP consists of at least one bus segment. A bus segment has at least two stations, one of which must be a DP master. A maximum of 32 stations can be connected to a bus segment.

Class

The class (tripping class) indicates the maximum tripping time in which SIMOCODE must trip cold at the 7.2-fold set current Ie (motor protection according to IEC 60947). If e.g. Class 10 was set for SIMOCODE pro, it is guaranteed that the (cold) motor will be switched off at a 7.2-fold set current after 10 seconds. The tripping class can be set to 8 different settings ranging from Class 5 to Class 40.

Class 1 master

Active stations on PROFIBUS DP. The cyclic data exchange with other stations is characteristic for this type of master. Typical class 1 masters are, for example, PLCs with a PROFIBUS DP connection.

SIMOCODE pro Glossary-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01

Glossary

Class 2 master

Optional stations on PROFIBUS DP. Typical class 2 masters are, for example,• PC/programming devices with the

"SIMOCODE ES professional" software• PDM (PCS7)• PC with "SIMATIC powercontrol" software (power manage-

ment).

Connecting cable

Connecting cables are necessary for connecting the individual basic units with their current measuring modules and, if required, with their expansion modules or operator panels. They are available in various versions and lengths (ribbon cable 0.025 m, 0.1 m, 0.5 m; round cable 2.0 m). The total length of all connecting cables must not exceed 3 m per system!

Control functions

Control functions (e.g. direct starters, reversing starters) are used for controlling load feeders. They have the following important features:• Monitoring the switch-on/switch-off process (no current

flows in the main circuit without the ON command)• Monitoring the OFF state (no current flows in the main

circuit without the ON command)• Monitoring the ON status• Switching off in case of a fault.

Control stations

Control stations are places from which control commands are issued to the motor. The "Control stations" function block is used for administration, switching and priorization of these different control stations. With this, SIMOCODE pro allows the parallel administration of up to four different control stations. Dependent on the control function, up to 5 different control commands can be transmitted from every control station to SIMOCODE pro.• Local control, in the direct vicinity of the motor. Control

commands are issued via pushbutton.• PLC/DCS, switching commands are issued by the

automation system (remote).• PC, control commands are issued via an operator control

station or via PROFIBUS DPV1 with the SIMOCODE ES software.

• Operator panel, control commands are issued via the buttons of the operator panel in the switchgear cabinet door.


Glossary

Cooling down time

The cooling down time is the specified time after which an overload tripping can be reset. It is usually five minutes.Supply voltage failures of SIMOCODE pro during this time extend the specified time correspondingly.

Current Measuring module (IM)

Current measuring modules are used together with the basic units of the SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V device series. The current measuring module must be selected according to the set current to be monitored (rated operating current of the motor). The current measuring modules cover current ranges between 0.3 A and 630 A, with interposing transformers up to 820 A.

Current/voltage measuring module

The SIMOCODE pro V device series offers the option of using a current/voltage measuring module instead of a current measuring module. As well as measuring the motor current, current/voltage measuring modules also• monitor voltages up to 690 V• evaluate and monitor power and the power factor (cos phi)• Monitoring of the phase cycle.

Device data (GSD file)

The device data (GSD) contains a description of the respective switching device. It is used for integrating the switching device into SIMATIC S7 or into any DP standard master system (automation system).

Digital module (DM)

Digital modules offer the option of further increasing the types and number of binary inputs and outputs on basic unit 2, if required. A maximum of two digital modules can be connected to basic unit 2. All versions can be combined with each other. SIMOCODE pro V can thus be extended to a maximum of 12 binary inputs and 7 binary outputs.

Door adapter

The door adaptor is necessary for making the system interface of a basic unit available at an easily accessible location (e.g. front panel), thus enabling fast parameterization.


Glossary

DP master

A master which works with the DP protocol according to the EN 50 170 standard, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.Cyclic signaling data is exchanged once in every DP cycle between the DP master and the DP slave. In this case, the DP master sends the cyclic control data to SIMOCODE pro. In response, SIMOCODE pro sends the cyclic signaling data to the DP master.

DP slave/DP standard slave

A slave which is operated on the PROFIBUS bus with the PROFIBUS DP protocol and works according to the EN 50 170 standard, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.

Earth-fault module (EM)

The earth-fault module offers the option of implementing powerful external earth-fault monitoring in connection with the 3UL22 summation current transformer (making it possible to evaluate rated fault currents of 0.3 A, 0.5 A and 1 A). In addition to the internal earth-fault monitoring function which is supported by both device series, SIMOCODE pro V can be expanded by an additional and more precise external earth-fault monitoring system.

Earth-fault monitoring

The basic units have• internal earth-fault monitoring:

For motors with a 3-wire connection, the basic unit evaluates a possible fault current/earth-fault current from the total current. Internal earth-fault monitoring is only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in networks which are either grounded directly or grounded with low impedance.

• external earth-fault monitoring with SIMOCODE pro V: the earth-fault module (EM) evaluates rated fault currents using an externally connected summation current transformer (e.g 3UL22).

Emergency start

The emergency start deletes the thermal memory from SIMOCODE pro each time it is activated. This enables the motor to restart immediately after an overload tripping. This function can be used to:• enable an immediate restart/reset after an overload switch-

off• influence the operation of the thermal memory (motor

model), if required.Since the emergency start is edge-triggered, it is not possible for this function to continuously affect the thermal motor model.


Glossary

Expansion modules

Expansion modules are intended as optional additions for the SIMOCODE pro V device series. The following expansion modules are available:• Digital module (DM)• Analog module (AM)• Earth-fault module (EM)• Temperature module (TM).All expansion modules have the same design with an enclosure width of 22.5 mm. They are equipped with 2 system interfaces (incoming/outgoing) and removable terminals.

Function block

Predefined function blocks for control functions, logic functions and standard functions. The digital plugs and sockets have not already been connected at the factory with the binary inputs and the relay outputs of the basic unit. The internal wiring (connecting the plugs and sockets) is determined by the user according to his/her respective application.

Independent operation

SIMOCODE pro C and pro V protect and control the motor feeder independently of the automation system. Even if the automation system (PLC) fails or if communication is disrupted, the motor feeder remains fully protected and controllable. SIMOCODE pro can be used without being connected to PROFIBUS DP. This can also be easily connected at a later period in time, if required.

Logic module

Logical functions, time relay functions and counter functions are implemented with logic modules.

Master

PROFIBUS DP is based on master-slave architecture. Telegrams are sent from the master to the actuated station (slave) and are answered by it in return.

Memory module

The memory module is plugged into the system interface and is used for fast reading in or out of the entire SIMOCODE pro parameterization, e.g. in the case of a unit replacement.

Monitoring current limits

Monitoring of current limits is used for process monitoring. Impending irregularities in the system can be detected in good time: Exceeding a current limit which is still below the


Glossary

overload limit can e.g. be an indiction that there is a dirty filter on a pump or that a motor bearing is running more and more sluggishly. Falling below a current limit can be the first hint that a drive motor belt is worn out.

Monitoring earth faults

The basic units have• internal earth-fault monitoring:

via current measuring modules or current/voltage measuring modules is only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in networks which are either grounded directly or grounded with low impedance

• external earth-fault monitoring: via a summation current transformer and earth-fault module is normally used for networks which are grounded with high impedance.

Monitoring functions

The monitoring functions• Earth-fault monitoring• Current limit monitoring• Voltage monitoring• Power factor (cos phi) monitoring• Active power monitoring• 0/4 A - 20 mA signal monitoring• Operation monitoring• Analog temperature monitoringfunction - similar to motor protection and motor control - "in the background". They can be active or not depending on the chosen control function.

Monitoring the number of starts

The function for monitoring the number of starts is used to protect system parts (motor, switching devices such as e.g. soft starters and converters) from too many impermissible start processes within a parameterizable time frame and thus to prevent damage from occurring. This is especially useful for commissioning or manual control.

Monitoring the voltage

SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of a three-phase network or a one-phase network for undervoltage for voltage limits which can be freely chosen. The response of SIMOCODE pro on reaching a pre-warning or trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed. Voltage measuring is carried out using current/voltage measuring modules.


Glossary

Monitoring the 0/4 A - 20 mA signal

SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the analog signals of a measurement transformer (standard 0/4 - 20 mA output signal). The analog signals are fed to the "0/4 - 20 mA" function block via the analog module.

Motor protection

The basic unit has several protection mechanisms for current-dependent motor protection:• Overload protection• Unbalance protection• Blocking protection• Thermistor protection.

Operator panel (OP)

The operator panel is often integrated into the front panels of motor control centers. It can be used with both the SIMOCODE pro C device series as well as with the SIMOCODE pro V device series. It contains all the status LEDs which are on the basic units, the "TEST/RESET" button and makes the system interface externally available.

Operating hours monitoring

The operating hours monitoring function offers the option of recording the operating hours (service life) of a motor, and generating maintenance prompts for the motor in good time if required.

Operation monitoring

SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating hours and stop times of a motor and restrict the number of motor start-ups in a defined time frame in order to avoid plant downtimes due to failed motors because they were either running too long or they were stopped for too long a period of time.

Operational protection OFF (OPO)

The "Operational protection OFF (OPO)" function block puts the positioner into the safe mode and switches the motor off.

Overload protection

SIMOCODE pro protects three-phase and AC motors in compliance with IEC 60947-4-1. The tripping class can be set to 8 different settings ranging from Class 5 to Class 40.

Pause time

The pause time is the specified time for the cooling response of the motor when switched off under normal operating conditions (not in the case of overload tripping!). After this


Glossary

interval, the thermal memory in SIMOCODE pro is deleted and a new cold start is possible. This makes frequent start-ups within a short period of time possible.

PC cable

A PC is connected via its serial interface to the system interface of a basic unit with the PC cable for device parameterization.

Power factor (cos phi) monitoring

Power factor monitoring monitors the load state of inductive loads. The main field of application is for asynchronous motors in 1-phase or 3-phase networks, whose loads vary greatly. The measuring principle for the power factor (cos phi) is based on the evaluation of the phase displacement between voltage and current in one phase.

PROFIBUS

Process fieldbus, European process and fieldbus standard as defined in the PROFIBUS standard (EN 50 170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS). It lays down the functional, electrical and mechanical properties for a serial bit fieldbus system. PROFIBUS is a bus system that networks PROFIBUS-compatible automation systems and field devices at the cubicle and field level. PROFIBUS is available with the DP protocols (decentralized periphery), FMS (fieldbus message specification), PA (process automatization) or TF (techno-logical functions).

PROFIBUS DP

PROFIBUS bus system with the DP protocol (decentralized periphery). The main task of PROFIBUS DP is fast cyclic data exchange between the central DP devices and the periphery devices.


SIMOCODE pro has an integrated PROFIBUS DP interface (SUB-D socket or terminal connection on the basic units).

PROFIBUS DPV1

Expansion of the DP protocol. This enables acyclic data exchange of parameter, diagnostic, control and test data.

PROFIBUS User Organization (PUO) installation guidelines

For PROFIBUS networks, the PROFIBUS DP/FMS installation guidelines from the PROFIBUS user organization


Glossary

must be adhered to. They contain important information about the cable arrangement and commissioning of PROFIBUS networks.

Programmable logical controller (PLC)

Control whose function is stored as a program in the control unit. The PLC consists of CPU, memory, input/output modules and an internal bus system. The periphery and the programming language are based on the needs of the control engineering.

Programming device (PD)

A programming device is normally a PC which is industry-compatible, compact and transportable. It is characterized by a special hardware and software configuration for SIMATIC programmable logical controllers.

SIMATIC

Term for industrial automation products and systems from Siemens AG.

SIMATIC PDM

You can also configure SIMOCODE pro via the SIMATIC PDM (process device manager). The following options are available:• SIMATIC PDM as a stand-alone program• PDM, integrated into STEP7.

SIMOCODE ES

Standard parameterization software for SIMOCODE pro, which is runnable on a PC/programming device under Windows 2000 or Windows XP.

SIMOCODE pro Object Manager OM

Part of SIMOCODE ES Professional. When SIMOCODE ES Professional and the SIMOCODE pro object manager are installed on a PC/programming device, SIMOCODE ES Professional can be called directly from the Step7 HW configuration. This enables simple and thorough SIMATIC-S7 configuration.

SIMOCODE pro PCS-7 library

The SIMOCODE pro PCS-7 library is used to connect SIMOCODE pro to the SIMATIC PCS 7 process control system. It contains• the corresponding diagnostic and driver blocks with the

respective diagnostic and driver concept of SIMATIC PCS 7• the elements necessary for operator control and process

monitoring (symbols and faceplate).


Glossary

SIMOCODE pro S7 slave

The SIMOCODE pro S7 slave is a special slave and has the following characteristics:• it supports the S7 model (diagnostic alarms, process

alarms)• it is parameterizable.

Slave

PROFIBUS DP is based on master-slave architecture. Telegrams are sent from the master to the actuated station (slave) and are answered by it in return

Standard function

Standard functions are typical motor functions which can be activated according to need and set individually for each motor feeder. They are already available, work independently of the selected control function and can be used/activated as optional supplements.

Station

Device which can send, receive or amplify data via the bus, e.g. master, slave.

Statistical data

SIMOCODE pro makes statistical data available which e.g. can be read out with SIMOCODE ES under "Target system > Service data/statistical data".

STEP 7

Engineering system. Contains programming languages to create user programs for SIMATIC-S7 controls.

Stop time monitoring

SIMOCODE pro can monitor the stop times of a motor in order to avoid plant down times due to failed motors because they were either running too long (wear out) or they were stopped for too long a period of time.

System interface cover IP54

Cover to protect the system interface on the door adaptor or on the operator panel from soiling or to seal it.

Temperature module (TM)

The temperature module offers the option of expanding the SIMOCODE pro V device series by an analog temperature monitoring system. With this, up to 3 analog sensor


Glossary

measuring circuits (two-wire or three-wire system) can be connected. The temperatures recorded can be fully integrated into the process, can be monitored and are also available for a higher-level automation system. You can, for example, implement analog temperature monitoring of the motor windings, the bearings or the coolant or gear box temperature. SIMOCODE pro V supports various sensor types (NTC, KTY83/84, PT100 and PT1000) for use with hard, fluid or gaseous media.

Temperature monitoring

See temperature module (TM).

Test position feedback (TPF)

If the motor feeder is in the test position, its main circuit is isolated from the network. However, the control voltage is connected. The "Cold starting" function test is carried out in this status. Cold starting is defined as the testing of the motor feeder without a current in the main circuit.

Thermistor protection

The basic units (BU1 and BU2) also make it possible to connect thermistor sensors (binary PTC) for monitoring the motor temperature.

Tripping class

See "Class".

Unbalance protection

The extent of the phase unbalance can be monitored and transmitted to the control system. A definable and delayable response can be tripped when an adjustable limit is overshot. If the phase unbalance is greater than 50%, a reduction in the tripping time according to the overload characteristic curve takes place automatically since the heat development in motors increases under asymmetrical conditions.

Voltage monitoring

SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of voltage monitoring. A three-phase current network or a one-phase network can be monitored for undervoltage, direction of rotation (for three-phase current) or availability.

Win SIMOCODE DP converter

Software tool for converting "old" Win SIMOCODE DP parameter files (3UF5 device series) into SIMOCODE ES parameter files for SIMOCODE pro.


SIMOCODE pro

ToSIEMENS AGA&D CD MM3

92220 Amberg, Germany

Fax: ++49 9621/ 80-3337

SIMOCODE pro Manual

Did you notice an error while reading this manual? If so, please let us know using this form.We are grateful for your comments and suggestions.

Sender (please complete)

Name

Comany / department

Address

Telephone

Fax:

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

Automation and Drives

Low-Voltage Controls and Distribution

Postfach 4848

D-90327 Nürnberg

w w w . s i e m e n s . com / s i m o c o d e

Order-No. 3UF7970-0AA00-0

system manual simocode pro 631605022000 ds 01

Documents